Vous êtes sur la page 1sur 332

Technical

Publications

2198944-100
Revision 0

ADVANTX DLX INSTALLATION


sm
Service Manual

do not duplicate

Copyright 1997 by General Electric Co.


GE Medical Systems ADVANTX DLX INSTALLATION
REV 0 sm 2198944-100

TABLE OF CONTENTS

CHAPTER TITLE PAGE

REVISION HISTORY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . v
LIST OF EFFECTIVE PAGES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . v

1 BEFORE YOU START . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1–1


SECTION 1 – SAFETY NOTE CONVENTIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1–1
SECTION 2 – EQUIPMENT DESCRIPTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1–1
SECTION 3 – SYSTEM COMPONENTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1–3
SECTION 4 – USING THIS DOCUMENT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1–5
4–1 INSTALLATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1–5
4–2 MAINTENANCE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1–5
4–3 DOCUMENT TEXT CONVENTIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1–5
4–4 DOCUMENT STEERING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1–5
SECTION 5 – DLX EQUIPMENT AND SAFETY CONVENTIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1–6
5–1 DLX EQUIPMENT CLASS AND TYPE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1–6
5–2 COMPLIANCE WITH SAFETY STANDARDS AND REGULATIONS . . . . . . . . . . 1–6
5–3 COMPLIANCE WITH CONFIDENTIALITY STANDARDS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1–6
5–4 Safety and Recommendations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1–7
SECTION 6 – TOOLS NEEDED FOR UNPACKING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1–9
SECTION 7 – TOOLS REQUIRED FOR DLX ADVANTX INSTALLATION AND
CALIBRATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1–10
SECTION 8 – CABLE SECTIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1–11
SECTION 9 – DLX SYSTEM DESIGNATORS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1–13

2 INSTALLATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–1
JOB CARD IST1 A – RECEIVING AND UNPACKING THE DLX SYSTEM . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–3
JOB CARD IST1 B – DLX1 CABINET INSTALLATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–9
JOB CARD IST1 C – DLX CONSOLE INSTALLATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–13
JOB CARD IST1 D – DLX SYSTEM CABLING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–19
JOB CARD IST 1 E – DLX FIRST POWER-UP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–41
JOB CARD IST F – POST INSTALLATION CONFIGURATION BACK-UP AND REPORT
PROCEDURES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–45
JOB CARD IST 1 H – PHYSIOLOGICAL SENSOR INSTALLATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–47
JOB CARD IST 1 IINSITE – INSTALLING INSITE ETHERNET ROUTES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–51
JOB CARD IST O – DLX OPTIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–55
JOB CARD IST1 O – EXABYTE OPTION INSTALLATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–57
JOB CARD IST2 O – MEMB OPTION INSTALLATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–79
JOB CARD IST3 O – ANGIOPLASTY OPTION INSTALLATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–81

i
GE Medical Systems ADVANTX DLX INSTALLATION
REV 0 sm 2198944-100

TABLE OF CONTENTS (CONT.)

CHAPTER TITLE PAGE

JOB CARD IST4 O – SOFTWARE OPTIONS INSTALLATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–87


JOB CARD IST5 O – INSTALLING DLX VIDEO STATION/SCAN CONVERTER OPTION 2–91
JOB CARD IST6 O – DIGITAL HARD COPY LASER INTERFACE INSTALLATION . . . . . 2–109
JOB CARD IST7 O – REMOTE TRANSMITTER OPTION INSTALLATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–123
JOB CARD IST8 O – VASCULAR PACKAGE INSTALLATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–133
JOB CARD IST10 O – INSTALLING AN ADDITIONAL DLX DISK DRIVE . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–135
JOB CARD IST12 O – UPS INSTALLATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–139
JOB CARD IST13 O – ANALOG IMAGER OPTION INSTALLATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–155
JOB CARD IST14 O – DLX LINELOCK OPTION INSTALLATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–161
JOB CARD IST15 O – DLX TRACKBALL INSTALLATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–167
JOB CARD IST16 O – INSTALLING THE DICOM ETHERNET OPTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–169
JOB CARD IST17 O – INSTALLING THE HIS/RIS ETHERNET OPTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–189

3 SOFTWARE CONFIGURATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–1


SECTION 1 – INTRODUCTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–1
SECTION 2 – COMMON PROCEDURES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–1
2–1 Accessing the DLX Settings Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–1
2–2 Performing a Reset/Abort . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–3
2–3 Quitting an Application/Function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–4
JOB CARD CNF 1 A – DLX INSTAL SOFTWARE CONFIGURATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–5
JOB CARD CNF 2 A – DLX SYSTEM SERVICE UTILITIES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–23
JOB CARD CNF 22 A – SOFTWARE CONFIGURATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–33

4 SOFTWARE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4–1
JOB CARD LG001 – DLX SOFTWARE REGENERATION (FOR SUN O.S.) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4–5
JOB CARD LG001SOLARIS – DLX SOFTWARE REGENERATION (FOR SOLARIS) . . . . 4–9
JOB CARD LG002 – DLX WORKSTATION HARD DISK REPLACEMENT . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4–13
JOB CARD LG003 – UPDATE FOR DLX IMAGE HARD DISK DRIVE MODIFICATION . . 4–17
JOB CARD LG004 – HOW TO CONNECT A LAPTOP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4–25
JOB CARD LG005 – COMPLETE SOFTWARE LOAD FROM CD ROM: O.S.
AND APPLICATION (FOR SUN O.S.) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4–31
JOB CARD LG005SOLARIS – COMPLETE SOFTWARE LOAD FROM CD ROM: O.S.
AND APPLICATION (FOR SOLARIS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4–45
JOB CARD LG006 – RELOAD DLX APPLICATION SOFTWARE
(FOR SUN O.S. & SOLARIS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4–57
JOB CARD LG008 – FORMATTING THE SUN DISK (DOES’NT WORK FOR SOLARIS) 4–61
JOB CARD LG009 – REGENERATE VCR PATIENT INFORMATION PROCEDURE . . . . . 4–65

ii
GE Medical Systems ADVANTX DLX INSTALLATION
REV 0 sm 2198944-100

D THIS SERVICE MANUAL IS AVAILABLE IN ENGLISH ONLY.


WARNING D IF A CUSTOMER’S SERVICE PROVIDER REQUIRES A LANGUAGE OTHER
THAN ENGLISH, IT IS THE CUSTOMER’S RESPONSIBILITY TO PROVIDE
TRANSLATION SERVICES.
D DO NOT ATTEMPT TO SERVICE THE EQUIPMENT UNLESS THIS SERVICE
MANUAL HAS BEEN CONSULTED AND IS UNDERSTOOD.
D FAILURE TO HEED THIS WARNING MAY RESULT IN INJURY TO THE SERVICE
PROVIDER, OPERATOR OR PATIENT FROM ELECTRIC SHOCK,
MECHANICAL OR OTHER HAZARDS.

D CE MANUEL DE MAINTENANCE N’EST DISPONIBLE QU’EN ANGLAIS.


AVERTISSEMENT D SI LE TECHNICIEN DU CLIENT A BESOIN DE CE MANUEL DANS UNE AUTRE
LANGUE QUE L’ANGLAIS, C’EST AU CLIENT QU’IL INCOMBE DE LE FAIRE
TRADUIRE.
D NE PAS TENTER D’INTERVENTION SUR LES ÉQUIPEMENTS TANT QUE LE
MANUEL SERVICE N’A PAS ÉTÉ CONSULTÉ ET COMPRIS.
D LE NON-RESPECT DE CET AVERTISSEMENT PEUT ENTRAÎNER CHEZ LE
TECHNICIEN, L’OPÉRATEUR OU LE PATIENT DES BLESSURES DUES À DES
DANGERS ÉLECTRIQUES, MÉCANIQUES OU AUTRES.

D DIESES KUNDENDIENST–HANDBUCH EXISTIERT NUR IN


ENGLISCHER SPRACHE.
WARNUNG
D FALLS EIN FREMDER KUNDENDIENST EINE ANDERE SPRACHE BENÖTIGT,
IST ES AUFGABE DES KUNDEN FÜR EINE ENTSPRECHENDE ÜBERSETZUNG
ZU SORGEN.
D VERSUCHEN SIE NICHT, DAS GERÄT ZU REPARIEREN, BEVOR DIESES
KUNDENDIENST–HANDBUCH NICHT ZU RATE GEZOGEN UND VERSTANDEN
WURDE.
D WIRD DIESE WARNUNG NICHT BEACHTET, SO KANN ES ZU VERLETZUNGEN
DES KUNDENDIENSTTECHNIKERS, DES BEDIENERS ODER DES PATIENTEN
DURCH ELEKTRISCHE SCHLÄGE, MECHANISCHE ODER SONSTIGE
GEFAHREN KOMMEN.

D ESTE MANUAL DE SERVICIO SÓLO EXISTE EN INGLÉS.


AVISO D SI ALGÚN PROVEEDOR DE SERVICIOS AJENO A GEMS SOLICITA UN IDIOMA
QUE NO SEA EL INGLÉS, ES RESPONSABILIDAD DEL CLIENTE OFRECER UN
SERVICIO DE TRADUCCIÓN.
D NO SE DEBERÁ DAR SERVICIO TÉCNICO AL EQUIPO, SIN HABER
CONSULTADO Y COMPRENDIDO ESTE MANUAL DE SERVICIO.
D LA NO OBSERVANCIA DEL PRESENTE AVISO PUEDE DAR LUGAR A QUE EL
PROVEEDOR DE SERVICIOS, EL OPERADOR O EL PACIENTE SUFRAN
LESIONES PROVOCADAS POR CAUSAS ELÉCTRICAS, MECÁNICAS O DE
OTRA NATURALEZA.

iii
GE Medical Systems ADVANTX DLX INSTALLATION
REV 0 sm 2198944-100

D ESTE MANUAL DE ASSISTÊNCIA TÉCNICA SÓ SE ENCONTRA


DISPONÍVEL EM INGLÊS.
ATENÇÃO
D SE QUALQUER OUTRO SERVIÇO DE ASSISTÊNCIA TÉCNICA, QUE NÃO A
GEMS, SOLICITAR ESTES MANUAIS NOUTRO IDIOMA, É DA
RESPONSABILIDADE DO CLIENTE FORNECER OS SERVIÇOS DE TRADUÇÃO.
D NÃO TENTE REPARAR O EQUIPAMENTO SEM TER CONSULTADO E
COMPREENDIDO ESTE MANUAL DE ASSISTÊNCIA TÉCNICA.
D O NÃO CUMPRIMENTO DESTE AVISO PODE POR EM PERIGO A SEGURANÇA
DO TÉCNICO, OPERADOR OU PACIENTE DEVIDO A‘ CHOQUES ELÉTRICOS,
MECÂNICOS OU OUTROS.

D IL PRESENTE MANUALE DI MANUTENZIONE È DISPONIBILE


SOLTANTO IN INGLESE.
AVVERTENZA
D SE UN ADDETTO ALLA MANUTENZIONE ESTERNO ALLA GEMS RICHIEDE IL
MANUALE IN UNA LINGUA DIVERSA, IL CLIENTE È TENUTO A PROVVEDERE
DIRETTAMENTE ALLA TRADUZIONE.
D SI PROCEDA ALLA MANUTENZIONE DELL’APPARECCHIATURA SOLO DOPO
AVER CONSULTATO IL PRESENTE MANUALE ED AVERNE COMPRESO IL
CONTENUTO.
D NON TENERE CONTO DELLA PRESENTE AVVERTENZA POTREBBE FAR
COMPIERE OPERAZIONI DA CUI DERIVINO LESIONI ALL’ADDETTO ALLA
MANUTENZIONE, ALL’UTILIZZATORE ED AL PAZIENTE PER
FOLGORAZIONE ELETTRICA, PER URTI MECCANICI OD ALTRI RISCHI.

iv
GE Medical Systems ADVANTX DLX INSTALLATION
REV 0 sm 2198944-100

REVISION HISTORY

REV DATE REASON FOR CHANGE


0 February, 1998 Initial revision.

LIST OF EFFECTIVE PAGES

PAGE REVISION PAGE REVISION PAGE REVISION


NUMBER NUMBER NUMBER NUMBER NUMBER NUMBER

Title page 0

i thru vi 0

1–1 thru 1–14 0

2–1 thru 2–202 0

3–1 thru 3–42 0

4–1 thru 4–66 0

NUMBER FORMAT REVISION


2198944-100TPH A4 0

v
GE Medical Systems ADVANTX DLX INSTALLATION
REV 0 sm 2198944-100

Blank page

vi
GE Medical Systems ADVANTX DLX INSTALLATION
REV 0 sm 2198944-100

CHAPTER 1 – BEFORE YOU START

SECTION 1
SAFETY NOTE CONVENTIONS

WILL RESULT IN SEVERE INJURY IF THE INSTRUCTIONS


DANGER ARE NOT FOLLOWED.

AN OPERATING OR MAINTENANCE PROCEDURE, PRACTICE,


WARNING CONDITION, ETC., WHICH, IF NOT STRICTLY OBSERVED, COULD
RESULT IN SERIOUS INJURY.

Hazard exists which will, or could, cause a minor injury.


CAUTION

Notice: A notice indicates possible equipment damage.


Note: An essential operating, installation, or maintenance: procedure, practice, condition, etc.,
which must be highlighted.
Note: An essential operating, installation, or maintenance: procedure, practice, condition, etc., which
must be highlighted.

SECTION 2
EQUIPMENT DESCRIPTION

The DLX system, shown in Illustration 1–1, is a new generation Digital Subtraction
Angiography (DSA) system for general angiography studies with a new user interface. It has
a powerful microcomputer controlled data acquisition and processing system with the
following features:

– Acquisition protocols,
– High speed acquisition,
– Real–time subtraction,
– Real–time edge enhancement during acquisition,
– High quality fluoroscopy mode and arterial roadmapping with edge enhancement,
– Vascular multi–segment acquisition with physiological and ECG signals recording,
– Cardiac acquisition,
– Second video output dedicated to reference image,
– Immediate sequence review,
– Extensive post–processing functions,

1–1
GE Medical Systems ADVANTX DLX INSTALLATION
REV 0 sm 2198944-100

– High resolution 1024 X 1024 acquisition and display (15”),


– Very high storage capacity,
– DSA stepping,
– Fast spin,
– Bolus chasing,
– Vessel profiling.
The operator controls the DLX Series system using the function keys and controls, located on
the console, which interface with the host computer. All communication between the
operator and the system is shown on the dialogue flat panel. The 1024 monitor displays a high
resolution black and white image and associated graphics.

1–2
GE Medical Systems ADVANTX DLX INSTALLATION
REV 0 sm 2198944-100

SECTION 3
SYSTEM COMPONENTS

The DLX system is composed of:

D System cabinet,
D Control console.
The console is driven by a workstation CPU located in the system cabinet. The cabinet and
console are shown in Illustration 1–1.

The console monitor always displays the live digital image, i.e. digital fluoro, acquisition and
review.

An additional monitor duplicates the image of the in–room main monitor.

The DLX system options include:

D Infrared Remote–Control keypad which supplies the user with the following:
– an alphanumeric display with the battery and system status,
– various menus,
D Trackball,
D Super VHS video station (downscan converter, VCR, and monitor),
D Digital cassette recorder for image archiving (Exabyte),
D Insite diagnostics,
D DICOM,
D UPS,
D Multiformat camera,
D Additional image disks for increased storage capacity.

1–3
GE Medical Systems ADVANTX DLX INSTALLATION
REV 0 sm 2198944-100

ILLUSTRATION 1–1
DLX ADVANTX SYSTEM

SYSTEM CABINET

ÂÂÂÂÂÂÂ
ÂÂÂÂÂÂÂ
ÂÂÂÂÂÂÂ
SUN SPARC

ÂÂÂÂÂÂÂ
ÂÂÂÂÂÂÂ

DLX CONSOLE

IMAGE MONITOR 15”


DIALOGUE DISPLAY
PANEL

DLX KEYPAD

1–4
GE Medical Systems ADVANTX DLX INSTALLATION
REV 0 sm 2198944-100

SECTION 4
USING THIS DOCUMENT

This documentation, Service Manual 2132665-100, contains installation and maintenance


information for the DLX system. This Service Manual provides information for the basic
system, as well as upgraded systems and DLX options.

4–1 INSTALLATION

– Perform installation procedures: refer to the Installation Steering Guide. See


Illustration 1–2.
– Carry out the Image Quality procedures: refer to the Image Quality Steering Guide.
– Check the Advantx software version. Advantx must be running at least MP11’s
most recent software release. If it is not, upgrade to the latest software version.
4–2 MAINTENANCE

– Perform Image Quality procedures: refer to the Image Quality Steering Guide.
– Follow the instructions given in the Periodic Maintenance Procedures found in the
DLX Operator’s Manual.
4–3 DOCUMENT TEXT CONVENTIONS

The following conventions are used in the “ADVANTX DLX Service Manual” text.

– On–screen messages and prompts are printed in helvetica. Example:


Click on ok to continue.
– The following prompts are used to indicate the user and root prompts.
dlx# {Logged in as dlx}
# {The root prompt}
– Characters that are to be entered, by the workstation user on the keyboard, appear in
bold type helvetica. Enter the characters exactly as shown. Example:
# cd /users [Return>
Note: When working with UNIX commands, be sure to enter a space when indicated (e.g. between cd and
/users in the example above).
– Hard keys appear between < >. <Return> indicates confirmation by pressing the
“ENTER” or “RETURN” key. Example:
# logout <Return>
– Comments about commands and screen messages appear between { } brackets.
Example:
# logout <Return> {this will quit the Advantage Windows application}
– On–screen menu names or options to be selected appear in bold Helvetica, e.g., click
on XTERM Window in the Utilities Menu.
4–4 DOCUMENT STEERING

See Illustration 1–2.

1–5
GE Medical Systems ADVANTX DLX INSTALLATION
REV 0 sm 2198944-100

SECTION 5
DLX EQUIPMENT AND SAFETY CONVENTIONS

5–1 DLX EQUIPMENT CLASS AND TYPE

All of the DLX equipment is Class 1.

The DLX system has no built-in protection against water.

– Take necessary precautions to keep the DLX system dry.


The flat panel screen is Type B equipment in accordance with IEC–601–1.

5–2 COMPLIANCE WITH SAFETY STANDARDS AND REGULATIONS

All DLX system equipment complies with UL, CSA, JESRA (Japan) and IEC standards. The
DLX equipment also complies with EEC/93/42 (Medical Devices Directive).

5–3 COMPLIANCE WITH CONFIDENTIALITY STANDARDS

With respect to the European Directive, the patient database administrator must have an
agreement of confidentiality before sending a disk containing patient files for repair.

Care should be taken to prevent access to patient files by people who are not involved in
the surgical intervention procedure.

1–6
GE Medical Systems ADVANTX DLX INSTALLATION
REV 0 sm 2198944-100

5–4 SAFETY AND RECOMMENDATIONS

– Due to danger of electric shock please watch for the following symbols on DLX
equipment, and take the appropriate precautions. Safety symbols:

Symbol for ground.

Risk electric shock.

Type B equipment.

Attention, consult accompanying documents.

– For any service operation on electronic subassemblies, you must wear an antistatic
bracelet (shown below). The Job Cards indicate the need for an antistatic bracelet
with an “Antistatic Bracelet” message.

– In the DLX’s maximal configuration the ground leakage current is 15mA.

1–7
GE Medical Systems ADVANTX DLX INSTALLATION
REV 0 sm 2198944-100

ILLUSTRATION 1–2
DLX INSTALLATION AND MAINTENANCE DOCUMENTATION

INSTALLATION
JOB MISMAPS
CARDS CF. ADVANTX
DOCUMENTATION
IST

SOFT
CONFIG
JOB
CARDS
TO INSTALL CNF
DLX SYSTEM:

GO TO INSTALLATION
INSTALLATION STEERING
STEERING HARD
CONFIG
JOB
CARDS
LJS

CALIBRATION
BEFORE JOB
CARDS
YOU CAL
START
DATA
RECORDING
SHEETS
IMAGE
QUALITY
JOB
TO MAINTAIN CARDS
DLX SYSTEM: IMG
IMAGE
GO DIRECTLY TO
QUALITY
IMAGE QUALITY
STEERING
STEERING AND/OR
PERIODIC FUNCTIONAL
MAINTENANCE CHECK
JOB CARDS JOB
CARDS
VF

1–8
GE Medical Systems ADVANTX DLX INSTALLATION
REV 0 sm 2198944-100

SECTION 6
TOOLS NEEDED FOR UNPACKING

– Shears to cut the cabinet banding, and plastic cover (when applicable),
– A flat screwdriver, to help pry the console case open.

1–9
GE Medical Systems ADVANTX DLX INSTALLATION
REV 0 sm 2198944-100

SECTION 7
TOOLS REQUIRED FOR DLX ADVANTX INSTALLATION AND CALIBRATION

– See Table 1–1.


TABLE 1–1
TOOLS REQUIRED FOR DLX ADVANTX INSTALLATION AND CALIBRATION

ITEM VENDOR GE PART GE GE NOTES


MODEL CATALOG DOCUMENT
12 INCH CV
PHANTOM KIT USED IN DLX IMAGE
WITH 46–156797G1 E6320AB DIRECTION PERFORMANCE CHECKS
ACCESSORIES 14409
OR

8 INCH CV
PHANTOM KIT USED IN DLX IMAGE
WITH 46–262707G1 – DIRECTION PERFORMANCE CHECKS
ACCESSORIES 14409
RT LOOPBACK 45475911 *USED WITH DIAGNOSTIC
CABLE TOOLS
GE BUS 2139219 *USED WITH DIAGNOSTIC
LOOPBACK or TOOLS
CABLE 45475910

ADVANTX DLX USED IN ADVANTX DLX


IMAGE 46–276133G1 IMAGE PERFORMANCE
QUALITY KIT CHECKS

GRAY 21103060 USED IN IMG 0 I MONITOR


REFERENCE ADJUSTMENT
CARD (18%)

CDROM DRIVE 2113639 USED IN LG004


TO LOAD SOFTWARE
SUN SOLARIS 2129450 USED TO LOAD OPERATING
CD ROM SYSTEM
DLX C14.XX 2182640 USED TO LOAD DLX
APPLICATION SOFTWARE
CD ROM

* THESE ITEMS ARE SHIPPED WITH THE DLX EQUIPMENT.

1–10
GE Medical Systems ADVANTX DLX INSTALLATION
REV 0 sm 2198944-100

SECTION 8
CABLE SECTIONS

TABLE 1–2
CABLE MIS AND SECTIONS FOR ADVANTX-E (TITAN/VAMP)

CABLE PART NO. MIS MAP CABLE SECTION


Cabinet Power 2127592 27102A AWG10
2127591 27101A AWG14
2130313 AWG14
2133135 AWG16
2129384 AWG16
2127590 27100A AWG6
Xfmr 2127588 27099A AWG16
2124129 27080A AWG16
Advantx 10949A
11073A
10950A
10947A
10957A
First Ethernet 2128684 COAX
SUN SS4 RS232 2129197 AWG24
Keyboard 2129473 AWG28
2126993 27085A AWG28
2124177 AWG26
Keypad 2128777 AWG28
2131891 27194A AWG22
Image Monitor 2127586 27093A COAX
2127585 27092A AWG16
2127587 AWG10
Flat Panel Dialogue Screen 2130946 AWG17
2131890 27135A COAX
2127014 27088A AWG16
2132161 27136A AWG8

OPTIONS
IRK 2127582 27097A N/A
Exabyte 2127579 27095A N/A
2127580 27096A AWG16
Roadmap Frontal 2101697 26842A COAX
Second Ethernet (Dicom) 2130945 N/A AWG22 + AWG20
Laser Camera Vendor Supplied Vendor Supplied Vendor Supplied

1–11
GE Medical Systems ADVANTX DLX INSTALLATION
REV 0 sm 2198944-100

TABLE 1–3
CABLE MIS AND SECTIONS FOR ADVANTX (LFX)

CABLE PART NO. MIS MAP CABLE SECTION


Cabinet Power
2150644 27226A AWG14
2130313 AWG14
2133135 AWG16
2129384 AWG16
2127590 27100A AWG6
Xfmr
2124129 27080A AWG16
Advantx

Single Plan or Bi–Plan Frontal 1172B


1172R
1173W
1437B
1438B
26843B

Bi–Plane Lateral 1172B


10304B
10307B
10305B
10306B
10308B
First Ethernet 2128684 COAX
SUN SS4 RS232 2129197 AWG24
Keyboard 2129473 AWG28
2126993 27085A AWG28
2124177 AWG26
Keypad 2128777 AWG28
2131891 27194A AWG22
Image Monitor 2127586 27093A COAX
2127585 27092A AWG16
2127587 AWG10
Flat Panel Dialogue Screen 2130946 AWG17
2131890 27135A COAX
2127014 27088A AWG16
2132161 27136A AWG8

OPTIONS
IRK 2127582 27097A N/A
Exabyte 2127579 27095A N/A
2127580 27096A AWG16
Roadmap Frontal 2101697 26842A COAX
Second Ethernet (Dicom) 2130945 N/A AWG22 + AWG20
Laser Camera Vendor Supplied Vendor Supplied Vendor Supplied

1–12
GE Medical Systems ADVANTX DLX INSTALLATION
REV 0 sm 2198944-100

SECTION 9
DLX SYSTEM DESIGNATORS

Reference designators are codes which simplify component identification. These codes may
also be referred to as “location codes” because they are primarily derived from the location of
components and assemblies within a major assembly. The code is a convenient shorthand
which defines each component, its schematic location, and its location in the hardware. See
Illustration 1–1.

ILLUSTRATION 1–1
REFERENCE DESIGNATORS CONCEPT

TABLE 1–4
REFERENCE DESIGNATORS

SYSTEM PART DESIGNATION


CABINET DLX1
VDP DLX1A1
MVME 167 / IVP I/O DLX1A1 A1
GEIM DLX1A1 A9
XDG2 DLX1A1 A11
XDG3 DLX1A1 A13
XDG1 DLX1A1 A15
XDG0 DLX1A1 A17

1–13
GE Medical Systems ADVANTX DLX INSTALLATION
REV 0 sm 2198944-100

TABLE 1–5
REFERENCE DESIGNATORS CON’T

SYSTEM ASSEMBLY PART DESIGNATOR


CABINET DLX1
VAPZ DLX1A1 A19
ARRAY PROCESSOR DLX1A1 A20
MEM A/B DLX1A1 A21
CPI DLX1A1 A23
CP4 DLX1A1 A25
ITRL DLX1A1 A26
DVA DLX1A1 A27
VAD 3 LAT DLX1A1 A29
VAD 3 FRONTAL DLX1A1 A31
DISK RACK DLX1A1 A40
DISK 0 DLX1A1 A40 A1
DISK 1 OPTION DLX1A1 A40 A2
DISK 2 OPTION DLX1A1 A40 A3
DISK 3 OPTION DLX1A1 A40 A4
PARALAN OPTION DLX1A1 A40 A5
CSS OPTION DLX1A1 A40 A6
VDP DATA PANEL DLX1A1 A50
DOWNSCAN OPTION DLX1 A3
SUN DLX1 A2
ETHERNET DLX1 A2 A1
FLOPPY DISK DRIVE DLX1 A2 A2
HARD DISK DRIVE DLX1 A2 A3
SUN POWER SUPPLY UNIT DLX1 A2 A5
UPS DLX1 A73 A1
CABINET DATA BULKHEAD DLX1 A70
BIPLANE DATA BULKHEAD OPTION DLX1 A71
OPTIONS’ POWER SUPPLY BULKHEAD DLX1 A72
VDP POWER BREAKER STRIP DLX1 A72 A1
BULKHEAD POWER SUPPLY UNIT DLX1 A73
GEMNET GATEWAY OPTION DLX1 A4

CONSOLE DLX2
IMAGE MONITOR DLX2 A1
KEYPAD DLX2 A2
FLAT PANEL SCREEN DLX2 A3
CONSOLE KEYBOARD DLX2 A4
MOUSE DLX2 A5

1–14
GE Medical Systems ADVANTX DLX INSTALLATION
REV 0 sm 2198944-100

CHAPTER 2 – INSTALLATION

ILLUSTRATION 2–1
DLX INSTALLATION STEERING GUIDE

UNPACKING
START DLX SYSTEM
IST1 A

INSTALLING
DLX CABINET
IST1 B

INSTALLING
DLX CONSOLE
IST1 C

DLX SYSTEM
CABLING
IST1 D

INSTALLING
DLX OPTIONS
IST1 O

CHECKING THE
DLX
INSTALLATION
FIRST START–UP
IST1 E

DLX SOFTWARE
CONFIGURATION
CNF1 A

CHECKING THE
DLX
ETHERNET LINK
VF 90

PHYSIO
SENSORS INSTALLATION
NOTE: CHECK THE ADVANTX SOFTWARE VERSION. INSTALL COMPLETED

ADVANTX MUST UPDATED TO AT LEAST THE MOST RECENT IST1 H GO ON TO


CALIBRATION
MP11 SOFTWARE RELEASE. IF IT IS NOT, UPGRADE ILL. 2–2
TO THE LATEST VERSION. (CONTINUED)

2–1
GE Medical Systems ADVANTX DLX INSTALLATION
REV 0 sm 2198944-100

ILLUSTRATION 2–2
(CONTINUED FROM ILLUSTRATION 1–2)

INSTALLATION
COMPLETED

ADVANTX *
CALIBRATION
CONFIGURE CALIBRATE * REFER TO ADVANTX CALIBRATION
C001 C009 V072 AND CONFIGURATION JOB CARDS
C024 V012 X130
C023 X131
V069 X132
C005 V070 X133
C006
C012
C013

DLX
CALIBRATION
STEERING
CAL JOB CARDS

FUNCTIONAL
TESTS
VF JOB CARDS

NO
OK TROUBLESHOOT
CALL SERVICE

YES

PERFORM IMAGE
QUALITY PROCEDURES
REFER TO THE CHAPTER
IMAGE QUALITY
STEERING

POST
INSTALLATION
IST1F

INSITE ETHERNET
NEW ROUTES
INSTALLATION
IST1F
NOTE : CHECK THE ADVANTX SOFTWARE VERSION.
ADVANTX MUST BE UPDATED TO AT LEAST THE
MOST RECENT MP11 SOFTWARE RELEASE. IF IT IS
END NOT, UPGRADE TO THE LATEST VERSION.

2–2
GE Medical Systems ADVANTX DLX INSTALLATION
REV 0 sm 2198944-100

ADVANTX DLX INSTALLATION Job Card IST1 A 1 of 6

Purpose: RECEIVING AND UNPACKING THE DLX Version No.: 1


SYSTEM Date: 11–97

Time: 30 min Personnel: 2

SECTION 1
SUPPLIES

D Not applicable.

SECTION 2
TOOLS

D Not applicable.

SECTION 3
SPECIAL SAFETY PRECAUTIONS

DO NOT SUBJECT PICTURE TUBE TO SHOCK. A VIOLENT


WARNING SHOCK CAN CAUSE THE TUBE TO IMPLODE, POSSIBLY
CAUSING SERIOUS INJURY.

Notice: If the installation site temperature and the shipping or storage temperature differ by more than 20C
(36F) the equipment should remain in the packing for at least 3 hours to allow it to reach site
temperature without condensation forming.

SECTION 4
PREREQUISITES

D Not applicable.

SECTION 5
TASK DESCRIPTION

5.1 Receiving Check

D When the system is received, make a detailed examination of the packages for any signs of transport
damage.
D If there is a “SHOCKWATCH” or “TIP–N–TELL” label on the outside of a package indicating that
the package was mishandled, ask the delivery driver to wait until the damage has been identified. Write
“Damage in Shipment” on all copies of the shipping receipt, in order to justify any possible claim
against the shipper. Start the shipping claim procedure immediately.

2–3
GE Medical Systems ADVANTX DLX INSTALLATION
REV 0 sm 2198944-100

RECEIVING AND UNPACKING THE DLX


SYSTEM Job Card IST1 A 2 of 6

5.2 Packing list

Table 1 lists the main DLX components. Check the box contents against the packing slip. The following
precautions must be taken when handling and unpacking the system:

D Move the system cabinet skid only with a skid jack.


D Do not tilt or stack the cases.
D Avoid jolting the cases when moving them, as some DLX components are extremely fragile.

TABLE 1
SHIPPING CASE/SKID FURNISHED MATERIALS

Name Part Number


& " &  
! 
# "  
$ !!' 
# 
" %
   

" 
 

    
 !#'  
!" #" "
& 

"

TABLE 2
CONSOLE SHIPPING CASE FURNISHED MATERIALS

Name Part Number


& ! &
! 
 "  
' 
"  

! !  

2–4
GE Medical Systems ADVANTX DLX INSTALLATION
REV 0 sm 2198944-100

RECEIVING AND UNPACKING THE DLX


SYSTEM Job Card IST1 A 3 of 6

TABLE 3
SOFTWARE PACKAGE AND DOCUMENTATION

Name Part Number


DLX DOCUMENTATION SET 2148425
DLX C16.XX FLOPPY AND CD-ROM 2208279
Solaris 2.5.1 Backup CD-ROM 2183594

5.3 Unpacking DLX System Cabinet

CUT THE METAL BANDS (IF APPLICABLE) THAT ARE AROUND


DANGER THE CABINET CAREFULLY; THEY ARE UNDER TENSION.
LEAVE ENOUGH SPACE AROUND THE CABINET TO PREVENT
INJURY TO PERSONNEL IF THE CABINET TIPS OVER WHILE
BEING UNPACKED.

DURING SHIPPING, THE CABINET CONTENTS MAY HAVE


DANGER SHIFTED MAKING THE CABINET UNBALANCED. BE CAREFUL
WHEN WORKING WITH, OR NEAR, THE DLX CABINET UNTIL IT
IS SECURELY INSTALLED.

D The DLX cabinet may be delivered to the site in one of three ways:
– The DLX cabinet may be delivered to the site on two dollies (typical in the U.S.). See
Illustration 2–3.
– It may be delivered on a skid, with or without plastic wrapping (i.e. in many parts of Europe). See
Illustration 2–4.
– It may be delivered in a custom wood crate, secured shut with wood screws, possibly with an outer
plastic wrapping (i.e. in Asia).
D Refer to the DLX PIM 2134097–100 for complete instructions on unpacking the DLX cabinet.
D See the DLX PIM 2134097–100 for instructions on mounting the DLX cabinet.
D See the DLX PIM 2134097–100 for instructions on mounting the DLX cabinet and console in a
seismic area.
D When installing the cabinet in a seismic area, refer to the DLX PIM 2134097–100 for appropriate
cabinet placement, and mounting.

2–5
GE Medical Systems ADVANTX DLX INSTALLATION
REV 0 sm 2198944-100

RECEIVING AND UNPACKING THE DLX


SYSTEM Job Card IST1 A 4 of 6

ILLUSTRATION 2–3
DELIVERY ON DOLLIES

ILLUSTRATION 2–4
DELIVERY ON A SKID

REFER TO THE DLX ADVANTX PIM 2134097-100.

2–6
GE Medical Systems ADVANTX DLX INSTALLATION
REV 0 sm 2198944-100

RECEIVING AND UNPACKING THE DLX


SYSTEM Job Card IST1 A 5 of 6

ILLUSTRATION 2–5
DELIVERY IN A WOOD CRATE




 






    
 

5.4 Unpacking the DLX Console and Accessories

1. Unlatch all locks on all four sides of the shipping case.


2. Lift to remove the shipping case lid; see Illustration 2–6.
3. The items in the case have been carefully wedged with molded foam. Remove the foam packing
material. See Illustration 2–6 for the component locations in the shipping box.
4. Remove all components from the shipping case. Remove components carefully, as some parts are
heavy and difficult to handle.
5. Check the shipping case contents against the shipping list.
6. Check parts for any physical damage.

2–7
GE Medical Systems ADVANTX DLX INSTALLATION
REV 0 sm 2198944-100

RECEIVING AND UNPACKING THE DLX


SYSTEM Job Card IST1 A 6 of 6

ILLUSTRATION 2–6
THE CONSOLE SHIPPING CASE

1
FRONT OF SHIPPING CASE

3
FRONT OF SHIPPING CASE
4
BACK OF SHIPPING CASE

CABLES
CONSOLE BASE
KEYBOARD

MONITOR
KEYPAD

FLAT PANEL

2–8
GE Medical Systems ADVANTX DLX INSTALLATION
REV 0 sm 2198944-100

ADVANTX DLX INSTALLATION Job Card IST1 B 1 of 4

Purpose: DLX1 CABINET INSTALLATION Version No.: 1


Date: 11–97

Time: 30 min Personnel: 1

SECTION 1
SUPPLIES

D DLX system cabinet, p/n 2133372.

SECTION 2
TOOLS

D See Section ”Before You Start” of this manual.

SECTION 3
SPECIAL SAFETY PRECAUTIONS

D See Section 3 of Job Card IST1 A.

SECTION 4
PREREQUISITES

D See PIM documentation, document 2134097–100.

SECTION 5
TASK DESCRIPTION

5.1 Position the DLX Cabinet

D General instructions for arranging the equipment, for operator convenience, are given in the PIM. The
specifications for clearance around the equipment must be respected to guarantee system efficiency
and insure ease of maintenance.
D Position the DLX cabinet as described in the DLX PIM 2134097–100.
D Attach the DLX cabinet to the room wall, using the instructions provided in the DLX PIM
2134097–100.

2–9
GE Medical Systems ADVANTX DLX INSTALLATION
REV 0 sm 2198944-100

DLX1 CABINET INSTALLATION


Job Card IST1 B 2 of 4

5.2 Check DLX Cabinet

D Check that there are no disconnected cables or wires in the DLX cabinet. If any are found, see the
wiring diagram in IST1 D for the correct connections.

ILLUSTRATION 2–7
DELIVERED CABINET

12

1 VDP FANS
2 DOOR DIAGRAM
3 VDP DATA PANEL
4 CABINET BULKHEAD
5 VDP
11 6 SUN SPARC
7 CABINET BULKHEAD
UPS
1 8 VDP AND OPTION
POWER SWITCH
9 POWER STRIP
10 CABINET POWER
2 SUPPLY BULKHEAD
11 CABLE GUIDES FOR
5 CABLES FROM VDP
TO BULKHEAD
12 CABINET FANS

9
8
7

10

2–10
GE Medical Systems ADVANTX DLX INSTALLATION
REV 0 sm 2198944-100

DLX1 CABINET INSTALLATION


Job Card IST1 B 3 of 4

5.3 Check the Sun Workstation

The Sun workstation is delivered installed, with all cables connected (including power cable p/n
2129380).
D Check that the Sun workstation is secured by the velcro straps on its shelf.
D Check that there are no loose cables on the Sun back panel. See Illustration 2–8.

ILLUSTRATION 2–8
SUN CONNECTORS


OUT
W297
SBUS
I
I
TO UPS
BULKHEAD OR
UPS OPTION
IN

W293 W300
FROM UPS
BULKHEAD W026 W291 W325 W277
(OR W299 WITH INSITE W278
UPS OPTION)
CABINET BULKHEAD
CABINET
BULKHEAD BULKHEAD VDP ETHERNET
KEYBOARD FLAT PANEL

SCSI
CDROM DRIVE
CABINET BULKHEAD
OR UPS OPTION IN
SERIAL A/B ADVANTX (LFX)

2–11
GE Medical Systems ADVANTX DLX INSTALLATION
REV 0 sm 2198944-100

DLX1 CABINET INSTALLATION


Job Card IST1 B 4 of 4

Blank page

2–12
GE Medical Systems ADVANTX DLX INSTALLATION
REV 0 sm 2198944-100

ADVANTX DLX INSTALLATION Job Card IST1 C 1 of 6

Purpose: DLX CONSOLE INSTALLATION Version No.: 1


Date: 11–97

Time: 30 min Personnel: 1

SECTION 1
SUPPLIES

D DLX console.
D In a seismic area: four 7 mm diameter screws, corresponding nuts and washers to secure DLX console.

SECTION 2
TOOLS

D A standard service tool kit with metric wrenches.

SECTION 3
SAFETY PRECAUTIONS

DO NOT SUBJECT THE PICTURE TUBES TO SHOCK. A VIOLENT


WARNING SHOCK CAN CAUSE THE TUBE TO IMPLODE, POSSIBLY
CAUSING SERIOUS INJURY.

SECTION 4
PREREQUISITES

D See PIM documentation for console set-up requirements.

SECTION 5
TASK DESCRIPTION

5.1 Check the Console Components

D When the system arrives, make a detailed visual examination of the packages for any signs of transport
damage. If damage is apparent, ask the delivering driver to mark Bad Order on all copies of the freight
or express bill.

2–13
GE Medical Systems ADVANTX DLX INSTALLATION
REV 0 sm 2198944-100

DLX CONSOLE INSTALLATION


Job Card IST1 C 2 of 6

D If there is a “SHOCKWATCH” or “TIP–N–TELL” label on the outside of a case indicating


mishandling, ask the delivery driver to wait until the damage has been identified. Mark the shipping
receipt to the effect that the shipment was mishandled, in order to justify any possible claim against
the shipper. Start the shipping claim procedure immediately.
D If damage is found later, when setting up the system, call the transport company as soon as possible
to report the damage. A transport company usually will not pay a claim for this type of damage if an
inspection is not requested within this 15 day period.
D Check that all items on the packing list are present. Check the contents for small parts (listed on packing
slip).

ILLUSTRATION 2–9
DLX CONSOLE COMPONENTS

 

D The DLX console consists of:


1. Image Monitor
2. DLX Keypad
3. Dialogue display
4. Base with Alphanumerical keyboard
5. Mouse

2–14
GE Medical Systems ADVANTX DLX INSTALLATION
REV 0 sm 2198944-100

DLX CONSOLE INSTALLATION


Job Card IST1 C 3 of 6

ILLUSTRATION 2–10
CABINET TO CONSOLE CABLES

CABINET BULKHEAD

VCONS

Data Plasma

GROUND

MIS27097A
MIS27085A
J1
KEYBOARD MIS27093A MIS27092A

REMOTE CONTROL
MIS27135A
MOUSE MONITOR
(LIVE)
MIS27194A
MIS27088A

FLAT SCREEN
DLX KEYPAD

2–15
GE Medical Systems ADVANTX DLX INSTALLATION
REV 0 sm 2198944-100

DLX CONSOLE INSTALLATION


Job Card IST1 C 4 of 6

5.2 Installing the Keyboard

D The DLX keyboard is delivered pre-assembled. Connect the keyboard cable MIS 27085A between
the Keyboard connector on the cabinet bulkhead (screw in the two flat head screws to secure the cable)
and the keyboard extension at the back of the console base. See also Illustration 2–10.
D The keyboard cable part W300, between the keyboard connector on the Sun station and the cabinet
bulkhead keyboard connector, should already be connected.
ILLUSTRATION 2–11
MOUSE AN KEYBOARD CONNECTIONS

DLX CABINET

SUN WORKSTATION

W300

CABINET
BULKHEAD
MIS 27085A

EXTENSION
CONNECTOR
2124177 ‘MOUSE OR TRACKBALL
EXTENSION CABLE

ÀÀÀÀÀÀÀÀÀÀÀÀÀÀÀÀÀ
ÀÀÀÀÀÀÀÀÀÀÀÀÀÀÀÀÀ
ÀÀÀÀÀÀÀÀÀÀÀÀÀÀÀÀÀ

5.3 Installing the Mouse

D Connect the mouse cable part no. 2124177 to the cable extension located in the center of the console
base. See Illustration 2–11.
D Place the monitor on the console base.

2–16
GE Medical Systems ADVANTX DLX INSTALLATION
REV 0 sm 2198944-100

DLX CONSOLE INSTALLATION


Job Card IST1 C 5 of 6

5.4 Installing DLX Image Monitor

D Use a Phillips screwdriver to remove the screw securing the monitor back panel. Refer to Illustration
2–12.
D Set image monitor 50/60Hz switch according to the appropriate AC power supply.
D Plug the monitor power cable MIS 27092A into the cabinet bulkhead power supply. See Illustration
2–10.
D Connect the monitor data cable MIS 27093A between the monitor IN/OUT connectors and the
VCONS connector on the cabinet bulkhead.
D Reattach the monitor rear panel.
D Set the monitor on the console base.

ILLUSTRATION 2–12
REAR PANEL DISTAR IMAGE MONITOR CONNECTORS

MIS 27093A MIS 27092A


TO VCONS ON POWER SUPPLY
CABINET BULKHEAD

2–17
GE Medical Systems ADVANTX DLX INSTALLATION
REV 0 sm 2198944-100

DLX CONSOLE INSTALLATION


Job Card IST1 C 6 of 6

5.5 Installing the Flat Panel Dialogue Display

D Connect the data cable MIS 27135A to the Data Plasma connector on the cabinet bulkhead. Refer to
Illustration 2–10.
D Plug the flat panel power cable MIS 27088A into the cabinet bulkhead power supply (UPS).
D Connect the flat panel ground cable MIS 27136A to the cabinet ground.

5.6 Installing the DLX Keypad

MIS 27194A

TO KEYPAD CONNECTOR ON
CABINET BULKHEAD

D Install cable MIS 27194A between the keypad and the cabinet bulkhead. At each end of the cable,
screw in the two flat head screws to secure the cable.
D Cable W281, between the cabinet bulkhead keypad connector and the VDP bulkhead, should already
be installed.

2–18
GE Medical Systems ADVANTX DLX INSTALLATION
REV 0 sm 2198944-100

ADVANTX DLX INSTALLATION Job Card IST1 D 1 of 22

Purpose: DLX SYSTEM CABLING Version No.: 1


Date: 11–97

Time: 30 min Personnel: 1

SECTION 1
SUPPLIES

D Not applicable.

SECTION 2
TOOLS

D A standard service tool kit with metric wrenches.

SECTION 3
SAFETY PRECAUTIONS

Check that the cables are not twisted and do not rub against abrasive
CAUTION surfaces or sharp edges. Run cables as directly as possible.

SECTION 4
PREREQUISITES

D Not applicable.

SECTION 5
TASK DESCRIPTION

5.1 DLX cable connections

D In the second phase of the DLX installation the system cabinet is connected to the other DLX system
components and to the customer’s ADVANTX system. The DLX system cables are labelled to
simplify the installation.
D Make the DLX system cable connections as directed in the following sections. The system cabling
for each DLX option, is listed in the option’s Job Card.
D The MIS MAP numbers are listed in Tables 1 and 2.

2–19
GE Medical Systems ADVANTX DLX INSTALLATION
REV 0 sm 2198944-100

DLX SYSTEM CABLING


Job Card IST1 D 2 of 22

TABLE 1
DLX ADVANTX-E (TITAN/VAMP) CABINET CABLE MIS MAP

CABLE PART NO. MIS MAP FROM TO


Cabinet Power 2127592 27102A VAMP Wallbox
2127591 27101A Wallbox Bulkhead Cab. power
2130313 Bulkhead Cab. power Cab. strip outlet – in
2133135 Cab. strip outlet – out Bulkhead Cab. power
Cab. strip outlet – out Bulkhead Cab. power
2129384
2127590 27100A Cabinet ground Table ground
Advantx 10949A Cab. Bulkhead VIN A VIC
11073A Cab. Bulkhead VOUT A VIC
10950A Cab. Bulkhead SYNC. A VIC
10947A Cab. Bulkhead RTbusAout Positioner Cabinet (VPE1)
10951A Cab. Bulkhead RTbusAin Cabinet Bulkhead
Xfmr 2127588 27099A VAMP XFMR
2124129 27080A XFMR Cabinet bulkhead power
(or UPS)
First Ethernet 2128684 Bulkhead VDP Sun
SUN SS4 RS232 2129197 Bulkhead VDP Sun
Keyboard 2129473 Sun SS4 Cabinet bulkhead
2126993 27085A Sun SS4 Keyboard
2124177 Keyboard Mouse
Keypad 2128777 Bulkhead VDP Cabinet Bulkhead
2131891 27194A Cabinet Bulkhead Keypad
Image Monitor 2127586 27093A Cabinet Bulkhead Image Monitor
2127586 27092A Cabinet Bulkhead (power) Image Monitor
Flat Panel Dialogue Screen 2130946 Sun SS4 Cabinet bulkhead
2131890 27135A Cabinet bulkhead Flat screen
2127014 27088A Cabinet bulkhead (power) Flat screen
2132161 27136A Cabinet ground Flat screen

2–20
GE Medical Systems ADVANTX DLX INSTALLATION
REV 0 sm 2198944-100

DLX SYSTEM CABLING


Job Card IST1 D 3 of 22

TABLE 1
DLX ADVANTX (LFX) CABINET CABLE MIS MAP

CABLE PART NO. MIS MAP FROM TO


Cabinet Power
2150644 27226A LFX (CB8) Bulkhead Cab. power
2130313 Bulkhead Cab. power Cab. strip outlet – in
2133135 Cab. strip outlet – out Bulkhead Cab. power
Cab. strip outlet – out Bulkhead Cab. power
2129384
2127590 27100A Cabinet ground Table ground
Advantx

Single Plan or Biplane Frontal


1173W GE Bus B1 System Cabinet

1438B Cab. Bulkhead VIN A VIC


26843B Cab. Bulkhead VOUT A VIC
1437B Cab. Bulkhead SYNC. A VIC
1172B Cab. Bulkhead RTbusAout Positioner Cabinet
Biplane Lateral 1172R Cab. Bulkhead RTbusAin System Cabinet

1172B RTBUS B OUT Positioner Cabinet


10304 B RT BUS B IN System Cabinet
10307B GE BUS B2 System Cabinet
10305B SYNCHRO B VIC
10306B VIDEO IN B VIC
10308B VIDEO OUT B VIC
Xfmr 2127588
2124129 27080A LFX2 Power Unit XFmr Cabinet bulkhead power
DLX1 A73
First Ethernet 2128684 Bulkhead VDP Sun
SUN SS4 RS232 2129197 Bulkhead VDP Sun
Keyboard 2129473 Sun SS4 Cabinet bulkhead
2126993 27085A Sun SS4 Keyboard
2124177 Keyboard Mouse
Keypad 2128777 Bulkhead VDP Cabinet Bulkhead
2131891 27194A Cabinet Bulkhead Keypad
Image Monitor 2127586 27093A Cabinet Bulkhead Image Monitor
2127586 27092A Cabinet Bulkhead (power) Image Monitor
Flat Panel Dialogue Screen 2130946 Sun SS4 Cabinet bulkhead
2131890 27135A Cabinet bulkhead Flat screen
2127014 27088A Cabinet bulkhead (power) Flat screen
2132161 27136A Cabinet ground Flat screen

2–21
GE Medical Systems ADVANTX DLX INSTALLATION
REV 0 sm 2198944-100

DLX SYSTEM CABLING


Job Card IST1 D 4 of 22

TABLE 2
DLX OPTIONS MIS MAP

CABLE PART NO. MIS MAP FROM TO


OPTIONS
Exabyte 2127579 27095A Cabinet bulkhead (data) Exabyte
2127580 27096A Cab. bulkhead (power) Exabyte
UPS No MIS.
VCR 2107648 27031A Cab. bulkhead FVCR VCR
45360794 26830A VCR VCR monitor
2132388 27103A Cab. bulkhead FControl VCR
2132396 26849A Cab. bulkhead UPS VCR and VCR monitor
2133018 26829A Cab. bulkhead UPS VCR and VCR monitor
Roadmap 2101697 26842A Cabinet bulkhead VIC (J4)
FROAD1
Physiological Monitor N/A 11082A Cabinet bulkhead ECGA Physio monitoring ECG
N/A 11083A Cab. bulkhead PHY1A Monitor 1
Insite

ADVANTX–E 2127583 27091A Cabinet bulkhead VAMP Cabinet

ADVANTX–LFX 11085B EDM serial INSITE RS 232


10625A EDM COM 1 INSITE RS 232
Second Ethernet 2130945 N/A Cabinet bulkhead DiCom
Laser Camera with MMU N/A N/A Cabinet bulkhead Laser camera
(vendor (vendor
supplied) supplied)
Laser Camera without MMU
IRK 2127582 27097A Cabinet Bulkhead Remote receiver

2–22
GE Medical Systems ADVANTX DLX INSTALLATION
REV 0 sm 2198944-100

DLX SYSTEM CABLING


Job Card IST1 D 5 of 22

5.2 DLX to ADVANTX (LFX) Frontal Connection

Connect the following cabinet data bulkhead cables:

D Cable 1437B between the DLX cabinet bulkhead SYNCHRO A and VIC (J11),
D Cable 1172R between the DLX cabinet bulkhead RTBUS A IN and system cabinet (J12),
D Cable 1172B between the DLX cabinet bulkhead RTBUS A OUT and J51 on the CP1 positioner,
D Cable 1438B between the DLX video filter IN and J17 on VIC,
D Cable 1173W between the DLX cabinet bulkhead GE B1 and J3 on system cabinet,
D Cable 26843A between the DLX cabinet bulkhead VOUT A and J1 on VIC.

ILLUSTRATION 2–13
CABINET BULKHEAD TO ADVANTX CABLING

1438B IN Video Filter OUTW1001


J17 DLX1 A74
1173W
J3

DLX
ADVANTX 26843B
SKL J1
SYSTEM
CABINET
FRONTAL
1437B
J11

1172R
J12 DLX1 A70
CP1
POSITIONER
1172B CABINET
J51

2–23
GE Medical Systems ADVANTX DLX INSTALLATION
REV 0 sm 2198944-100

DLX SYSTEM CABLING


Job Card IST1 D 6 of 22

5.3 DLX to ADVANTX (LFX) Lateral Connection

Connect the following cabinet data bulkhead cables:

D Cable 10305B between the DLX cabinet bulkhead SYNCHRO B and system cabinet (see mismap),
D Cable 10304B between the DLX cabinet bulkhead RTBUS B IN and system cabinet (see mismap),
D Cable 1172B between the DLX cabinet bulkhead RTBUS B OUT and J54 on the CP1,
D Cable 10306B between the DLX video filter/IN and J17 on VIC,
D Cable 26948B between the DLX cabinet bulkhead LROAD and J4 on VIC,
D Cable 10308B between the DLX cabinet bulkhead VOUT B and J1 on VIC,
D Cable 10307B between J3 and GE B 2 on the DLX data cabinet bulkhead.

ILLUSTRATION 2–14
ADVANTX LATERAL BIPLANE CONNECTIONS

10305B
J11
10306B IN Video Filter OUT W1002
J17 DLX1 A74

10308B
J1
ADVANTX 26948B
J4
SKL
SYSTEM
CABINET
LATERAL

10304B RTBUS B IN
J Data Plasma

10307B
J3

1172H DLX1 A70 DLX1 A71

J54
CP1
POSITIONER
CABINET

2–24
GE Medical Systems ADVANTX DLX INSTALLATION
REV 0 sm 2198944-100

DLX SYSTEM CABLING


Job Card IST1 D 7 of 22

5.4 DLX to ADVANTX–E (TITAN/VAMP) Connection

Connect the following cabinet data bulkhead cables:

D Cable 10950A between the DLX cabinet bulkhead SYNCHRO A and VIC (J11 on VIC bulkhead),
D Cable 10951A between the DLX cabinet bulkhead RTBUS A IN and VIC (J12 on cabinet bulkhead),
D Cable 10947A between the DLX cabinet bulkhead RTBUS A OUT and DJ50 on the VP1 positioner
cabinet VPEI A1 A25.
D Cable 10949A between the DLX cabinet bulkhead VIN A and J17 on VIC1A25 bulkhead,
D Cable 11073A between the DLX cabinet bulkhead VOUT A and J1 on VIC1A25 bulkhead.
D Connect cable 10953A between J23 on the VIC1 A25 panel and GE B IN and OUT on the DLX data
cabinet bulkhead.
D Connect cable 11061A between J22 on the VIC1 A25 panel and BJ9/11 on the VPEI A1 A25
positioner cabinet.

ILLUSTRATION 2–15
CABINET BULKHEAD TO ADVANTX CABLING

10949A IN Video Filter OUT W1001


J17 DLX1 A74
11061A
J22
10953A
J23
DLX
VIC1 A25
PANEL 11073A
J1

VIC
BULKHEAD 10950A
J11

Data Plasma

A25 CABINET
BULKHEAD
10951A
J12 DLX1 A70 BJ9/11
VPEI A1 A25
POSITIONER
10947A CABINET
DJ50

2–25
GE Medical Systems ADVANTX DLX INSTALLATION
REV 0 sm 2198944-100

DLX SYSTEM CABLING


Job Card IST1 D 8 of 22

5.5 DLX Ground Connections

D The cable color coding is: White = neutral, Green = ground, Brown = phase.
D When connecting the main AC cable, the ground cable must be the first cable connected, and it must
also be the first cable put on the ground stud.
D Connect ground cable MIS27100A between DLX and system table ground (see MIS MAPS).
D The cabinet ground cables W202 and W201 should be already connected.
D Perform the ground cable check procedure as described in Section 5.6.
D The VDP ground cable W292 is factory installed.
D The cabinet door ground cable W202 is factory installed.

ILLUSTRATION 2–16
GROUND CABLES

DLX CABINET
FRONT VIEW
CABINET
DOOR
GROUND
W202

W292

DLX3 – SA A54 AC DIST.

MIS27100A
CABINET W201
BULKHEAD GROUND
GROUND (TABLE)

2–26
GE Medical Systems ADVANTX DLX INSTALLATION
REV 0 sm 2198944-100

DLX SYSTEM CABLING


Job Card IST1 D 9 of 22

ILLUSTRATION 2–17
ADVANTX-E (TITAN/VAMP) GROUNDING DIAGRAM

DLX CABINET

IMAGE FLAT PANEL


MONITOR PLASMA
MONITOR

MIS 27094A MIS 27136A

MIS 27092A MIS 27088A

MIS27100A

GROUND – TABLE

MIS27101A MIS27080A

LEGEND
MIS10938A
MECHANICAL GROUND
POWER SUPPLY GROUND
GROUNDED METAL PARTS IN
THE DLX SUB–SYSTEM
XFMR *C ADVANTX PART
GND CABLE FOR
POWER SUPPLY CORD

MIS 27099A SEPARATED GROUND CABLE

TERMINAL AND AVAILABLE


RESISTANCE BETWEEN GROUND
VAMP METAL PART

2–27
GE Medical Systems ADVANTX DLX INSTALLATION
REV 0 sm 2198944-100

DLX SYSTEM CABLING


Job Card IST1 D 10 of 22

ILLUSTRATION 2–18
ADVANTX (LFX) GROUNDING DIAGRAM

DLX CABINET

IMAGE FLAT PANEL


MONITOR PLASMA
MONITOR

MIS 27190A MIS 27136A

MIS 27092A MIS 27088A

MIS27100A

GROUND – TABLE

MIS27101A MIS27080A

LEGEND
MIS10938A
MECHANICAL GROUND
CB8
POWER SUPPLY GROUND
LFX2
GROUNDED METAL PARTS IN
THE DLX SUB–SYSTEM
XFMR *C ADVANTX PART
GND CABLE FOR
POWER SUPPLY CORD

SEPARATED GROUND CABLE

LFX2 TERMINAL AND AVAILABLE


RESISTANCE BETWEEN GROUND
METAL PART

2–28
GE Medical Systems ADVANTX DLX INSTALLATION
REV 0 sm 2198944-100

DLX SYSTEM CABLING


Job Card IST1 D 11 of 22

5.6 DLX Installation Ground Cables Check Procedure

In an installed DLX system, the impedance between the DLX ground connections from the LFX2 and any
metal parts must not exceed 0.1 ohm. Measuring this impedance is done by generating a current on the
ground connection to be checked, and checking the drop in voltage.

1. Disconnect the equipment from the mains.


2. Power on the measuring apparatus.
Note: Measurement apparatus: SEFELEC model CP255A 25A, or other similar model filling the following
requirements: 10A to 25A, and vacuum voltage of 6.0 V maximum.
3. Connect the apparatus to the connections to be tested.
4. Generate a current between the two ground terminals that is greater than 10A and less than 25A.

ALL ACCESSIBLE GROUNDED


TABLE IMPEDANCE METAL PARTS IN THE
GROUND TO MEASURE DLX SUB–SYSTEM
CONNECTION

10 TO 25 A
GENERATOR

5. If the impedance exceeds 0.1 ohm, check that the connections were correctly made. Refer to the
cabling/grounding diagram in Illustration 2–17.

2–29
GE Medical Systems ADVANTX DLX INSTALLATION
REV 0 sm 2198944-100

DLX SYSTEM CABLING


Job Card IST1 D 12 of 22

5.7 Ferrite Beads

D No ferrite beads need to be installed on the DLX cables. The IRK cable, the only cable requiring a
ferrite bead, is delivered with the bead already factory installed.

5.8 DLX Advantx-E (TITAN/VAMP) Power Connections

D Plug AC power cable MIS27080A, from the XFMR, into the cabinet bulkhead power supply.
See Illustration 2–19.
D Plug AC power cable MIS27101A, from the VAMP, into the cabinet bulkhead.
D Connect AC power cable MIS27099A, between the VAMP and XFMR.
D Power cables W293 (bulkhead UPS to Sun) and W297 (from Sun to bulkhead UPS) are factory
installed.
D Secure cabinet AC power cables with cable ties.
Note: All of the internal power cable connections should already be made. Check in Table 1 for the cable
number and connection, if an unconnected power cable is found.

2–30
GE Medical Systems ADVANTX DLX INSTALLATION
REV 0 sm 2198944-100

DLX SYSTEM CABLING


Job Card IST1 D 13 of 22

ILLUSTRATION 2–19
ADVANTX-E (TITAN/VAMP) DLX POWER CONNECTIONS

DLX CABINET
FRONT VIEW

DLX1 A1

DLX1 A1 A50
XFMR 230–240V
(Not to Scale.)

DLX1 A1 A2
OUT
SUN IN
W293
MIS27099A
W297 VAMP
VDP BREAKER

MIS27080A

MIS27088A
FLAT
SCREEN

MIS27092A
IMAGE
MONITOR
MIS27101A
POWER FROM
VAMP 230–240V

2–31
GE Medical Systems ADVANTX DLX INSTALLATION
REV 0 sm 2198944-100

DLX SYSTEM CABLING


Job Card IST1 D 14 of 22

5.9 DLX Advantx (LFX) Power Connections (ill. 2–20)

1. Connect field supplied MIS 27101A power cable to Circuit Breaker Panel LFX2 A3A2 in Advantx
System Power Cabinet using Circuit Breaker (46-221905P23).
– Remove front door from LFX2 Advantx System Power Cabinet.
– Remove circuit breaker retaining plate from Circuit Breaker Panel LFX2 A3A2 in Advantx System
Power Cabinet) Save four retaining screws.
– Connect Brown (Black) wire of MIS 27101A to upper pole of supplied Circuit Breaker.
– Connect Blue (white) wire of MIS 27101A to lower pole of supplied circuit breaker.
– Install supplied Circuit Breaker in CB8 slot of Circuit Breaker Panel LFX2 A3A2 in Advantx
System Power Cabinet (wires to right).
– Install LFX2 A3A2 circuit breaker retaining plate over circuit breakers using four saved retaining
screws.
– Connect green/yellow wire of MIS 27101A to chassis ground strip LFX2 A3TS5.

2. Connect ground cable between DLX and LFX (see MIS MAPS).

2–32
GE Medical Systems ADVANTX DLX INSTALLATION
REV 0 sm 2198944-100

DLX SYSTEM CABLING


Job Card IST1 D 15 of 22

ILLUSTRATION 2–20
ADVANTX (LFX) TO DLX POWER CONNECTIONS

DLX CABINET
FRONT VIEW

DLX1 A1

DLX1 A1 A50

DLX1 A1 A2
OUT
SUN IN
W293

W297
VDP BREAKER

MIS27080C
TRANSFORMER
(XFMR) LFX
MIS27088A
FLAT
SCREEN

MIS27092A
IMAGE
MONITOR
MIS27226A
POWER FROM
LFX 2 A3 (CB8)

2–33
GE Medical Systems ADVANTX DLX INSTALLATION
REV 0 sm 2198944-100

DLX SYSTEM CABLING


Job Card IST1 D 16 of 22

5.10 Option Connections

D Do not install options until after you have completed the basic system set-up and check (complete all
procedures through Job Card IST1 H).
D Refer to the appropriate Job Card for the complete option installation procedure, to install any of the
DLX options.

2–34
GE Medical Systems ADVANTX DLX INSTALLATION
REV 0 sm 2198944-100

DLX SYSTEM CABLING


Job Card IST1 D 17 of 22

ILLUSTRATION 2–21
DLX POWER SUPPLY DOOR DIAGRAM 1
DLX1 CABINET

DLX1A3 DLX1A4

DLX1A1

CONTROL

CONTROL

DLX1A1A50
SUN WORKSTATION
DLX1A2

GEMNET DGW
DLX1 A4
POWER STRIP OUTLET UPS
DLX1A72A1 DLX1A73A1

VIDEO
FILTER

VIDEO
FILTER

DLX1A70 DLX1A72 DLX1A74


DLX1A71 DLX1A73

2–35
GE Medical Systems ADVANTX DLX INSTALLATION
REV 0 sm 2198944-100

DLX SYSTEM CABLING


Job Card IST1 D 18 of 22

ILLUSTRATION 2–22
DLX POWER SUPPLY DOOR DIAGRAM 1
DXL1 CABINET
CABINET FANS * When options not available, the cables are
Y8 Y9 Y10
ready to connect at the top of the cabinet

W225

DOWNSCAN OPTION W324*


DLX1A3
DOWNSCAN OPTION W1006*
DLX1A4

VDP PANEL
DLX1A1 W292
W202
W435 (to fans VDP)
W298

VOut Vin DOOR

SUN WORKSTATION OUT II


DLX1A2

W227
IN

DGW OUT II W201


DLX1A4
IN
W1023

UPS Switch W293


IN OUT
Main Output
UPS (OPTIONAL)
DLX1A73A1 W1000
W299

POWER STRIP
DLX1A72A1
BOTTOM

OUT
PANEL

BREAKER
Type :
W322

W302

UPS BULKHEAD
DLX1A73
ON/OFF IN
IN Outlet Power W293
Options
W297

W297
Outlet

INTERNAL
OUT SCREW OUT 230V
INTERNAL G/Y cables
BULKHEAD POWER W301 SCREW
DLX1 A72 EXTERNAL Optional Cables
SCREW

2–36
Case 1: NO GEMNET OPTION DGW GEMNET OPTION REV 0
Case 2: GEMNET OPTION TR
DLX1A4 SCSI

DLX1 A70 BULKHEAD


DLX1 A1 VDP PANEL W1021 (case 2 SCSI) J W289 (case 2 SCSI) CABINET DATA DLX1 A74
RS422 REPRO NUM J W283 J RS422 REPRO NUM
GE Medical Systems

ILLUSTRATION 2–23
REPRO NUMERIQUE J W284 J REPRO NUMERIQUE
RTBUS A IN J W285 J RTBUS A IN
RTBUS A OUT J W286 J RTBUS A OUT
RTBUS B IN J W287 J RTBUS B IN
DLX SYSTEM CABLING

RTBUS B OUT J W288 J RTBUS B OUT


EXABYTE J W289 (case 1) W289 (case 1) J EXABYTE
IRK J W282 J RS232 IRK
DLX KEY J W281 J RS232 KEYPAD
W300 J SUN KEYBOARD
TRACER J
W290 J SERVICE
CSL–GEIM J
SYNCHRO A J W279 J SYNCHRO A
W306 J 2nd ETHERNET
GE BA IN J W273 J GE BA IN
GE BA OUT J W272 J GE BA OUT
GE BB IN J W275 J GE BB IN
GE BB OUT J W274 J GE BB OUT
W1022 (case 2 W276 (case 2)
INSITE ETH. J TR W276 (case 1) W276 (case 1) J INSITE (For TITAN)
W278 W277 J INSITE
TRANS. J
W276

2–37
VCONS J W253 J VCONS
J W254 J
–W319 VVCR
VDP PANEL TO MONOPLANE AND BIPLANE DATA BULKHEAD

VVCR J
ECGA J W255 J ECGA
PHY1A J W256 J PHY1A W1001 VIDEO
VINA J W257 J VINA VIN A J J
FILTER
J
VOUTA J W258 J VOUTA
FROAD J W259 J FROAD
GE B1 J W260 J GE B1
GE B2 J W264 J GE B2
W305 J VPLASMA
TR J V REPRO
F/VCR CONTROL J W270 J F/VCR CONTROL
SYNCHRO B J W280 J SYNCHRO B
W1002
VIN B J W265 J VIN B VIN B J VIDEO
J FILTER J
VOUT B J W266 J VOUT B
LROAD J W267 J LROAD
W1020
L/VCR CONTROL J W271 J L/VCR CONTROL

W026
Job Card IST1 D

DLX A71
WORKSTATION J W291 A B
BULKHEAD BIPLAN DATA
A/B UPS (OPTION)

KEYBOARD DLX1 A73 A1


PORT
ETHER
BOARD
SUN
DLX1 A2 A1
DLX1 A2 Without Videostation nor Downscan

(Options)
19 of 22
sm 2198944-100
ADVANTX DLX INSTALLATION
GE Medical Systems ADVANTX DLX INSTALLATION
REV 0 sm 2198944-100

DLX SYSTEM CABLING


Job Card IST1 D 20 of 22

ILLUSTRATION 2–24
DLX DOOR DIAGRAM (MONO PLANE)

GE B1 OP. GREY

GE B2 OP. GREY
GE B1 OP. BLUE

GE B2 OP. BLUE
PANEL
VDP

Optical GE–B1 GREY


GE–B2 GREY
GE–B1 BLUE

Board GE–B2 BLUE

(BIP)

(BIP)

(BIP)

(BIP)

2–38
REV 0
GE Medical Systems

ILLUSTRATION 2–25
DLX SYSTEM CABLING

VDP

MVME 167
+ IVP I/O
PANEL DLX DOOR DIAGRAM (BI–PLANE)

W525
J24
J23
J3 W507
J2 W511 J2
W504
W521
J7 W522
J1 W514 J27 W517 W408
Y J1
J1
W459 J2 W520
J1 W515 J28 J2
W527
J3 W460 J3 W528
J4 W482 VD W495
J1 W479

2–39
W496
J2 W480
W481 TRIG W424
W534 GE B1 OP. BLUE
GE–B1 BLUE
GE–B1 GREY
W533 GE B1 OP. GREY
W536

Board
GE–B2 BLUE GE B2 OP. BLUE

Optical
J18 W487 J6 GE–B2 GREY W535 GE B2 OP. GREY
J9 W406
W445
J1

J17 W492 J6 J10 W407


W450
J25 W516

J16 W502
W503
W505

J19 W501

J15 W493 J7
W509
W510
J14 W494 J7
W419
Job Card IST1 D

Disconnected if two VCR


Connected only if two VCR
21 of 22
sm 2198944-100
ADVANTX DLX INSTALLATION
REV 0
GE Medical Systems
DLX SYSTEM CABLING
DLX DOWSCAN MONOPLANE/BI–PLANE
ILLUSTRATION 2–26
* When options not available, the cable are
ready to connect at the top of the cabinet

Case 1: Monoplane systems (with 1 Videostation or Downscan)

DLX1 A70
BULKHEAD
CABINET DATA

IN
OUT2
VVCR J W323* DOWNSCAN Frnt W319* J VVCR
(OPTION) OUT1
W254 J VREPRO
DLX1 A3
DLX1 A1
VDP PANEL
2–40

Case 2: Biplane systems (with 1 or 2 Videostations or Downscans)

Job Card IST1 D


DLX1 A70
BULKHEAD
VVCR J J VREPRO CABINET DATA
W254

ADVANTX DLX INSTALLATION


FVVCR J W323* IN
DOWNSCAN Frontal OUT2
J FVVCR
DLX1 A1 W319*
VDP PANEL LVVCR J W269* (OPTION)
DLX1 A3 J LVVCR
W268*

sm 2198944-100
DOWNSCAN Lateral DLX A71
(OPTION) OUT2 BULHEAD BIPLAN DATA
IN DLX1 A4

22 of 22
GE Medical Systems ADVANTX DLX INSTALLATION
REV 0 sm 2198944-100

ADVANTX DLX INSTALLATION Job Card IST 1 E 1 of 4

Purpose: DLX FIRST POWER-UP Version No.: 1


Date: 11–97

Time: 30 min Personnel: 1

SECTION 1
SUPPLIES

D Not applicable.

SECTION 2
TOOLS

D Not applicable.

SECTION 3
SAFETY PRECAUTIONS

D Not applicable.

SECTION 4
PREREQUISITES

D Carry out the instruction in Job Cards IST A thru IST D.


D The DLX system should be completely installed in its definitive location.
D The interface cable connections to the ADVANTX system should be completed.

SECTION 5
TASK DESCRIPTION

5.1 Installation check

D Check the cabling using the procedures given in the previous Job Cards before powering up the system.
D Check the subassemblies’ installation and configuration.
Note: Corrective procedures are not included in this Job Card.

2-41
GE Medical Systems ADVANTX DLX INSTALLATION
REV 0 sm 2198944-100

DLX FIRST POWER-UP


Job Card IST 1 E 2 of 4

5.2 Check DLX Switch ON/OFF Positions

Check the following switch positions.


ILLUSTRATION 2–27
CABINET SWITCH LOCATIONS

A
| ON
SUN WORKSTATION
A

B B

|
ON

|
VDP BREAKER 240V 15A

C
D
C
O
|

ON

CABINET BULKHEAD D
SEE XFMR TRANSFORMER
(ON/OFF SWITCH)

TO COMPLETELY POWER OFF THE CABINET, POWER OFF :


WARNING –THE CB5 BREAKER ON THE VAMP GENERATOR (MPPU2A1A3),
–THE XFMR TRANSFORMER SWITCH,
–AND THE UPS POWER SWITCH (IF INSTALLED).

2-42
GE Medical Systems ADVANTX DLX INSTALLATION
REV 0 sm 2198944-100

DLX FIRST POWER-UP


Job Card IST 1 E 3 of 4

TABLE 1
SWITCH POSITIONS

SUBASSEMBLY AFFECTED UNITS POSITION

A) SUN Power Switch SUN STATION OFF = 0 / ON = |

B) DLX VDP Power Strip Breaker VDP OFF = 0 / ON = | |


15A–240V ref. GDB15U 2205 J/UL

C) DLX Cabinet Bulkhead Power VDP / CONNECTED OFF = 0 / ON = |


OPTIONS

D) XFMR CABINET/ SUN OFF = 0 / ON = |

5.3 Power On the System

1. Set the XFMR AC POWER ENABLE switch to ON ( | ).


2. Set the VDP power breaker strip AC POWER ENABLE breaker to ON ( | ). See Illustration 2–27 for
switch locations.
3. Turn ON the Sun workstation. The dlx login: message should appear on the flat panel after
approximately 1 minute.
4. Set the cabinet bulkhead AC POWER ENABLE switch to ON ( | ).
5. Check that the cabinet and VDP fans are operating.

TABLE 2
DLX CABINET FANS

SUBASSEMBLY FUNCTION

DLX Cabinet Fan Extract Air from Cabinet

DLX VDP Fan Extract Air from VDP

2-43
GE Medical Systems ADVANTX DLX INSTALLATION
REV 0 sm 2198944-100

DLX FIRST POWER-UP


Job Card IST 1 E 4 of 4

5.4 Start the DLX Application

D Login at the prompt.


dlx login: dlx <cr>
D The PATIENT BROWSER FROM DISK screen appears on the flat panel (this takes about 1 1/2
minutes).
D The test pattern should be displayed on the image monitor.
D In the PATIENT BROWSER FROM DISK screen, use the scroll bar to scroll the list of patients.
Select a patient. Click on VIEW and check that the patient is displayed on the image monitor.

2-44
GE Medical Systems ADVANTX DLX INSTALLATION
REV 0 sm 2198944-100

ADVANTX DLX INSTALLATION Job Card IST F 1 of 2

Purpose: POST INSTALLATION CONFIGURATION Version No.: 1


BACK-UP AND REPORT PROCEDURES Date: 11–97

Time: 30 min Personnel: 1

SECTION 1
SUPPLIES

D One floppy 3 1/2” diskette (double–sided, HD) delivered with the DLX.

SECTION 2
TOOLS

D Not applicable.

SECTION 3
SAFETY PRECAUTIONS

D Not applicable.

SECTION 4
PREREQUISITES

D Carry out the Image Quality Procedures and Operational Tests.

SECTION 5
TASK DESCRIPTION

5.1 Configuration File Back-up Procedure

Save the configuration as follows:

1. At the dlx prompt login as service:


login: service <Return>
2. Enter the proprietary GE service password:
password: <Return> {enter the proprietary GEMS password}
3. Follow the steps below to access the Save Configuration Menu.

2-45
GE Medical Systems ADVANTX DLX INSTALLATION
REV 0 sm 2198944-100

POST INSTALLATION CONFIGURATION BACK-UP


AND REPORT PROCEDURES Job Card IST F 2 of 2

STEP 1
– Click near the bottom of the screen (with
the left button of the mouse) and hold until
the DLX Main Menu appears. DLX Main Menu
DLX Application
STEP 2 DLX Others DLX Others Menu
– Drag with the mouse button pressed, Refresh Screen Image Disk
and go to UTILITIES.
Abort Application Service
Utilities Utilities Menu
STEP 3 Settings xterm
– Get the UTILITIES Menu showing the main functions. MVME–167 console
– Drag with the mouse, and select Save Configuration. Save Logfiles
– Release the mouse button. Save Configuration
Restore Configuration
Diagnostics
Setup burnin test
Cancel burnin test
Display pattern (flat panel)
DLX–VDP Ethernet Test

4. Follow the screen instructions.


5. Label the floppy diskette.
Note: It is very important to save the DLX configuration. This procedure saves time and trouble when
reloading the DLX operating system and application.
5.2 Post Installation Notes

After checking that the system operates correctly and conforms to GEMS specifications, proceed as
follows:

1. Complete the installation report and all other necessary papers. Save these and appropriate installation
data in the site file.
2. Give the documentation to the technician responsible for the site, and leave the Operator Manual near
the DLX console.
3. Clean the site.

2-46
GE Medical Systems ADVANTX DLX INSTALLATION
REV 0 sm 2198944-100

ADVANTX DLX INSTALLATION Job Card IST 1 H 1 of 4

Purpose: PHYSIOLOGICAL SENSOR INSTALLATION Version No.: 1


Date: 11–97

Time: 1 hour Personnel: 1

SECTION 1
SUPPLIES

D Not applicable.

SECTION 2
TOOLS

D Phillips screwdriver (4” x 1/4”).


D Flat screwdriver (1/4”).
D Small flat screwdriver.

SECTION 3
SAFETY PRECAUTIONS

Notice: Wear an antistatic bracelet when handling memory boards to avoid equipment damage.

SECTION 4
PREREQUISITES

D Not applicable.

SECTION 5
TASK DESCRIPTION

5.1 Access the IVP I/O Board

D Remove the VDP front panel; see Job Card D/R 0 20.
D Check if W527 (ECGA) and W528 (PHY1A) have been connected on IVP I/O; see Job Card IST1 D
Door Diagram.

2-47
GE Medical Systems ADVANTX DLX INSTALLATION
REV 0 sm 2198944-100

PHYSIOLOGICAL SENSOR INSTALLATION


Job Card IST 1 H 2 of 4

ILLUSTRATION 2–28
THE IVP/I/O BOARD

MVME 167
BOARD

2-48
GE Medical Systems ADVANTX DLX INSTALLATION
REV 0 sm 2198944-100

PHYSIOLOGICAL SENSOR INSTALLATION


Job Card IST 1 H 3 of 4

5.2 Amplify the Physiologic Signal


ILLUSTRATION 2–29
AMPLIFYING THE PHYSIOLOGIC SIGNAL

J3

TURN UP COMPLETELY (CLOCKWISE).

R1

U1

1
U4

12 V

U1

X2
– 12 V

FACTORY SET.

2-49
GE Medical Systems ADVANTX DLX INSTALLATION
REV 0 sm 2198944-100

PHYSIOLOGICAL SENSOR INSTALLATION


Job Card IST 1 H 4 of 4

5.3 Offset Adjustment

D The Offset Adjustment is factory set. There is no need to modify this setting.

5.4 Adjustment Procedure with Signal DII

1. Place the electrodes on the right and left arms, and right and left legs of the second person.
Note: Do not place the electrodes on the person who is performing the adjustments. Movement can cause
artifacts.
2. Select a D II signal on the monitoring system.
3. Adjust the ECGA channel.
– Connect the ECG monitor output to ECGA Data on cabinet bulkhead.
– Adjust with R1, using a small flat screwdriver, if necessary.
4. Lastly, test the ECGA channel in the DLX application.
Use Advantx Console to select an acquire with or without physiological signals.
Note: Refer to LJS02 A for more information on the board configuration and potentiometers.

2-50
GE Medical Systems ADVANTX DLX INSTALLATION
REV 0 sm 2198944-100

ADVANTX DLX INSTALLATION Job Card IST 1 IINSITE 1 of 4

Purpose: INSTALLING INSITE ETHERNET ROUTES Version No.: 1


Date: 11–97

Time: 40 min Personnel: 1

SECTION 1
INTRODUCTION

This will allow you to :

D add a route path for Insite Ethernet (3.1).


D remove a route path for Insite Ethernet (3.2)
D see all route paths for Insite Ethernet (3.3)

SECTION 2
PREREQUISITES

To perform any of the above procedures, you will need to access the Settings menu. To do so, log as
service and display the service menu to:
Select DLX Others and Settings and Ethernet and Routers

DLX Main Menu


DLX Application
DLX Others DLX Others Menu
Refresh Screen Image Disk
Abort Application Service
Utilities
Settings Settings Menu
167–NVRAM
Tftpboot Variables
Ethernet IP address
Worklist Ethernet Card
ATM Routers
AE–Title Table Netmask
Screen Saver Time
System Date
Language
password

2-51
GE Medical Systems ADVANTX DLX INSTALLATION
REV 0 sm 2198944-100

INSTALLING INSITE ETHERNET ROUTES


Job Card IST 1 IINSITE 2 of 4

The following tool is displayed :

Click on the Insite button :

Note: When clicking on Insite button you may have the following subwindows :

This means that the frontal IP address is not in the /etc/hosts file.

Refer to Job Card CNF 2A Section 3.4.4.

2-52
GE Medical Systems ADVANTX DLX INSTALLATION
REV 0 sm 2198944-100

INSTALLING INSITE ETHERNET ROUTES


Job Card IST 1 IINSITE 3 of 4

If the frontal IP address is in the /etc/hosts file but Insite route paths have never been set, you will see the
following :

D Click on Close if you do not want to set up the Insite route paths.

D Click on Init to automatically set up the following Insite route paths:


route add net 3.87.16.0 a.b.c.x 3
route add net 3.87.88.0 a.b.c.x 3
route add net 3.87.92.0 a.b.c.x 3
route add net 3.7.188.0 a.b.c.x 3
route add net 3.7.192.0 a.b.c.x 3
route add net 3.245.68.0 a.b.c.x 3
route add net 3.245.32.0 a.b.c.x 3
route add net 3.45.16.0 a.b.c.x 3
(a.b.c.x .is the frontal IP address loaded in /etc/hosts file)
D When Init procedure is complete, the Init pop–up window comes down.

2-53
GE Medical Systems ADVANTX DLX INSTALLATION
REV 0 sm 2198944-100

INSTALLING INSITE ETHERNET ROUTES


Job Card IST 1 IINSITE 4 of 4

SECTION 3
TASK DESCRIPTION

3.1 Adding Insite Route Path

D Position the mouse cursor in the Insite # field and enter the new Insite IP address.
D Click on Add to add this new Insite route path in the system.
A message box is displayed telling you that the Add procedure is successful.
Click on OK to view it.
D Click on See to check that this new route path is well in the system, appearing last on the list.
D To end the session, click on Close.
D You will be back to main window, and the Sun station reboots when clicking on EXIT.

3.2 Removing Insite Route Path

D Position the cursor in the Insite # field and enter the Insite IP address to remove.
D Click on Remove
A message box is displayed to indicate that the remove procedure is successful.
In this case all route paths containing the Insite IP address specified in the text field are removed from
the system file.
Note: An Error message might occur if the Insite IP address is not found in the Insite route table. Check
that the spelling is correct. Otherwise, click on See and choose the exact Insite address you want
to remove and re–enter it.

D Click on See to ensure that the route path is well removed. You should not see any ”route add net”
command with the Insite address specified in the text field.
D When finishing, click on Close.
D You will be back to main window, and the Sun station reboots when clicking on EXIT.

3.3 Seeing the Insite Route Path

D Click on See to display contents of the system file which contains the Insite route table.
This file is started during the boot of the Sun workstation
D Use the vertical and horizontal scrollbar to move around in the Insite route table.

2-54
GE Medical Systems ADVANTX DLX INSTALLATION
REV 0 sm 2198944-100

ADVANTX DLX INSTALLATION Job Card IST O 1 of 2

Purpose: DLX OPTIONS Version No.: 1


Date: 11–97

Time: Personnel: 1

TABLE 1
DLX OPTIONS

JOB CARD NUMBER DLX OPTION


IST1 O EXABYTE
IST2 O MEMB
IST3 O ANGIOPLASTY
IST4 O SOFTWARE OPTIONS
IST5 O VIDEO STATION / SCAN CONVERTER
IST6 O DIGITAL HARD COPY LASER INTERFACE
IST7 O TRANSMITTER / RECEIVER REMOTE
IST8 O VASCULAR PACKAGE
IST10 O ADDITIONAL DISK
IST12 O UPS
IST13 O MI-10 ANALOG IMAGER
IST14 O CSS BOARD (LINELOCK)
IST15 O DLX KEYBOARD TRACKBALL
IST16 O DICOM ETHERNET
IST17 O HIS/RIS ETHERNET

After each DLX option installation, please stick the adhesive-backed option label on the upper inside
corner of the DLX cabinet door. See Illustration 2–30.

Note: For options that need software configuration, see Job Card CNF1 and LG00X ”SOFTWARE”.

2-55
GE Medical Systems ADVANTX DLX INSTALLATION
REV 0 sm 2198944-100

DLX OPTIONS
Job Card IST O 2 of 2

ILLUSTRATION 2–30
OPTION LABELS

PLACE OPTION LABELS HERE

DOOR DIAGRAM

ÂÂÂÂÂÂÂ
ÂÂÂÂÂÂÂ
ÂÂÂÂÂÂÂ
ÂÂÂÂÂÂÂ
ÂÂÂÂÂÂÂ
ÂÂÂÂÂÂÂ

2-56
GE Medical Systems ADVANTX DLX INSTALLATION
REV 0 sm 2198944-100

ADVANTX DLX INSTALLATION Job Card IST1 O 1 of 22

Purpose: EXABYTE OPTION INSTALLATION Version No.: 1


Date: 02–98

Time: 3 hours Personnel: 1

SECTION 1
SUPPLIES

D 8 mm Digital archiving kit, p/n 2200349.

SECTION 2
TOOLS

D A standard service tool kit with metric wrenches.

SECTION 3
SAFETY PRECAUTIONS

BE SURE ALL POWER IS OFF TO THE DLX SYSTEM CABINET


WARNING BEFORE BEGINNING THIS PROCEDURE.

D Power down the DLX System. Turn OFF VDP stand–by switch on system cabinet.
D Shut down the Sun station.
At the dlxlogin: prompt, type:
dlxlogin: halt <cr>
The OK prompt appears. Power off the Sun workstation.
D Turn off or disconnect power at the main power source.
Notice: To avoid equipment damage take the usual precautions against static electricity for this procedure.
Wear an antistatic wrist strap when handling the Paralan board.

SECTION 4
PREREQUISITES

D Refer to the vendors manual when unpacking the 8mm Exabyte tape drive (included in kit).
D Check that the Exabyte drive is model EXB–Eliant 820 or EXB-8705T is p/n 2202844, and that the
validation label is present.
D Remove the small hardware and cables from the carton. Unwrap these parts.

2-57
GE Medical Systems ADVANTX DLX INSTALLATION
REV 0 sm 2198944-100

EXABYTE OPTION INSTALLATION


Job Card IST1 O 2 of 22

SECTION 5
TASK DESCRIPTION

5.1 Check Kit Contents

D Check contents of 8 mm Digital Archive installation kit p/n 2200349.

PART NAME PART NO.


EXABYTE DIGITAL ARCHIVER 2202844
PARALAN BOARD 2138140
EXAPAK 112 M MAG PREMIUM 2170150
IDENTIFICATION LABEL 39595507
OPTION INSTALLATION NOTE 2101555

D The following cable sets can be ordered for the Exabyte option.

PART NAME PART NO.


CABLE SET, 6 M 2127579
CABLE SET, 12 M 2127579–2
CABLE SET, 18 M 2127579–3
CABLE SET, 24 M 2127579–4
CABLE SET, 30 M 2127579–5

2-58
GE Medical Systems ADVANTX DLX INSTALLATION
REV 0 sm 2198944-100

EXABYTE OPTION INSTALLATION


Job Card IST1 O 3 of 22

5.2 Install the Paralan Board in the VDP

1. Check the configuration of the Paralan board: see Job Card LJS200A.
2. Remove the 10 Phillips head screws, and washers, securing the front cover on the VDP drawer (see
D/R020 A).
3. Connect the SCSI cable W538 between the Paralan board Differiential connector and bulkhead
Exabyte connector. See Illustration 2–32.
4. Connect cable W305 between the Paralan Single connector and the IVP I/O board.
5. Connect the power cable W317, found in the back of the disk rack, to the Paralan power connector. See
Illustration 2–32.

ILLUSTRATION 2–31
PARALAN BOARD

RESISTORS RN1, RN2, AND RN3 ARE FACTORY INSTALLED – DO NOT REMOVE.

MOLEX
YELLOW LED (SIGNAL)
RN3

To Exabyte
From Disk JUMPERS ARE FACTORY SET.
RN2

SINGLE
CONNECTOR
RN1

W4

W5
GREEN LED (POWER SUPPLY)

MOLEX

DIFFERENTIAL CONNECTOR

POWER CONNECTOR

6. Slide the Paralan board into its horizontal slot. It should clip into place.

2-59
GE Medical Systems ADVANTX DLX INSTALLATION
REV 0 sm 2198944-100

EXABYTE OPTION INSTALLATION


Job Card IST1 O 4 of 22

ILLUSTRATION 2–32
PARALAN BOARD

VDP SIDE VIEW

FRONT
BACK OF W305
CABINET TO VDP
PANEL

W538

PARALAN

W305
W317

TO IVP I/O

2-60
GE Medical Systems ADVANTX DLX INSTALLATION
REV 0 sm 2198944-100

EXABYTE OPTION INSTALLATION


Job Card IST1 O 5 of 22

5.3 Install the Exabyte

1. Place the Exabyte on a table or shelf near the DLX console.


2. Check that the SCSI port on the back of the Exabyte is set to 5 (physical address). See Illustration 2–33.

ILLUSTRATION 2–33
BACK OF EXABYTE UNIT

SCSI CONNECTORS

TERMINATOR PLUG

SCSI ID SWITCH
POWER SWITCH
FAN

POWER
CONNETOR

3. Insert the terminator plug into the terminator connector on the back of the Exabyte unit.
4. Install cable MIS 27095A between the Exabyte unit’s SCSI connector (using 2202571 SCSI1/SCSI2
adaptor) and the Exabyte connector on the cabinet bulkhead. See Illustration 2–34.
Cable W289, between the VDP and the cabinet bulkhead, is factory installed.
5. Connect the power cable 27096A between the Exabyte power connector and the cabinet bulkhead.
6. Use the procedure in Section 5.6, of Job Card IST1 D, to check the ground connection’s impedance on
the newly installed option.

2-61
GE Medical Systems ADVANTX DLX INSTALLATION
REV 0 sm 2198944-100

EXABYTE OPTION INSTALLATION


Job Card IST1 O 6 of 22

ILLUSTRATION 2–34
PARALAN AND EXABYTE CONNECTIONS
SCSI1/SCSI2 ADAPTOR

TERMINATOR

CABINET

DISK DRIVE

EXABYTE W305
TAPE DRIVE
IVP I/O W419
PARALAN

W538

VDP
PANEL

W289

POWER
POWER CABLE CABINET DATA BULKHEAD
27096A BULKHEAD

SCSI CABLE 27095A EXABYTE

EXABYTE GROUND 27189A

2-62
GE Medical Systems ADVANTX DLX INSTALLATION
REV 0 sm 2198944-100

EXABYTE OPTION INSTALLATION


Job Card IST1 O 7 of 22

5.4 Complete the Exabyte Installation

D Stick the option label inside the DLX cabinet door, in the upper left hand corner.
D Run cables through the cabinet cable guides, and tywrap any loose cables.
D Refit the VDP front cover panel using the 10 Phillips head screws removed in Section 5.2.
D Power on the main breaker.
D Power on the system.
D Power on the Sun.
D Use the procedure in Section 5.6, of Job Card IST1 D, to check the ground connection’s impedance
on the newly installed option.
D Adhere the option label on the inside of the DLX1 cabinet door.
D Close the cabinet door.
D Power on the Exabyte.
D Login at the dlxlogin prompt.
dlxlogin: dlx <Return>
Note: See the door diagram for more information on cable locations.

ILLUSTRATION 2–35
CABINET DATA BULKHEAD CONNECTOR

CABINET BULKHEAD

Data Plasma

MIS27095A
EXABYTE

OPTION POWER SUPPLY

2-63
GE Medical Systems ADVANTX DLX INSTALLATION
REV 0 sm 2198944-100

EXABYTE OPTION INSTALLATION


Job Card IST1 O 8 of 22

5.5 Update DLXINSTAL

DLXINSTAL must be updated so the system recognizes the Exabyte option.

1. Select DLXINSTAL in the pop-up DLX Main Menu to access the DLXINSTAL tool.
The DLXINSTAL Menu appears.
2. At the prompt, enter:
Enter Command Number: 5 <Return> to select the OTHER OPTIONS menu
3. Enter the number of the software option to be installed.
Enter Command: 3 <Return> to select Cassette option/Auto eject
Cassette option: Y <Return> to configure
Auto eject: Y <Return> to enable the auto eject function
Enter Command: 99 <Return> to return to the DLXINSTAL Main Menu
Enter Command Number: 4 <Return> to select Post Processing Parameters

4. Check that the parameter Auto Pause is not set to 0 (loops indefinitely). (If it is, change this value.)
5. Type 99, and press <Return>, to return to the DLXINSTAL Main Menu.
6. Select DLX Application in the pop–up DLX Main Menu to exit DLXINSTAL.
Note: For more information on DLXINSTAL and software configuration, see Job Card CNF1 A.
5.6 Functional check

D If you have not already done so, enter the DLX application.
D Store and restore one patient (see the Operator Manual for more information on the Restore function).
D THE 8mm DIGITAL ARCHIVE INSTALLATION AND TEST ARE NOW COMPLETE.

2-64
GE Medical Systems ADVANTX DLX INSTALLATION
REV 0 sm 2198944-100

EXABYTE OPTION INSTALLATION


Job Card IST1 O 9 of 22

SECTION 6
TAPE RECOVERY/REPAIR

This section covers the following scenarios:

6.1 A tape default has been detected in application

6.2 DLX crashes because of the tape content.

6.3 A DLX2 Tape has been repaired with IST1O jobcard


in rev 3 Service Manual.

_______________________

2-65
GE Medical Systems ADVANTX DLX INSTALLATION
REV 0 sm 2198944-100

EXABYTE OPTION INSTALLATION


Job Card IST1 O 10 of 22

6.1 TAPE DEFAULT DETECTED

When logged in as dlx, a damaged Exabyte tape (one that is unreadable) will cause a Tape Default
message to be displayed on the screen when you try to access the tape .

A TAPE DEFAULT HAS BEEN DETECTED. PLEASE EJECT THE


TAPE AND RETRY.
CLOSE

If this happens, click on CLOSE. The tape is automatically ejected. Retry reading the tape. If the above
message appears again, you will need to apply a specific procedure. This procedure varies slightly
depending upon the software revision level and the error message received.

6.1.1 Login as service and enter the service password.

6.1.2 Insert the damaged tape in the drive

6.1.3 Operator has to wait several minutes because if the first directory is unreadable, service Application
will reach the end of tape to read the 2nd directory (security directory for DLX2 tape format).

D If the Tape directory appears on the Browser from Tape screen:


you will need to select all of the patients, restore them to the image disk, and tou will be able to archive
them to a new Exabyte tape.

Refer to the RESTORE procedure paragraph 6.1.5.1

D If the “recovering tool for damaged tapes” window appears on the Browser from Tape screen
(see Illustration 2–36):
you will need to recover the items contained on the tape to the image disk with the recovering tool and
then archive them on a new Exabyte Tape.

Refer to the RECOVER procedure paragraph 6.1.5.2

D After several minutes, if neither the tape directory nor the recovering tool window are displayed,
in this case, you will have to erase the directory on the tape under DLXTEST and then restart the DLX
application.

Refer to the REPAIR procedure paragraph 6.1.5.3

2-66
GE Medical Systems ADVANTX DLX INSTALLATION
REV 0 sm 2198944-100

EXABYTE OPTION INSTALLATION


Job Card IST1 O 11 of 22

6.1.4 Press the left mouse button until the DLX Main Menu appears. Select Service, then Consult errlog.

Note: The software logs all Exabyte archiving errors to the user.

6.1.5 In the Errlog window that appears, look for a message indicating that the tape is unreadable. The method
used to recover the patients depends upon the error message. Select the procedure based on the following
messages:

6.1.5.1 Check the errlog file; if you find either of the following messages: “Tape error has
occurred”, or “The loaded tape is not a dx or dlx tape...closing will eject it”, perform
the following procedure:

RESTORE PROCEDURE
a – Start the DLX application in service mode (click on DLX Application in the DLX Main
Menu).

b – Insert a new Exabyte tape.

c – Clear the image disk to make room for the images to be restored from the damaged tape.
Approximate memory sizes are listed to help you manage the image transfer:

– Each Image disk = 2.0 Gbyte (1 to 4 image disks)

– Exabyte tape 15m = 608 Mb

– Exabyte tape 54m = 2,421 Mb

– Exabyte tape 112m = 5,016 Mb

d – When the image disk is cleared, remove the tape and insert the damaged tape.

e – Wait for the directory to be displayed in the Browser from Tape screen (this can take up
to 5 minutes). Select all the patients and restore them onto the image disk.

f – When you have finished restoring all of the patients, click on the EXIT icon, then click
on EXIT in the Shutdown window, to quit as service.

2-67
GE Medical Systems ADVANTX DLX INSTALLATION
REV 0 sm 2198944-100

EXABYTE OPTION INSTALLATION


Job Card IST1 O 12 of 22

6.1.5.2 Check the errlog file; if you find the message “Medium error: uncorrected block on
read..”. carry out the following procedure.
RECOVER PROCEDURE
a – Start the DLX application in service mode (click on DLX Application in the DLX Main
Menu).

b – Insert a new Exabyte tape.

c – Clear the image disk to make room for the images to be restored from the damaged tape.
Refer to the memory sizes listed in paragraph 6.1.5.1 to help you.

d – When the image disk is cleared, remove the new tape, and insert the damaged tape.
Wait up to several minutes in the Browser from Tape screen. The recovering tool window
appears.
File marks are separators written on the tape between data and images.

– If you want to recover the images from the beginning of the tape:

. for a DLX tape archived with the DLX release C8.44


Enter “1” in the file mark box.
. for a DLX tape archived with a DLX release C9.XX or greater,
there are 3 file marks on the beginning of the tape
Enter “4” in the file mark box.
– If you want to recover the images from a particular sequence:
Enter the number of the file mark where you would like to begin.
Note that you must count two file marks per sequence/photo on the tape
ILLUSTRATION 2–36

e – Click on RESTORE to begin the restore process. The application will restore sequence
after sequence until the end of the tape is reached, or the image disk is filled.

2-68
GE Medical Systems ADVANTX DLX INSTALLATION
REV 0 sm 2198944-100

EXABYTE OPTION INSTALLATION


Job Card IST1 O 13 of 22

f – If all of the sequences do not fit on the image disk, note the file mark in the window,
remove the damaged cassette from the Exabyte unit and insert a new cassette.

– Archive the recovered patients to this new tape and delete them from the disk.

– Reinsert the damaged tape: wait for the Recovering Tool for Damaged Tapes window
to be displayed (See Illustration 2–36).
Enter the file mark of the last sequence restored, and continue to restore the patients
from the tape onto the image disk.

g – Copy the patients that were taken from the damaged cassette onto a new Exabyte tape.

ILLUSTRATION 2–37

h – When you have finished restoring all of the patients, click on the EXIT icon, then click
on EXIT in the Shutdown window, to quit as service.
If you need to stop the RECOVER procedure the Abort window is displayed (See Illustration 2–38).
Note the File Mark number, and click on Close.

ILLUSTRATION 2–38

2-69
GE Medical Systems ADVANTX DLX INSTALLATION
REV 0 sm 2198944-100

EXABYTE OPTION INSTALLATION


Job Card IST1 O 14 of 22

6.1.5.3 Check the errlog file; if you find a message similar to “LBOT write failure, Physical
read couldn’t read LBOT” carry out the following procedure. You should also use this
procedure if the tape appears to be blank (empty), but you are certain that it contains
information.

REPAIR PROCEDURE

FOR THIS PROCEDURE THE TAPE MUST NOT BE WRITE


WARNING PROTECTED.
DO RESPECT THE EXACT SYNTAX FOR THE FOLLOWING
COMMANDS OTHERWISE THE TAPE COULD BE UNREADABLE
FOR EVER AND IMAGES COULD BE LOST.

a – Login as service and start the DLXTEST application (click on DLXTEST in the DLX
Main Menu),
Select 22 for the command mode,
Insert the damaged tape in the Exabyte drive.

b – At the command mode prompt type:

DLXTEST> EXB <Return>

EXBEXER > TUN <Return>


Wait and repeat the TUN command until “tun ok” is displayed

EXBEXER > RESET <Return>


“Reset done” is displayed

EXBEXER > REWIND <Return>


Wait until “rewind done” is displayed

EXBEXER > MSEL 1024 <Return>

2-70
GE Medical Systems ADVANTX DLX INSTALLATION
REV 0 sm 2198944-100

EXABYTE OPTION INSTALLATION


Job Card IST1 O 15 of 22

c – Read the first directory

EXBEXER > RDB 1 1 <Return>

EXBEXER > REWIND <Return>


Wait until “rewind done” is displayed

According to the “RDB 1 1” command result:

. If nothing is displayed under EXBEXER prompt


–––> tape format is DLX1
. If an error “invalid FSC” is displayed
–––> tape format is DLX2

d – Perform only one of the two sets of commands according to the tape format to
erase the first directory:

For the format DLX1 tape:

EXBEXER > SHO 0 <Return>


Do you want to continue? (Y/N): N

A dump of the tape directory is then displayed ; check that the 5 columns at the
left on the first line contain the tape directory identifier:

01800 000: 47454D53 452D2D44 4C582D2D 54415045

D If you don’t find these data, stop this procedure to avoid erasing images
and call the ON LINE CENTER.
D If you find these data, then go on this procedure. You will be able to erase
the first directory.

EXBEXER > WRB 150 1 <Return>


“write 150 blocks” is displayed

EXBEXER> REWIND <Return>


Wait until “rewind done” is displayed

then skip to the next step e.

2-71
GE Medical Systems ADVANTX DLX INSTALLATION
REV 0 sm 2198944-100

EXABYTE OPTION INSTALLATION


Job Card IST1 O 16 of 22

For the format DLX2 tape:

EXBEXER > SPA FM 3 <Return>


“space OK” is displayed

EXBEXER > RDB 1 1 <Return>


EXBEXER > SHO 0 <Return>
Do you want to continue? (Y/N): N

A dump of the tape directory is then displayed ; check that the 5 columns
at the left on the first line contain the tape directory identifier:

01800 000: 47454D53 452D2D44 4C582D2D 54415045

D If you don’t find these data, stop this procedure to avoid erasing images
and call the ON LINE CENTER.
D If you find these data, then go on this procedure. You will be able to erase
the first directory.

EXBEXER > SPA FM –1 <Return>


“Space ok” is displayed.

EXBEXER > SPA FM 1 <Return>


“Space ok” is displayed.

EXBEXER > WRB 150 1 <Return>


“write 150 blocks” is displayed

EXBEXER> REWIND <Return>


Wait until “rewind done” is displayed

e – Start the DLX application while still in service mode.

f – Wait for the directory or the recovering tool window to be displayed in the Browser From
Tape Screen (this can take up to 5 minutes), and then respectively perform the RESTORE
or the RECOVER procedure.

g – When you have finished restoring all of the patients, click on the EXIT icon, then click
on EXIT in the Shutdown window, to quit as service.

2-72
GE Medical Systems ADVANTX DLX INSTALLATION
REV 0 sm 2198944-100

EXABYTE OPTION INSTALLATION


Job Card IST1 O 17 of 22

6.2 DLX CRASHES BEFORE DISPLAYING THE TAPE PATIENT LIST

If the DLX does not start correctly with a tape inserted in the drive or if the system restarts after inserting a
tape in the drive and before displaying the patient list in the Browser from Tape screen, then:

Perform the following REPAIR FOR THE TWO DIRECTORIES procedure paragraph 6.2.1

6.2.1 REPAIR FOR THE TWO DIRECTORIES:

FOR THIS PROCEDURE THE TAPE MUST NOT BE WRITE


WARNING PROTECTED.
DO RESPECT THE EXACT SYNTAX FOR THE FOLLOWING
COMMANDS OTHERWISE THE TAPE COULD BE UNREADABLE
FOR EVER AND IMAGES COULD BE LOST.

a – Login as Service and start the DLXTEST application (click on DLXTEST in the DLX
Main Menu), select 22 for the command mode and insert the damaged tape in the Exabyte
drive.

b – At the command mode prompt type:

DLXTEST> EXB <Return>

EXBEXER > TUN <Return>


Wait and repeat the TUN command until “tun ok” is displayed

EXBEXER > RESET <Return>


“Reset done” is displayed

EXBEXER > REWIND <Return>


Wait until “rewind done” is displayed

EXBEXER > MSEL 1024 <Return>

2-73
GE Medical Systems ADVANTX DLX INSTALLATION
REV 0 sm 2198944-100

EXABYTE OPTION INSTALLATION


Job Card IST1 O 18 of 22

c – Read the first directory

EXBEXER > RDB 1 1 <Return>

EXBEXER > REWIND <Return>


Wait until “rewind done” is displayed

According to the “RDB 1 1” command result:

. If nothing is displayed under EXBEXER prompt


–––> tape format is DLX1
. If an error “invalid FSC” is displayed
–––> tape format is DLX2

d – Perform only one of the two sets of commands according to the tape format to
erase the first directory:

For the format DLX1 tape:

EXBEXER > SHO 0 <Return>


Do you want to continue? (Y/N): N

A dump of the tape directory is then displayed ; check that the 5 columns at the
left on the first line contain the tape directory identifier:

01800 000: 47454D53 452D2D44 4C582D2D 54415045

D If you don’t find these data, stop this procedure to avoid erasing images
and call the ON LINE CENTER.
D If you find these data, then go on this procedure. You will be able to erase
the first directory.

EXBEXER > WRB 150 1 <Return>


“write 150 blocks” is displayed

EXBEXER> REWIND <Return>


Wait until “rewind done” is displayed

then skip to step 6.2.2. (because a DLX1 tape does not contain a
second directory at the end of the tape)

2-74
GE Medical Systems ADVANTX DLX INSTALLATION
REV 0 sm 2198944-100

EXABYTE OPTION INSTALLATION


Job Card IST1 O 19 of 22

For the format DLX2 tape:

EXBEXER > SPA FM 3 <Return>


“space ok” is displayed

EXBEXER > RDB 1 1 <Return>

EXBEXER > SHO 0 <Return>


Do you want to continue? (Y/N): N

A dump of the tape directory is then displayed ; check that the 5 columns
at the left on the first line contain the tape directory identifier:

01800 000: 47454D53 452D2D44 4C582D2D 54415045

D If you don’t find these data, stop this procedure to avoid erasing images
and call the ON LINE CENTER.
D If you find these data, then go on this procedure. You will be able to erase
the first directory.

EXBEXER > SPA FM –1 <Return>


“Space ok” is displayed.

EXBEXER > SPA FM 1 <Return>


“Space ok” is displayed.

EXBEXER > WRB 150 1 <Return>


“write 150 blocks” is displayed

EXBEXER> REWIND <Return>


Wait until “rewind done” is displayed

e – Go to the end of Tape


EXBEXER > SPA FM 158690 <Return>

Check that “Hit EOD on space/locate” is displayed.


If nothing is displayed, perform the last command again.

2-75
GE Medical Systems ADVANTX DLX INSTALLATION
REV 0 sm 2198944-100

EXABYTE OPTION INSTALLATION


Job Card IST1 O 20 of 22

f – Read and check the second directory


EXBEXER > SPA FM –1 <Return>
“Space ok” is displayed.

EXBEXER > SPA FM 1 <Return>


“Space ok” is displayed.

EXBEXER > RDB 1 1 <Return>

EXBEXER > SHO 0 <Return>


Do you want to continue? (Y/N): N

A dump of the tape directory is then displayed ; check that the 5 columns at the
left on the first line contain the tape directory identifier:

01800 000: 47454D53 452D2D44 4C582D2D 54415045

D If you don’t find these data, stop this procedure to avoid erasing images and
call the ON LINE CENTER.
D If you find these data, then go on this procedure. You will be able to erase
the 2nd directory.
g – Erase the 2nd directory.
EXBEXER > SPA FM –1 <Return>
“Space ok” is displayed.

EXBEXER > SPA FM 1 <Return>


“Space ok” is displayed.

EXBEXER > WRB 150 1 <Return>


“write 150 blocks” is displayed.

EXBEXER > REWIND <Return>


Wait until “rewind done” is displayed

6.2.2 Start the DLX application while still in Service Mode.

6.2.3 Wait for the “Recovering tool for damaged tapes” window to be displayed in the Browser From Tape
Screen ( See Illustration.2–36).

Perform the RECOVER procedure paragraph 6.1.5.2

2-76
GE Medical Systems ADVANTX DLX INSTALLATION
REV 0 sm 2198944-100

EXABYTE OPTION INSTALLATION


Job Card IST1 O 21 of 22

6.3 OTHER CASE

6.3.1 If a damaged tape with DLX2 format was repaired (that is to say “WRB 150 1” was used) using the IST1O
Jobcard of the DLX Service Manual Revision 3, then the recover may have not been successfull (number of
items actually recovered = 0)

The notion of 3 filemarks at the beginning of the tape was missing in this revision 3.

If you have a tape in this situation:

Perform the RECOVER procedure paragraph 6.1.5.2


Specifying “4” as file mark number

6.3.2 In other any cases call ON LINE CENTER.

2-77
GE Medical Systems ADVANTX DLX INSTALLATION
REV 0 sm 2198944-100

EXABYTE OPTION INSTALLATION


Job Card IST1 O 22 of 22

Blank page

2-78
GE Medical Systems ADVANTX DLX INSTALLATION
REV 0 sm 2198944-100

ADVANTX DLX INSTALLATION Job Card IST2 O 1 of 2

Purpose: MEMB OPTION INSTALLATION Version No.: 1


Date: 11–97

Time: 30 min Personnel: 1

SECTION 1
SUPPLIES

D Angioplasty package installation kit, p/n 2134648.

SECTION 2
TOOLS

D A standard service tool kit with metric wrenches.

SECTION 3
SAFETY PRECAUTIONS

BE SURE ALL POWER IS OFF TO THE DLX SYSTEM CABINET


WARNING BEFORE BEGINNING THIS PROCEDURE.

D Power down the DLX System. Turn OFF VDP power switch on system cabinet, and the VDP breaker.
D Shut down the Sun station.
At the dlxlogin: prompt, type:
dlxlogin: halt <cr>
The OK prompt appears. Power OFF the Sun workstation.
D Turn off or disconnect power at the main power source.

Notice: To avoid equipment damage take the usual precautions against static electricity for this procedure.
Wear an antistatic wrist strap when handling memory boards.

2-79
GE Medical Systems ADVANTX DLX INSTALLATION
REV 0 sm 2198944-100

MEMB OPTION INSTALLATION


Job Card IST2 O 2 of 2

SECTION 4
PREREQUISITES

D Check the quality of the displayed images to be certain that the DLX is functioning properly.
D Check the MEM B board configuration in the chapter ”Jumper Configurations”, Job Card LJS021.

SECTION 5
TASK DESCRIPTION

5.1 Check Contents of MemB Kit

D Check that the kit p/n 2134648 contains the following:

PART NAME PART NO.


MEMB BOARD 2100107
IDENTIFICATION LABEL 39595507
OPTION ID 2101106
OPTION INSTALLATION NOTE 2101555

5.2 Prepare the Cabinet

D Remove the 10 Phillips head screws, and washers, on the VDP front panel. See Job Card D/R 020A.
D Remove the VDP front panel.
5.3 Install MEMB

1. Disengage the two board extractors, and remove the MEMA board from slot 21.
2. Install the new MEMB board in slot 21 (DLX1A1A21), and lock in place with extractors.
3. Stick the option label on the inside upper left hand side of the DLX cabinet door.
4. Refit the VDP front panel with the 10 screws removed in Section 5.2.

2-80
GE Medical Systems ADVANTX DLX INSTALLATION
REV 0 sm 2198944-100

ADVANTX DLX INSTALLATION Job Card IST3 O 1 of 6

Purpose: ANGIOPLASTY OPTION INSTALLATION Version No.: 1


Date: 11–97

Time: 1 h 30 min Personnel: 1

SECTION 1
SUPPLIES

D Angioplasty package installation kit, p/n 2101137.

SECTION 2
TOOLS

D A standard service tool kit with metric wrenches.

SECTION 3
SAFETY PRECAUTIONS

BE SURE ALL POWER IS OFF TO THE DLX SYSTEM CABINET


WARNING BEFORE BEGINNING THIS PROCEDURE.

D Power down the DLX System. Turn OFF VDP power switch on system cabinet, and the VDP breaker.
D Shut down the Sun station.
At the dlxlogin: prompt, type:
dlxlogin: halt <cr>
The OK prompt appears. Power OFF the Sun workstation.
D Turn off or disconnect power at the main power source.

Notice: To avoid equipment damage take the usual precautions against static electricity for this procedure.
Wear an antistatic wrist strap when handling memory boards.

2-81
GE Medical Systems ADVANTX DLX INSTALLATION
REV 0 sm 2198944-100

ANGIOPLASTY OPTION INSTALLATION


Job Card IST3 O 2 of 6

SECTION 4
PREREQUISITES

D Check the quality of the displayed images to be certain that the DLX is functioning properly.
D VIC configuration document (Review C013 – Video Distribution).
D Check the XDG board configuration in the chapter ”Jumper Configurations”, Job Card LJS015.

SECTION 5
TASK DESCRIPTION

5.1 Check Contents of Angioplasty Kit


TABLE 1
ANGIOPLASTY PACKAGE P/N 2101137 CONTENTS

PART NAME PART NUMBER


XDG BOARD 36003653
IDENTIFICATION LABEL 39595507
OPTION ID 2101106
OPTION INSTALLATION NOTE 2101555

D The following cable sets can be ordered for the angioplasty option.
TABLE 2
OPTION CABLE SETS

PART NAME PART NUMBER


CABLE FROAD1 – 26842A – VDP/SYST. 15M 2101697
CABLE FROAD1– 26842A– VDP/SYST. 21M 2101697–2
CABLE FROAD1 – 26842A – VDP/SYST. 27M 2101697–3
CABLE FROAD1 – 26842A – VDP/SYST. 33M 2101697–4
CABLE FROAD1 – 26842A – VDP/SYST. 40M 2101697–5

5.2 Prepare the Cabinet

D Remove the 10 Phillips head screws, and washers, on the VDP front panel. See Job Card D/R 020A.
D Remove the VDP front panel.

2-82
GE Medical Systems ADVANTX DLX INSTALLATION
REV 0 sm 2198944-100

ANGIOPLASTY OPTION INSTALLATION


Job Card IST3 O 3 of 6

5.3 Install the Angioplasty Package

1. Disengage the two board extractors, and remove the dummy jumper board from slot 15.
2. Install the XDG1 board in slot 15 (DLX1A1A15), and lock in place with extractors.
3. Locate cable W505 (coming from FROAD on the VDP panel) in the VDP conduit, and connect it to J6
on the XDG1 board.
4. Connect W458 cable between the YBus on the VAPZ/XDG and J1 (YBus) on the XDG1 board.
5. Cable W259 should be factory installed between FROAD on the VDP panel and FROAD on the
cabinet bulkhead.
6. Connect the coaxial cable 2101697 (MIS 26842A) between FROAD on the cabinet bulkhead and J4 on
VIC1A21 (System Cabinet – Trans. panel). For VIC configuration, see Review C013 – Video
Distribution, in Advantx documentation.
ILLUSTRATION 2–39
VIC TO DLX CABINET CCONNECTION

CABINET BULKHEAD

VIC

* MIS26842A
J4

OPTION POWER SUPPLY


7. Use the procedure in Section 5.6 of Job Card IST1 D, to check the ground connection’s impedance on
the newly installed option.
8. Stick the option label on the inside upper left hand side of the DLX cabinet front door.

*For Advantx DLX 3 Single Plane –––> MIS11144B in FROAD


*For Advantx DLX 3 Biplane –––> MIS26948B in LROAD

2-83
GE Medical Systems ADVANTX DLX INSTALLATION
REV 0 sm 2198944-100

ANGIOPLASTY OPTION INSTALLATION


Job Card IST3 O 4 of 6

5.4 Configure the Software

DLXINSTAL must be updated so the system recognizes the option.

For more details concerning the following procedure, see the DLXINSTAL Engineering Guide in
the Service Manual, and Job Cards CNF1A and CNF2A.

1. Power on the DLX system and login:


login: dlx <Return>
2. Select DLXINSTAL in the pop-up DLX Main Menu to access the DLXINSTAL tool.
The DLXINSTAL Menu appears.

DLXINSTAL PROGRAM (Initialization Utility)


Version Cxx.xx, Date xx/xx/xx

Command Command Description


1: Identification/Options
2: Consoles Configuration
3: Acquisition Parameters
4: Processing Parameters
5: Other Options
6: XDG spatial filters configuration
7: Iris aperture curve input
8: DA MODE luts parameters

To Exit Program, Choose an Application from the DLX Main Menu.

Enter Command Number:

3. At the command prompt type the following responses:


Enter Command Number: 3 <Return> to select the AQUISITION PARAMETERS MENU
Enter Command Number: 12 <Return> to select the ROADMAP OPTION
ROADMAP OPTION: Y <Return> to enable the option
IMMEDIATE DISPLAY: Y <Return> to select Immediate Display after a strore
Enter Command Number: 99 <Return> to return to the DLXINSTAL Main Menu
4. Select DLX Application in the pop–up DLX Main Menu to exit DLXINSTAL.

2-84
GE Medical Systems ADVANTX DLX INSTALLATION
REV 0 sm 2198944-100

ANGIOPLASTY OPTION INSTALLATION


Job Card IST3 O 5 of 6

5.5 Check the Angioplasty Option

Note: For more information, see the DLX Operator Manual, reference number 2128637–100.
1. If you have not already done so, return to the DLX application (select DLX Application in the pop–up
DLX Main Menu).
2. In the BROWSER window, click on NEW PATIENT.
3. Enter patient parameters (name, etc.).
4. Click on NEW EXAM (enter exam parameters).
5. Click on START EXAM.
6. Select FLUORO LAST IMAGE HOLD.
7. Select DLX CARDIAC on the ADVANTX.
8. Place phantom in front of IIR (use CV Phantom or other).
9. Execute a Fluoro and exposure sequence.
10. If your system is in Auto review, press Pause before continuing.
11. Store 1 or 2 images (stored image should displayed on roadmapping monitor).
12. Execute second acquisition and check that roadmapping image is identical.

2-85
GE Medical Systems ADVANTX DLX INSTALLATION
REV 0 sm 2198944-100

ANGIOPLASTY OPTION INSTALLATION


Job Card IST3 O 6 of 6

Blank page

2-86
GE Medical Systems ADVANTX DLX INSTALLATION
REV 0 sm 2198944-100

ADVANTX DLX INSTALLATION Job Card IST4 O 1 of 4

Purpose: SOFTWARE OPTIONS INSTALLATION Version No.: 1


Date: 11–97

Time: 15 min Personnel: 1

SECTION 1
SUPPLIES

D Cardiac Analysis, p/n 2125057.


D In-Room QA, p/n 36006318.
D Network Option (Ethernet), p/n 2128832.
D COMPAS option, p/n 2128828.
D HIS/RIS (Patient Management)
. if system is already equipped with Ethernet option : p/n 2180938
. if system is not equipped with Ethernet option : p/n 2181890 (this kit includes an
Ethernet Board: to install it,
refer to the IST16 O Jobcard).

SECTION 2
TOOLS

D Not applicable.

SECTION 3
SAFETY PRECAUTIONS

D Not applicable.

SECTION 4
PREREQUISITES

D Option password is required. (The password is delivered with the option.)

2-87
GE Medical Systems ADVANTX DLX INSTALLATION
REV 0 sm 2198944-100

SOFTWARE OPTIONS INSTALLATION


Job Card IST4 O 2 of 4

SECTION 5
TASK DESCRIPTION

5.1 Update DLXINSTAL

For each option, DLXINSTAL must be updated so the system recognizes the option.

Note: For more details concerning the following procedure, see the DLXINSTAL Engineering Guide in the
Service Manual, and Job Cards CNF1A and CNF2A.
1. Power on the DLX system and login:
login: dlx <Return>
2. Select DLXINSTAL in the pop-up DLX Main Menu to access the DLXINSTAL tool.
The DLXINSTAL Main Menu appears.
3. At the prompt, type:
Enter Command Number: 5 <Return> to select OTHER OPTIONS

Other Options
–––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––
1: Cardiac Analysis (YES/NO) = NO
2: In Room QA (YES/NO) = NO
3: Archive Option / Auto eject (YES/NO) = Exabyte Auto eject: NO
4: Network Option (None/Ethernet/Gemnet) = NONE
5: Network Configuration menu
6: COMPAS option (YES/NO) = NO
7: Send to positioner (YES/NO) = ONLY AVAILABLE WITH COMPAS OPTION
8: Draw Epipolars (YES/NO) = ONLY AVAILABLE WITH COMPAS OPTION
––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––
0 List all
1...8 Update Values
99 Back to Main Menu
Enter Command :

4. Enter the number of the software option to be installed.


EXAMPLE:
Enter Command: 1 <Return> to select the Cardiac Analysis
Password: <Return> enter the password (the password is delivered with the option)
Cardiac Analysis: Y <Return>
Enter Command: 99 <Return> to return to the DLXINSTAL Main Menu

2-88
GE Medical Systems ADVANTX DLX INSTALLATION
REV 0 sm 2198944-100

SOFTWARE OPTIONS INSTALLATION


Job Card IST4 O 3 of 4

Particular case : Network Configuration Menu

This menu is used :

D to set the His/Ris option (patient worklist)


D to set the configuration for a DLX with Gemnet
1. Type 5, and press <Return>
2. Enter command : 4, and press <Return>

1: Default Transfer mode (Gemnet only) = Manual


2: AutoArchive Destination default value = Network
3: Gateway Network is an Archive or a Transfer
destination = TRANSFER DESTINATION
4: Patient Worklist Management Option = YES
––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––
0 List all
1...4 Update Values
99 Back to Main Menu
Enter Command :

Note: For more information on the Network configuration menu, see the section “DLXINSTAL” in the
chapter “Engineer’s Guide”.

3. When you have finished, type 99 and press <Return> to return to DLXINSTAL upper Menu.
4. Select DLX Application in the pop–up DLX Main Menu to exit DLXINSTAL.

5.2 Perform a Functional Check

1. Check that the option is properly installed using the DLX Operator Manual.
2. Stick the option label on the inside upper left hand corner of the cabinet front door.

2-89
GE Medical Systems ADVANTX DLX INSTALLATION
REV 0 sm 2198944-100

SOFTWARE OPTIONS INSTALLATION


Job Card IST4 O 4 of 4

Blank page

2-90
GE Medical Systems ADVANTX DLX INSTALLATION
REV 0 sm 2198944-100

ADVANTX DLX INSTALLATION Job Card IST5 O 1 of 18

Purpose: INSTALLING DLX VIDEO STATION/SCAN Version No.: 1


CONVERTER OPTION Date: 11–97

Time: 3 hours Personnel: 1

SECTION 1
SUPPLIES

D Video station 50Hz installation kit 2107646, or Video station 60Hz installation kit 2107741.

SECTION 2
TOOLS

D Standard service tool kit with metric wrenches.

SECTION 3
SAFETY PRECAUTIONS

REMOVE ALL JEWELRY PRIOR TO STARTING THE SCAN


WARNING CONVERTER INSTALLATION. SAFETY GOGGLES SHOULD BE
WORN AT ALL TIMES, AND ONLY INSULATED TOOLS ARE TO BE
USED!
BE SURE ALL POWER IS OFF TO THE DLX SYSTEM CABINET
BEFORE BEGINNING THIS PROCEDURE.

Power down the DLX System as follows:

D Power OFF the VDP power breaker strip DLX1 A72 A1.
D Power OFF the DLX cabinet bulkhead power switch.
D Shut down the Sun station. At the dlxlogin: prompt, type:
dlxlogin: halt <Return>
The OK prompt appears. Power off the Sun workstation.
D If the UPS option is installed, power OFF the UPS.
OFF BREAKER ON / OFF
D
POWER STRIP
Disconnect power from the XFMR.
See IST1 E for more information.
D Attach a personal identification warning tag at the main power source.

SECTION 4
PREREQUISITES

D Not applicable.

2-91
GE Medical Systems ADVANTX DLX INSTALLATION
REV 0 sm 2198944-100

INSTALLING DLX VIDEO STATION/SCAN


CONVERTER OPTION Job Card IST5 O 2 of 18

ILLUSTRATION 2–40
VIDEO STATION STEERING FOR 110V

DLX1 A3

SCAN CONVERTER
OUT 2 OUT 1 IN

POWER
W323 W324
VVCR
DLX1 A1 A50
W319 VDP PANEL

W254

DLX1 A72 A1

POWER

VVCR VREPRO
DLX1 A72
DLX1 A70

27031A
VVCR VOUT
VIN
27103A
F/VCR CTRL REM

CABINET BULKHEAD 26830A

11153A

11154A
110V
POWER POWER MONITOR VIN

SYSTEM CABINET

A5 A25 AC DIST BULKHEAD

2-92
GE Medical Systems ADVANTX DLX INSTALLATION
REV 0 sm 2198944-100

INSTALLING DLX VIDEO STATION/SCAN


CONVERTER OPTION Job Card IST5 O 3 of 18

ILLUSTRATION 2–41
VIDEO STATION STEERING FOR 230–240V

DLX1 A3

SCAN CONVERTER
OUT 2 OUT 1 IN

POWER
W323 W324
VVCR
DLX1 A1 A50
W319 VDP PANEL

W254

DLX1 A72 A1

POWER

VVCR VREPRO
DLX1 A72
DLX1 A70

27031A
VVCR VIN VOUT
27103A
F/VCR CTRL REM

27187A

CABINET BULKHEAD 26830A

26849A

POWER MONITOR VIN

27188A

2-93
GE Medical Systems ADVANTX DLX INSTALLATION
REV 0 sm 2198944-100

INSTALLING DLX VIDEO STATION/SCAN


CONVERTER OPTION Job Card IST5 O 4 of 18

SECTION 5
PROCEDURE

5.1 Check the VCR and Scan Converter Kit Contents

Check the downscan kit p/n 2109271 contents against the packing list. The VCR kit contains the following
items, as well as a terminator for the scan converter.
TABLE 1
DLX VIDEO STATION 230–240 VAC 50HZ

QTY DESCRIPTION PART NUMBER


DLX/VIDEO STATION 50HZ 2107646
1 MONITOR DISTAR 15" SLR LLR 50/60 HZ 2116937
1 SONY VCR S-VHS 625/220V/CEI 45067461
1 SCAN CONVERTER FOR VCR 4/3 2103288
1 DOWNSCAN MOUNTING KIT 46-316899G1
1 IDENTIFICATION LABEL 39595507

TABLE 2
DLX VIDEO STATION 110 VAC 60HZ

QTY DESCRIPTION PART NUMBER


DLX/VIDEO STATION 60HZ 2107741
1 MONITOR DISTAR 15" SLR LLR 50/60 HZ 2116937
1 SONY VCR S-VHS 525L/110V/UL/CSA 45067462
1 SCAN CONVERTER FOR VCR 4/3 2103288
1 DOWNSCAN MOUNTING KIT 46-316899G1
1 IDENTIFICATION LABEL 39595507

The following cable sets are not included in the video station kit, but may be ordered using the reference
numbers below.
TABLE 3
DLX VIDEO STATION CABLE SET

CABLE SET (NOT INCLUDED IN KIT)


(6M) 2127558
(12M) 2127558-2
(18M) 2127558-3
(24M) 2127558-4
(30M) 2127558-5
(40M) 2127558-6

2-94
GE Medical Systems ADVANTX DLX INSTALLATION
REV 0 sm 2198944-100

INSTALLING DLX VIDEO STATION/SCAN


CONVERTER OPTION Job Card IST5 O 5 of 18

5.2 Scan Converter Installation Procedure (FRONTAL)

Refer to Illustrations 2–42.

1. Open the DLX cabinet front door.


2. Install clip–on captive nuts to the ends of the two mounting rails.
3. Use two 10–32 x 0.625” screws to secure the upper mounting rail behind the top holes in the front
cabinet rails.
4. Remove screws from the scan converter mounting bracket.
5. Rotate scan converter mounting bracket 180° to show scan converter connections at top of plate, and
re–install screws.
6. Install two clip–on captive nuts on the bottom mounting rail in holes 2 and 14 (count from left to right;
count the leftmost holes as 1).
7. Remove the two South–Co 1/4 turn screws from the scan convertor mounting bracket.
8. Install Scan Convertor mounting bracket to the lower mounting rack using two 10–32 x .625 screws.
9. Place the whole mounting rail with the scan converter on the upper mounting rail.
10. Use two 10–32 x 0.625” screws to secure the lower mounting rail behind holes 6 in the front cabinet
rails (count down; count the top holes as 1).
11. Connect power cable W324 (from the DLX1 A72A1 VDP breaker strip in the DLX cabinet) to the scan
converter power receptacle J1.
12. Disconnect cable W254 from the VVCR connector on the DLXA1 A50 VDP panel; connect it to the
scan converter Video Out 1 connector (the other end is connected to the DLX1 A70 cabinet bulkhead
VREPRO).
13. Connect cable W319 (from the DLX1 A70 cabinet bulkhead VVCR) to the scan converter Video Out 2
connector.
14. Connect video cable W323 between the DLX1 A1 A50 VDP panel V/VCR connector and the scan
converter Video In connector. W323 must be moved from FVVCR to VVCR on A50 VDP Panel for six
plan units.
15. Install the 75 ohm terminator that was removed from scan convertor video OUT 1 onto A70 bulkhead
connector V. REPRO.
V REPRO must always be terminated when no repro video unit is used.

2-95
GE Medical Systems ADVANTX DLX INSTALLATION
REV 0 sm 2198944-100

INSTALLING DLX VIDEO STATION/SCAN


CONVERTER OPTION Job Card IST5 O 6 of 18

ILLUSTRATION 2–42
SCAN CONVERTER IN RACK (FRONTAL)

Vertical
mounting
holes

2 Horizontal 14
mounting holes

MOUNTING BRACKET POSITION

2-96
GE Medical Systems ADVANTX DLX INSTALLATION
REV 0 sm 2198944-100

INSTALLING DLX VIDEO STATION/SCAN


CONVERTER OPTION Job Card IST5 O 7 of 18

ILLUSTRATION 2–43
VIDEO STATION STEERING FOR 110V BI–PLANE
POWER

POWER
DLX1 A3 DLX1 A4

SCAN CONV. SCAN CONV.


FRONTAL LATERAL

W1006
W324

OUT 2 IN IN OUT 2

W323 W269

FVVCR LVVCR

VDP PANEL
DLX1 A1
W319

W268

VVCR

DLX1 A72 A1
W254

L/VCR CONTROL

DLX1 A72
DLX1 A70

DLX1 A71
V.REPRO
F/VCR CTRL

Fvvcr

LVVCR

27103A
27103A

27031A

27031A

REM VIN VIN REM

  
 11153A 11153A
 
 

VOUT VOUT

26830A 110V SYSTEM 26830A


VIN
POWER CABINET VIN

MONITOR MONITOR
FRONTAL 11154A 11154A LATERAL
POWER POWER

2-97
GE Medical Systems ADVANTX DLX INSTALLATION
REV 0 sm 2198944-100

INSTALLING DLX VIDEO STATION/SCAN


CONVERTER OPTION Job Card IST5 O 8 of 18

ILLUSTRATION 2–44
VIDEO STATION STEERING FOR 230/240V BI–PLANE
POWER

POWER
DLX1 A3 DLX1 A4

SCAN CONV. SCAN CONV.


FRONTAL LATERAL

W1006
W324

OUT 2 IN IN OUT 2

W323 W269

FVVCR LVVCR

VDP PANEL
DLX1 A1
W319

W268

VVCR

DLX1 A72 A1
W254

DLX1 A72
L/VCR CONTROL
DLX1 A70

DLX1 A71
V.REPRO
F/VCR CTRL

27188A
Fvvcr

LVVCR

27187A

POWER 26849A
27103A
27187A

27103A

27031A

27031A

REM VIN VIN REM

  
  
 
27188A

VOUT VOUT

26830A 26830A
VIN VIN

MONITOR MONITOR
FRONTAL POWER LATERAL
26849A

2-98
GE Medical Systems ADVANTX DLX INSTALLATION
REV 0 sm 2198944-100

INSTALLING DLX VIDEO STATION/SCAN


CONVERTER OPTION Job Card IST5 O 9 of 18

5.3 Scan Converter Installation Procedure (LATERAL)

Refer to Illustration 2–45.

1. Open the DLX cabinet front door.


2. Disconnect the scan converter cables (Frontal).
3. Dismount the lower mounting rail and scan converter (Frontal).
4. Remove scews from the scan converter fixing plate (Lateral).
5. Rotate scan converter mounting bracket 180° to show scan converter connections at top of plate, and
re–install screws.
6. Install two clip–on captive nuts on the lower mounting rail in holes 15 and 28 (count from left to right;
count the leftmost hole as one).
7. Remove the two South–Co 1/4 turn screws from the scan convertor mounting bracket.
8. Fix the scan converter (Lateral) onto the rail/scan converter ensemble (Frontal) using two 10–32 x
0.625” screws.
9. Place the lower mounting rail and two scan converters onto the upper mounting rail.
10. Use two 10–32 x 0.625” screws to secure the lower mounting rail behind holes 6 in the front cabinet
rails (count down; count the top holes as 1).
11. Connect power cable W324 (from the DLX1 A72A1 VDP breaker strip in the DLX cabinet) to the scan
converter power receptacle J1.
12. Connect power cable W 1006 (from the DLX1 A72A1 VDP breaker strip in the DLX cabinet) to the
scan converter power receptacle J1.
13. Connect cable W254 to the VVCR connection VDP panel DLX1 A1 A50.
14. Connect cable W319 (from the DLX1 A71 cabinet bulkhead FVVCR) to the Frontal scan converter
Video Out 2 connector.
15. Connect video cable W323 between the DLX1 A1 A50 VDP panel V/VCR connector and the frontal
scan converter Video In connector. W323 must be moved from FVVCR to VVCR on A50 VDP Panel
for six plan units.
16. Connect video cable W269 between the DLX1 A1 A50 VDP Panel LVVCR connector and the Lateral
scan converter video in connector.
17. Connect cable W268 (from the DLX1 A71 cabinet bulkhead LVVCR) to the Lateral scan converter
Video Out 2 connector.
18. Install the 75 ohm terminator that was removed from scan convertor video OUT 1 onto A70 bulkhead
connector V. REPRO.
V REPRO must always be terminated when no repro video unit is used.

2-99
GE Medical Systems ADVANTX DLX INSTALLATION
REV 0 sm 2198944-100

INSTALLING DLX VIDEO STATION/SCAN


CONVERTER OPTION Job Card IST5 O 10 of 18

ILLUSTRATION 2–45
SCAN CONVERTER IN RACK (LATERAL)

Vertical
mounting
holes

15 Horizontal 27
mounting holes

MOUNTING BRACKET POSITION

2-100
GE Medical Systems ADVANTX DLX INSTALLATION
REV 0 sm 2198944-100

INSTALLING DLX VIDEO STATION/SCAN


CONVERTER OPTION Job Card IST5 O 11 of 18

ILLUSTRATION 2–46
SCAN CONVERTER REAR PANEL CONTROLS AND CONNECTORS

AC POWER 2 AMP
PRESS
GROUND

S 1
F
I
R
G
A
N
M
A TO
E
L RESET

R S
FACTORY PORT INSITE PORT E M
S S
W S P W VIDEO VIDEO VIDEO VIDEO
1 E T 2 OUT 3 OUT 2 OUT 1 INPUT
T E

LOOP-
THRU

LOOPED THRU: insert a terminator, or connect to


analog repro laser.
TABLE 4
SCAN CONVERTER REAR PANEL CONNECTOR DESCRIPTION

NAME DESCRIPTION
POWER SWITCH TURNS MAIN SCAN CONVERTER ON.
LED GREEN = ON, AND INDICATES NORMAL OPERATING MODE. STEADY GREEN = HI–LINE INPUT.
FLASHING = LO–LINE INPUT.
SW1 AUTO–CALIBRATION SWITCH – NORMALLY THIS IS SET TO ”ON”.
SMPTE RESETS THE SCAN CONVERTER’S CPU.
AC POWER POWER RECEPTACLE – RECEIVES 230–240 V MAIN POWER.
SIGNAL GROUND DC COMMON GROUND CONNECTOR.
FRAME GROUND PROTECTIVE GROUND CONNECTOR.
VIDEO INPUT BLACK AND WHITE VIDEO INPUT: 1.05 VPP LOOPED THRU.
VIDEO OUTPUT 1 PROVIDES LOOPED–THRU VIDEO OUTPUT FOR ”LIVE” MONITOR.
VIDEO OUTPUT 2 PROVIDES SCAN–CONVERTED VIDEO OUTPUT FOR DISPLAY MONITORS (1.05 VPP 75–OHM
VIDEO OUTPUT 3 TERMINATED).
INSITE PORT SERIAL I/O PORT (RS–232 SIGNAL LEVEL) – CONFIGURED AS DATA TERMINAL EQUIPMANT (DTE).
FACTORY PORT PROVIDES OPTIONAL FACTORY DIAGNOSTICS (RS–232 SIGNAL LEVEL).

2-101
GE Medical Systems ADVANTX DLX INSTALLATION
REV 0 sm 2198944-100

INSTALLING DLX VIDEO STATION/SCAN


CONVERTER OPTION Job Card IST5 O 12 of 18

SECTION 6
VCR INSTALLATION PROCEDURE (FRONTAL/LATERAL)

6.1 Preliminary Procedures

1. Check that the GEMS Inspection Record, in the VCR packaging, is correctly completed.
2. Place the VCR and monitor close to DLX console. See the Pre-Installation Manual.
3. Check that the monitor‘s 50/60Hz selector switch is correctly set.

The monitor must be set to the correct voltage for the local power supply
CAUTION (110 V or 230 V/240 V: refer to the monitor manual to change this setting.

4. Check that the VCR model reference number is correct. (This is found on the back of the VCR unit.)

6.2 Frontal VCR Installation Procedure

1. Install three–way cable 26829A between DLX1 A72 cabinet bulkhead, VCR and monitor. See
Illustration 2–47.
2. Install cable 26830A between VIDEO OUT on VCR and IN on monitor.
3. Install cable 27031A between cabinet bulkhead DLX1 A70 VVCR and VIDEO IN on VCR (or
FVVCR DLX1 A71 bulkhead for Bi–plane installation).
4. Install cable 27103A between the cabinet data bulkhead DLX1 A70 and VCR (F Control).
5. Stick the option label on the inside upper left hand of the cabinet front door.
6.3 Lateral VCR Installation Procedure

1. Install three–way cable 26829A between DLX1 A72 cabinet bulkhead, lateral VCR and monitor. See
Illustration 2–48.
2. Install cable 26830A between VIDEO OUT on VCR and IN on monitor.
3. Install cable 27031A between DLX1 A71 cabinet bulkhead LVVCR and video IN on Lateral VCR.
4. Install cable 27103A LVCR control between the cabinet bulkhead DLX1 A71 and Lateral VCR
(F Control).

2-102
GE Medical Systems ADVANTX DLX INSTALLATION
REV 0 sm 2198944-100

INSTALLING DLX VIDEO STATION/SCAN


CONVERTER OPTION Job Card IST5 O 13 of 18

ILLUSTRATION 2–47
VCR CONNECTIONS MONO PLAN SYSTEM

W319
OUT2
OUT1 IN

W254
MIS27031A

MIS27103A

TO FRONT OF VCR
REM
VOLTAGE W324
SELECTOR
W323
Audio In Video In Audio Out Monitor Out Video Out REMOTE

–AC IN
POWER
VVCR

VDP PANEL
GROUND TERMINAL VCR REAR

MIS26830A

MONITOR REAR

ËË
50/60Hz SWITCH
VREPRO
STRIP OUTLET

FVVCR

F/VCR CONTROL
75–OHM
TERMINATOR PLUG

MIS26849A (Y CABLE)

2-103
GE Medical Systems ADVANTX DLX INSTALLATION
REV 0 sm 2198944-100

INSTALLING DLX VIDEO STATION/SCAN


CONVERTER OPTION Job Card IST5 O 14 of 18

ILLUSTRATION 2–48
VCR CONNECTIONS BIPLANE SYSTEM
DLX1 CABINET
DLX1 A3 DLX1 A4

SCAN CONV. SCAN CONV.


FRONTAL LATERAL

OUT 2 IN IN OUT 2

W323 W269

W1006
W324

FVVCR LVVCR

VDP PANEL
DLX1 A1 A50
W319

W268
VVCR

DLX1 A72 A1
W254

L/VCR CONTROL

DLX1 A72
DLX1 A71
V.REPRO

FVVCR

LVVCR
CONTROL

27103A

Front Front

27031A 27103A

27031A VIN
VIN VOUT
26849A

VCR REAR VCR REAR

26830A VCR & MONITOR


26849A

26830A
LATERAL
VCR & MONITOR
FRONTAL
50/60 50/60
75 ohm 75 ohm

Monitor Rear (MONITOR REAR)

2-104
GE Medical Systems ADVANTX DLX INSTALLATION
REV 0 sm 2198944-100

INSTALLING DLX VIDEO STATION/SCAN


CONVERTER OPTION Job Card IST5 O 15 of 18

6.4 DLXINSTAL Update Procedure

1. Switch on the system.


1. Login at the dlxlogin prompt.
dlxlogin: dlx <Return>
2. Select DLXINSTAL in the pop-up DLX Main Menu to access the DLXINSTAL tool (see Job Card
CNF1 A).
The message Please wait...Starting DLXINSTAL Application appears on the screen. The
DLXINSTAL PROGRAM Main Menu appears (shown below) listing DLXINSTAL commands.
Each command represents a Command Menu.

DLXINSTAL PROGRAM (Initialization Utility)


Version Cxx.xx, Date xx/xx/xx
Command Command Description
1: Identification/Options
2: Consoles Configuration
3: Acquisition Parameters
4: Processing Parameters
5: Other Options
6: XDG spatial filters configuration
7: Iris aperture curve input
8: DA MODE luts parameters

To Exit Program, Choose an Application from the DLX Main Menu.

Enter Command Number:

3. At the prompt, enter:


Enter Command Number: 3 <Return> to select ACQUISITION PARAMETERS
4. Enter the number of the software option to be installed.
Enter Command: 13 <Return> to select the Number of VCRs
Number of VCRs: 1 <Return> enter parameter values to configure
(one or two VCRs)
Automatic VCR in Acquisition: x <Return> enter parameter values to configure
5. When you have finished, type 99 and press <Return> to return to DLXINSTAL Main Menu.
Enter Command: 99 <Return> return to the DLXINSTAL Main Menu
6. Select DLX Application in the pop–up DLX Main Menu to exit DLXINSTAL.
Note: For more information on the DLXINSTAL update procedure, see Job Card CNF1 A.

2-105
GE Medical Systems ADVANTX DLX INSTALLATION
REV 0 sm 2198944-100

INSTALLING DLX VIDEO STATION/SCAN


CONVERTER OPTION Job Card IST5 O 16 of 18

6.5 Check for Correct Operation

1. Switch on the VCR.(push the power button once to switch ON push it again to switch OFF).
2. Insert a cassette in the VCR.
3. Press 

ILLUSTRATION 2–49
VCR FRONT PANEL

INSERT CASSETTE RECORD

REMOTE REWIND POWER ON/OFF


FOOT SWITCH

Note: The VCR is configured and adjusted in the factory. To check or modify settings, refer to Sony
documentation.

2-106
GE Medical Systems ADVANTX DLX INSTALLATION
REV 0 sm 2198944-100

INSTALLING DLX VIDEO STATION/SCAN


CONVERTER OPTION Job Card IST5 O 17 of 18

4. Test the  
 function.
– If you are not already in the DLX Application, login as dlx.
– Select DLX CARDIAC function on the Advantx.
– On the DLX, click on NEW PATIENT in the BROWSER window (and enter patient parameters).
– Click on NEW EXAM.
– Click on START EXAM.
– Execute an acquisition (VCR starts recording). The VCR stops when the acquisition is finished.
– Check that the recorded image is displayed on the monitor. Adjust brightness and contrast as
required.
5. Check the    
– On the VCR press REWIND, then press PLAY.
– Check that the previous images are played back, indicating that they have been recorded.
6. Test the 
 function.
– Click on PATIENT
– Click on VIEW
– Click twice on SEQUENCE.
VCR

– Press 
on the DLX keypad.

– Check that the VCR is in the PLAY/RECORD mode and, that the monitor displays the same image
as the DLX.
– After recording a bit, press VCR on the DLX keypad.
– Press REWIND
– Press PLAY to review the images.
THE VIDEO STATION IS NOW OPERATIONAL.
SECTION 7
VCR PARAMETERS

The VCR foot switch pulse mode is preset to the correct mode (–LL); do not change this mode. If you need
to modify or verify other factory set VCR parameters see the section “Menu Operations” in the vendor’s
manual delivered with your Sony VCR.

2-107
GE Medical Systems ADVANTX DLX INSTALLATION
REV 0 sm 2198944-100

INSTALLING DLX VIDEO STATION/SCAN


CONVERTER OPTION Job Card IST5 O 18 of 18

Blank page

2-108
GE Medical Systems ADVANTX DLX INSTALLATION
REV 0 sm 2198944-100

ADVANTX DLX INSTALLATION Job Card IST6 O 1 of 14

Purpose: DIGITAL HARD COPY LASER INTERFACE Version No.: 1


INSTALLATION Date: 11–97

Time: 8 hours Personnel: 1

SECTION 1
SUPPLIES

D Laser imager installation kit, p/n 2101141.

SECTION 2
TOOLS

D A standard service tool kit with metric wrenches.

SECTION 3
SAFETY PRECAUTIONS

BE SURE ALL POWER IS OFF TO THE DLX SYSTEM CABINET


WARNING BEFORE BEGINNING THIS PROCEDURE.

Power down the DLX System as follows:

D Turn off VDP power switch on system cabinet.


D Shut down the Sun station.
At the dlxlogin: prompt, type:
dlxlogin: halt <cr>
The OK prompt appears. Power off the Sun workstation.
D Turn off or disconnect power at the main power source.

Notice: To avoid equipment damage take the usual precautions against static electricity for this procedure.
Wear an antistatic wrist strap when handling VDP boards.

2-109
GE Medical Systems ADVANTX DLX INSTALLATION
REV 0 sm 2198944-100

DIGITAL HARD COPY LASER INTERFACE INSTAL-


LATION Job Card IST6 O 2 of 14

SECTION 4
PREREQUISITES

D You will need to access the VDP. Use a 1/4 x 4” Phillips head screwdriver to remove the 10 screws
securing the VDP front panel, see Job Card D/R020 A.
D The Repro time–out must be adjusted to 10 seconds. This adjustment is to be done by the Repro
supplier. See the Repro Service Manual for more information.
SECTION 5
PROCEDURE

5.1 Check Contents of Laser Image Kit p/n 2101141

QTY PART NAME PART NO.


1 ITRL BOARD 2174651
1 IDENTIFICATION LABEL 39595507

5.2 Unpack Laser Imager LMFC1

D For details on the unpacking procedure, see the MFC Operator’s Guide.

2-110
GE Medical Systems ADVANTX DLX INSTALLATION
REV 0 sm 2198944-100

DIGITAL HARD COPY LASER INTERFACE INSTAL-


LATION Job Card IST6 O 3 of 14

5.3 Install ITRL Board

1. Set the following straps on the ITRL board.


– X1 to X14: set straps on positions 2 and 3,
– X15: set to ON,
– X16: set to Position B.
ILLUSTRATION 2–50

X1 THROUGH X14

2–3 = RS422

STROBE PERIOD
CONFIGURATION

OSCILLATOR
VALIDATION 800ns
1Ms
1.5Ms
2Ms
2.5Ms

2-111
GE Medical Systems ADVANTX DLX INSTALLATION
REV 0 sm 2198944-100

DIGITAL HARD COPY LASER INTERFACE INSTAL-


LATION Job Card IST6 O 4 of 14

2. – In case of VDP rack 2122364, remove the dummy jumper board in slot 26 of the VDP.
– In case of VDP rack 2199774, remove the jumper located on the left side of slot 26
backplane connector.
See Illustration 2–51.
See Illustration 2–52.
3. Install the Laser Imager ITRL board DLX1A1A26 in slot 26.
4. Connect cable W526 to J1 on the ITRL board (this cable, coming from RS422 Repro Numeric on the
VDP bulkhead, can be found in VDP cable conduit).
5. Connect cable W469 to J3 on the ITRL board (the cable, coming from Repro Numeric on the VDP
bulkhead, can be found in VDP cable conduit).

ILLUSTRATION 2–51
PANEL CONNECTION

W469

W526

Note: Check the part number of the W526 harness. The harness W526 p/n 2127007, delivered with
some early DLX systems, does not function on the DLX in the host control mode. Please replace
W526 p/n 2127007 with p/n 2138851.

2-112
GE Medical Systems ADVANTX DLX INSTALLATION
REV 0 sm 2198944-100

DIGITAL HARD COPY LASER INTERFACE INSTAL-


LATION Job Card IST6 O 5 of 14

ILLUSTRATION 2–52
JUMPER LOCATION – VDP RACK 2199774.
M
V
A s M
V V I M R V p G E
A A D T C C E R A X X X X a E 1
D D V R P P M A P D D D D r I 6
3 3 A L 4 I B Y Z G G G G e M 7

31 29 27 26 25 23 21 20 19 17 15 13 11 10 9 1

REMOVE THIS JUMPER TO INSTALL ITRL BOARD.

Each jumper is located on the left side of P1 connector of each slot, except for slot 9 where it is located
on the right side of the connector.

6. The following VDP cables are factory installed:


Cable W284, between the VDP Repro Numeric and the cabinet data bulkhead Repro Numeric,
Cable W283, between the VDP RS422 Repro Numerique and the cabinet data bulkhead RS422 Repro
Numerique connector.
5.4 Connect Laser Imager

D Connect the data cable between the DLX bulkhead Repro Numerique connector and the MFC. See
Illustration 2–53.
D If the host control option is present, connect the Control cable between the RS422 Repro Numerique
connector and the MFC.
Note: The Laser Camera Data cables, in Illustration 2–53, are provided by the MFC vendor.

2-113
GE Medical Systems ADVANTX DLX INSTALLATION
REV 0 sm 2198944-100

DIGITAL HARD COPY LASER INTERFACE INSTAL-


LATION Job Card IST6 O 6 of 14

D Refer to the interconnections diagram (MIS MAP).


D Check that the following values are used for the laser camera set-up in host control. The following
values are the standard settings for host control, and are hard coded in the DLX software.
– Stop bit: 1
– Parity: E
– Data length: 8
– Baud rate: 1200
– Driver type: RS422
Note: For more information on the multi-format laser camera set-up, please refer to the laser camera’s
documentation. If a laser camera set-up problem occurs, contact the multi-format camera Service
Representative.
D Stick the option label on the inside upper left hand corner of the cabinet front door.

2-114
GE Medical Systems ADVANTX DLX INSTALLATION
REV 0 sm 2198944-100

DIGITAL HARD COPY LASER INTERFACE INSTAL-


LATION Job Card IST6 O 7 of 14

ILLUSTRATION 2–53
DLX BULKHEAD AND VDP CONNECTIONS

26

LASER CAMERA
IN HOST CONTROL

MIS 1474C OR1474D


LASER CAMERA DATA

2-115
GE Medical Systems ADVANTX DLX INSTALLATION
REV 0 sm 2198944-100

DIGITAL HARD COPY LASER INTERFACE INSTAL-


LATION Job Card IST6 O 8 of 14

5.5 Settings for 3M Laser Imager LMFC1

5.5.1 Set up the Laser Imager

The parity must be selected on the 3M Laser Imager system control board. The same parity programming,
even or odd, must be selected in the DLXINSTAL software.

1. Turn off the Laser Imager. Unplug the power cable from the AC power socket.
2. Remove the front lower right panel.
3. TO AVOID EQUIPMENT DAMAGE WEAR AN ANTISTATIC WRIST STRAP WHEN
HANDLING THE PWA.

4. Remove system controller PWA from slot 3 of the board rack.


5. Set the two parity jumpers as shown in Illustration 2–54.
– PAR ODD (parity odd): set up the Laser Imager and update DLXINSTAL.
– PAR DI (parity enabled for digital interface).
ILLUSTRATION 2–54
JUMPER SETTINGS



 
Odd Even

 


 



PAR

None DI

SYSTEM CONTROLLER PWA

6. Close the VDPA1A rack, plug in the power cable, and power ON the system.
7. Use the procedure in Section 5.6, of Job Card IST1 D, to check the ground connection’s impedance on
the newly installed option.

2-116
GE Medical Systems ADVANTX DLX INSTALLATION
REV 0 sm 2198944-100

DIGITAL HARD COPY LASER INTERFACE INSTAL-


LATION Job Card IST6 O 9 of 14

1.1.1 Settings for 3M Laser Imager P831 and P952

Set the various switches on the CPU BOARD PWA–B in the MCS module. Settings differ
depending on whether the Laser Imager is a model P831, a P952 used alone, or a P952 used with a
MMU (see Table 1).

TABLE 1
SWITCH SETTINGS

SWITCH P831 P952 ALONE P952 WITH MMU

SW1 DOWN DOWN DOWN

SW2 NOT USED NOT USED NOT USED


SW3 POS 0 POS 0 POS 0

SW4 POS 0 POS 0 POS 0

SW5-1 ON ON ON

SW5-2 ON ON ON

SW5-3 ON ON ON

SW5-4 OFF OFF OFF


SW6-1 OFF OFF OFF

SW6-2 OFF OFF OFF

SW6-3 OFF OFF OFF

SW6-4 OFF ON ON

SW7 POS 0 POS 0 POS 0


SW-8 POS 0 POS 0 POS 0

SW-9 POS 7 POS 7 POS E

Note: There is no programming difference between the 50Hz and 60 Hz options.

1.1.2 Settings for 3M Laser Imager M959 XL

See the M959 XL laser camera’s Service Manual for more information on camera settings. For the
Repro settings, be sure to take into account the parameters listed in Section 5.4 (concerning parity,
baud rate, etc.).

1.1.3 Settings for 3M Laser Imager M969 HQ

See the M969 HQ laser camera’s Service Manual for more information on camera settings. For the
Repro settings, be sure to take into account the parameters listed in Section 5.4 (concerning parity,
baud rate, etc.).

2-117
GE Medical Systems ADVANTX DLX INSTALLATION
REV 0 sm 2198944-100

DIGITAL HARD COPY LASER INTERFACE INSTAL-


LATION Job Card IST6 O 10 of 14

5.6 Settings for Kodak Laser Imagers

For the Kodak 100 XLP settings, the manufacturer has used the 3M M952 protocol. See the laser camera’s
Service Manual for more information on camera settings. For the Repro settings, be sure to take into
account the parameters listed in Section 5.4 (concerning parity, baud rate, etc.).

5.7 Settings for AGFA Laser Imagers

For the AGFA LR 3300 settings, the manufacturer has used the 3M M952 protocol. See the laser camera’s
Service Manual for more information on camera settings. For the Repro settings, be sure to take into
account the parameters listed in Section 5.4 (concerning parity, baud rate, etc.).

2-118
GE Medical Systems ADVANTX DLX INSTALLATION
REV 0 sm 2198944-100

DIGITAL HARD COPY LASER INTERFACE INSTAL-


LATION Job Card IST6 O 11 of 14

5.8 Update DLXINSTAL

DLXINSTAL must be updated to inform the system that the laser imager option has been added. Be sure to
declare even or odd parity programming in the DLXINSTAL software. This is set in the
Identification/Options Menu (see Job Card CNF1A). (For other systems, parameter 11 is used.) Enter the
same parity, in DLXINSTAL, as that which is used for the 3M Laser Imager system control board.

1. Login at the dlx prompt.


dlxlogin: dlx <Return>

The message Please wait...Starting DLXINSTAL Application appears on the screen. The
DLXINSTAL PROGRAM Main Menu appears (shown below) listing DLXINSTAL commands.
Each command represents a Command Menu.

Command Command Description


1: Identification/Options
2: Consoles Configuration
3: Acquisition Parameters
4: Processing Parameters
5: Other Options
6: XDG spatial filters configuration
7: Iris aperture curve input
8: DA MODE luts parameters

To Exit Program, Choose an Application from the DLX Main Menu.

2-119
GE Medical Systems ADVANTX DLX INSTALLATION
REV 0 sm 2198944-100

DIGITAL HARD COPY LASER INTERFACE INSTAL-


LATION Job Card IST6 O 12 of 14

2. At the Enter Command Number prompt, select the Identification/Options Menu.


Enter Command Number: 1 <Return> {to select the Identification/Options Menu}

The Identification/Option Menu appears.

Identification/Option
––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––
1: Hospital Name (16 Characters) =DEE CIN BUC
2: Hospital Address =283 route de la minière
=78xxx BUC
3: Identification Number (1..9999) =1
4: Line frequency (50Hz, 60Hz) =60Hz
5: Metric Unit (YES/NO) =NO
6: MFC type (1024 Video, Digital) =1024 Video
7: Model Period Number =MPE2
––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––
0 List all
1..7 Update Values
99 Back to Main Menu
Enter Command :

3. Type the number that corresponds with MFC type, and press <Return>.
Enter Command: 7 <Return> {to select MFC Type}
4. Enter the Multi-Format Camera parameters.
MFC parity [E/O] –When Digital is selected in the Multi Format Camera option, the parity must be
entered and must be the same as the digital camera’s parity (even or odd parity).
MFC Host Control –If the Host Control option is present (batch filming), enter Yes when the system
proposes the option. The following menu appears:
1 for 3M 831
2 for 3M 952
3 for 3M 969
MFC protocol (1...3) =
MFC protocol –Select the correct camera protocol. See Table 2 for MFC protocols.

2-120
GE Medical Systems ADVANTX DLX INSTALLATION
REV 0 sm 2198944-100

DIGITAL HARD COPY LASER INTERFACE INSTAL-


LATION Job Card IST6 O 13 of 14

TABLE 2
MFC PROTOCOLS

USE THE FOLLOWING PROTOCOL


MODEL 3M 381 3M 952 3M 969

3M 831 X

3M 952 X

3M 959 X

3M 969 X

KODAK 100XLP X

AGFA LR3300 X

5. Type 99 and press <Return> to return to the DLXINSTAL Main Menu.


6. Select DLX APPLICATION in the DLX Main Menu to exit from DLXINSTAL and save the
DLXINSTAL modifications.
Note: For more details on the DLXINSTAL tool, see the section “DLXINSTAL” in the Engineering Guide,
and Job Card CNF1A.

5.9 Check the Laser Imager

1. Select DLX.
2. Select PATIENT.
3. Select VIEW.
– Click twice on SEQUENCE.
– Press PAUSE on keypad.
– Press FILM on keypad.
4. Print and check the film.
THE LASER IMAGER OPTION IS NOW OPERATIONAL.

5.10 Return the Product Locator Card

Fill in, and return, the Product Locator card.

2-121
GE Medical Systems ADVANTX DLX INSTALLATION
REV 0 sm 2198944-100

DIGITAL HARD COPY LASER INTERFACE INSTAL-


LATION Job Card IST6 O 14 of 14

Note: In the Digital/Remote mode you will not be able to film if an optional keyboard is connected (i.e. for
calibration). If you have connected a keypad to this configuration, disconnect it to carry out functional
checks or to film.

In the Remote set-up, be sure to remove the Repro Laser keypad for batch filming.

CONFIGURATION WITH HOST CONTROL

DIGITAL
DLX
CANNOT FILM WITH
REMOTE (HOST M3 KEYPAD CONNECTED
CONTROL CONFIG)
REMOTE DIGITAL

( KEYPAD CONNECTED
KEYPAD FOR LASER CAL. )

CONFIGURATION WITHOUT HOST CONTROL

DIGITAL
DLX
M3 CAN FILM WITH
KEYPAD CONNECTED

KEYPAD

2-122
GE Medical Systems ADVANTX DLX INSTALLATION
REV 0 sm 2198944-100

ADVANTX DLX INSTALLATION Job Card IST7 O 1 of 10

Purpose: REMOTE TRANSMITTER OPTION Version No.: 1


INSTALLATION Date: 11–97

Time: 2 hours Personnel: 1

SECTION 1
SUPPLIES

D Remote Transmitter kit 2119378.


D Remote Receiver kit 2134652.
D Four AAA alkaline batteries.

SECTION 2
TOOLS

D Standard service tool kit with metric wrenches.

SECTION 3
SAFETY PRECAUTIONS

D Power OFF the DLX cabinet bulkhead.

SECTION 4
PREREQUISITES

D Determine with hospital personnel the best location for the Remote Control Receiver Box.
D Run the cable from Remote Controller to RS232 IRK on the DLX cabinet data bulkhead.
D It is recommended that the In–Room Remote Control Receiver Box be mounted on the In–Room
Monitor displaying DLX images. This way the operator merely points the In–Room Remote
Transmitter at the In–Room Monitor displaying DLX images to send Dynamic Review feature
commands.
D As with a TV remote control, the In–Room Remote Control Box must be mounted so that the infrared
beam from the Remote Control Transmitter is not obstructed in any way.
D It is also recommended that:
– If the In–Room Monitor displaying DLX images is cart mounted, the In–Room Remote Control
Box should be mounted on top of the monitor.
– If the In–Room Monitor displaying DLX images is room mounted, the In–Room Remote Control
Box should be mounted under the monitor.

2-123
GE Medical Systems ADVANTX DLX INSTALLATION
REV 0 sm 2198944-100

REMOTE TRANSMITTER OPTION


INSTALLATION Job Card IST7 O 2 of 10

SECTION 5
PROCEDURE

5.1 Check the Contents of two Remote Kits

QTY PART NAME PART NO.


1 NULL MODEM 2103673
1 PROGRAMMING CABLE 29515851
2 ADVANTX IR REMOTE TRANSMITTER 2119378
1 ASM HILINE RECEIVER 45560960
1 IDENTIFICATION LABEL 39595507
1 INSTALLATION NOTE 2101555

5.2 Install Hardware


Remote Control Receiver installation
1. Measure In–Room Remote Control Box. Cut
suitably sized strips of the adhesive–backed velcro
(the velcro strips are included).
2. Affix velcro strips to In–Room Remote Control
Box and to the selected position on the In–Room
Monitor.
3. Press the velcro strips together to attach the
In–Room Remote Control Box to the In–Room
Monitor (with the Infrared Receiver window and
green transmitting LED facing the operator).
4. Connect cable MIS27097A between the J1
connector on the back of the DLX In–Room
Remote Control Receiver and the RS232 IRK
connector on the cabinet data bulkhead. See
Illustration 2–55.
5. Route and secure (tyrap) cable MIS27097 along
with the In–Room Monitor video and power
cables.
6. Cable W282, between the VDP panel IRK
connector and RS232 IRK on the cabinet data
bulkhead, is factory installed.
7. Stick the option label on the inside upper left hand corner of the cabinet front door.

2-124
GE Medical Systems ADVANTX DLX INSTALLATION
REV 0 sm 2198944-100

REMOTE TRANSMITTER OPTION


INSTALLATION Job Card IST7 O 3 of 10

ILLUSTRATION 2–55
REMOTE CONTROL HARDWARE INSTALLATION

W291 NULL MODEM

SERIAL A
W282 (FACTORY INSTALLED)

CONNECTOR PLUGS INTO


I/R HEAD POSITION FOR
CABINET BULKHEAD DOWNLOADING

REMOVE I/R HEAD

27097A

REMOTE CONTROL RECEIVER REMOTE CONTROL UNIT

5.3 Download the operating software

This section describes how to download operating software code to the dynamic review option hand–held
remote transmitter. The hand–held transmitter is normally delivered with the operating software code
factory loaded. Using the DLX Operator Manual, test the remote transmitter. If the remote transmitter
does not function, carry out the following procedure to download the software and activate the command
keys.

2-125
GE Medical Systems ADVANTX DLX INSTALLATION
REV 0 sm 2198944-100

REMOTE TRANSMITTER OPTION


INSTALLATION Job Card IST7 O 4 of 10

D Remove the back of the hand held remote control, and insert four AAA alkaline batteries in the remote
control.
D Log in on DLX.
dlx login: dlx <cr>
D Select Download IRK in the DLX Others Menu.

D The Downloading IRK window appears. Check the remote control part number which can be found
on the back of the remote control.
– If the remote control part number is 36004776, click on Pic 100 and follow the PIC 100
instructions.
– If the remote control part number is 2119378 (FLASH RAM model), click on Pic 200 and follow
the PIC 200 instructions.

2-126
GE Medical Systems ADVANTX DLX INSTALLATION
REV 0 sm 2198944-100

REMOTE TRANSMITTER OPTION


INSTALLATION Job Card IST7 O 5 of 10

ILLUSTRATION 2–56
PIC 100 REMOTE KEYPAD 36004776 LAYOUT
AM/PM INDICATOR
TO SET DATE AND TIME
ABBREVIATED DAY OF
PM WEEK INDICATOR
1. PRESS SET BUTTON TO
ACTIVATE TIME AND DAY
SETTING BUTTONS.
6:08 WE
C
TRANSMITTING INDICATOR

CHECK SET INDICATOR IS


DISPLAYED
3. WHEN LCD INDICATORS ARE
2. ADJUST DATE AND TIME MENU CANCEL SUB SELECT
DISPLAY AS FOLLOWS : CORRECT, PRESS OK BUTTON.
FLURO PLANE CHECK SET INDICATOR DISAP-
TO ADJUST HOUR PEARS FROM DISPLAY
INDICATOR, PRESS
ZOOM B/C STORE RECALL
HR
ROADMAP

TO ADJUST MINUTE
INDICATOR, PRESS

MIN

SUB MASK
TO ADJUST DAY
INDICATOR, PRESS
ENTER
DAY
REV FORW
NOTE: THE TIME AND DAY
SETTING CONTROLS ARE FITTED
TO ADJUST AM/PM WITH A COVER;
INDICATOR, PRESS TO OPEN, PRESS IN THE FRONT
PREV – SEQ + LOWER COVER SIDE RIBS AND
SLIDE COVER DOWN
AM
TO CLOSE, SLIDE COVER UP
REVIEW PRIOR NEXT
/PAUSE UNTIL CENTER TAB CLICKS
IMAGE INTO PLACE
PM

TO REDISPLAY THE TIME AND DAY SETTING


ORIGINAL TIME AND DATE, HR CONTROLS
PRESS SET CANCEL

MIN
AM TEST
CANCEL
DAY
PM OK
RESET HOLE – USE END OF PAPER CLIP

WRITE PROTECT SWITCH LITHIUM BATTERY SWITCH


RIGHT TO ENABLE RIGHT TO ENABLE
LEFT TO DISABLE Advantx DLX LEFT TO DISABLE

2-127
GE Medical Systems ADVANTX DLX INSTALLATION
REV 0 sm 2198944-100

REMOTE TRANSMITTER OPTION


INSTALLATION Job Card IST7 O 6 of 10

ILLUSTRATION 2–57
PIC 200 REMOTE KEYPAD 2119378 LAYOUT
AM/PM INDICATOR
ABBREVIATED DAY OF
PM WEEK INDICATOR
6:08 WE
C
TRANSMITTING INDICATOR

MENU CANCEL SUB SELECT


FLURO PLANE

ZOOM B/C STORE RECALL


ROADMAP

SUB MASK

ENTER
REV FORW
NOTE: THESE CONTROL
SETTINGS ARE FITTED WITH A
COVER;
TO OPEN, PRESS IN THE FRONT
PREV – SEQ + LOWER COVER SIDE RIBS AND
SLIDE COVER DOWN
TO CLOSE, SLIDE COVER UP
REVIEW PRIOR NEXT
/PAUSE UNTIL CENTER TAB CLICKS
IMAGE INTO PLACE

TIME AND DAY SETTING


CONTROLS
SET AT EDIT CANCEL

2 WAIT DELETE
ON

PRESS OK IN STEP 4 OF SCREEN 1


1
ENABLE (KEY) DO OK
RESET HOLE – USE END OF PAPER CLIP

Advantx DLX

2-128
GE Medical Systems ADVANTX DLX INSTALLATION
REV 0 sm 2198944-100

REMOTE TRANSMITTER OPTION


INSTALLATION Job Card IST7 O 7 of 10

Depending upon the mode selected, one of the two following download screens appear.

Pic 100 Message. Follow the instructions:

REMOTE KEYPAD PROGRAMMER


This procedure will download the remote application code, the remote key
definitions, and set the time on the remote. Perform the following steps:
1 Remove the VDP serial line from port A at the back of the Sun
workstation.
2 Connect the remote, interface fixture, and cable to the back of the A
serial port at the back of the Sun workstation.
3 Install four AAA batteries. Remove the lower front cover from the
remote transmitter. Slide the left switch to the left (Disable Write
Protect) and the right switch to the right (Enable Lithium Battery).
4 On the remote, press and hold RECALL PHOTO, then push the end
of a paper clip into the RESET HOLE.
At this time, the remote display should not change if
you press any remote key. If it does, repeat step 4.
HIT ANY CONSOLE KEY TO START DOWNLOADING CODE TO REMOTE!

Pic 200 Message. Follow the instructions:

REMOTE KEYPAD PROGRAMMER


This procedure will download the remote application code, the remote key
definitions, and set the time on the remote. Perform the following steps:
1 Remove the VDP serial line from port A at the back of the Sun
workstation.
2 Connect the remote, interface fixture, and cable to the back of the A
serial port at the back of the Sun workstation.
3 Install four AAA batteries. Remove the lower front cover from the
remote transmitter. Check that switch 1 is set to OFF, and that switch
2 is set to ON. These switch positions should NOT BE CHANGED
once they are set.
4 On the remote, press and hold RECALL PHOTO, then push the end
of a paper clip into the RESET HOLE.

Press the OK key on the remote control; the unit should beep
twice (except when following the Erase procedure).
HIT ANY CONSOLE KEY TO START DOWNLOADING CODE TO REMOTE!

D Downloading begins. Follow the screen instructions to set the remote.

2-129
GE Medical Systems ADVANTX DLX INSTALLATION
REV 0 sm 2198944-100

REMOTE TRANSMITTER OPTION


INSTALLATION Job Card IST7 O 8 of 10

5.4 Check remote control operation (see Illustrations 2–24 and 2–57)

Before checking remote control operation REMOVE the download cable, between the Remote Control
unit and the Sun serial port A, reconnect cable W291, and reinstall the I/R head on the Remote Control unit.
The DLX system indicates the successful completion of the application code download by displaying the
remote transmitter download screen on the dialogue monitor.
D PIC 100 Operation Screen
_______________________________________________________________________________

If the download was successful, the remote display will be blank. Perform the following steps:

1. On the remote control unit, slide the left switch to the right ”Enable write protect”. Both slide
switches should now be to the right.
2. On the remote, push the end of paper clip into the RESET HOLE, twice. The remote display
should turn back on.
3. Press any Dynamic Review function key. Check that the remote display temporarily displays
a ”C” indicating remote is transmitting. (If this does not occur, push the end of the paper clip into the
RESET HOLE until pressing any function button results in a transmitting indicator ”C” being
displayed.)
4. If the remote is transmitting, press any key on the DLX keyboard to set the time on the remote
control.
If it is necessary to start over, press the <ESC> key on the DLX keyboard.

_______________________________________________________________________________
D PIC 200 Operation Screen
_______________________________________________________________________________

If the download was successful, the remote display will be blank. Perform the following steps:

1. On the remote, push the end of paper clip into the RESET HOLE, twice. The remote display
should turn back on.
2. Press any Dynamic Review function key. Check that the remote display temporarily displays
a ”C” indicating remote is transmitting.
3. If the remote is transmitting, press any key on the DLX keyboard to set the time on the remote
control.
If it is necessary to start over, press the <ESC> key on the DLX keyboard.

_______________________________________________________________________________

2-130
GE Medical Systems ADVANTX DLX INSTALLATION
REV 0 sm 2198944-100

REMOTE TRANSMITTER OPTION


INSTALLATION Job Card IST7 O 9 of 10

D PIC 100 Download Completed Screen


_______________________________________________________________________________
You have just completed the remote download procedure!
The remote should now be fully functional and the time should match the time displayed on
the screen below.
– If the remote is functioning properly, hit any key to exit this procedure.
– If the remote is not functioning properly and it is necessary to start over, or you wish
to download another remote, press the <ESC> key on the DLX keyboard.
– If the remote is not functioning properly and you do not want to start over, press the
<Ctrl> and <C> keys on the DLX keyboard to exit.
Please plug the VDP serial line back into port A.
_______________________________________________________________________________

D PIC 200 Download Completed Screen


_______________________________________________________________________________
You have just completed the remote download procedure!
The remote should now be fully functional and the time should match the time displayed on
the screen below.
– If the remote is functiong properly, hit any key to exit this procedure.
– If the remote is not functioning properly and it is necessary to start over, or you wish
to download another remote, press the <ESC> key on the DLX keyboard.
– If the remote is not functioning properly and you do not want to start over, press the
<Ctrl> and <C> keys on the DLX keyboard to exit.
Please plug the VDP serial line back into port A.
_______________________________________________________________________________

Check that the remote is functioning correctly. See the Operator’s Manual for more information on
commands.

2-131
GE Medical Systems ADVANTX DLX INSTALLATION
REV 0 sm 2198944-100

REMOTE TRANSMITTER OPTION


INSTALLATION Job Card IST7 O 10 of 10

5.5 The PIC 200 Erase Procedure

Follow the screen instructions:

REMOTE KEYPAD PROGRAMMER (Erase function)


Perform the following steps to erase the software for the PIC 200 remote
control.
1 Remove the VDP serial line from port A on the back of the Sun
workstation.
2 Connect the remote, interface fixture, and cable to the back of the A
serial port at the back of the Sun workstation.

3 Check that there are four batteries in the remote control. Remove the
lower front cover from the remote transmitter, and set switch 1 to ON.

4 On the remote, push the end of paper clip into the RESET HOLE.
5 When the Erase procedure begins, the remote emits a series of
beeps, and dots appear on the flat panel screen. At this point, after
the first beeps, press the <Ctrl> and <C> keys to abort.
6 Set switch 1, on the remote, to OFF.
7 In the Download IRK window select PIC 200 to restart the download
procedure.

2-132
GE Medical Systems ADVANTX DLX INSTALLATION
REV 0 sm 2198944-100

ADVANTX DLX INSTALLATION Job Card IST8 O 1 of 2

Purpose: VASCULAR PACKAGE INSTALLATION Version No.: 1


Date: 11–97

Time: 30 min Personnel: 1

SECTION 1
SUPPLIES

D Vascular package, kit p/n 36006312.

SECTION 2
TOOLS REQUIRED

SECTION 3
SAFETY PRECAUTIONS

SECTION 4
PREREQUISITES

Note: The DLX is normally delivered with 1024 configuration Done. Action only on Advantx configuration.
In case of bad operation check the jumper on MEM A/MEM B (see LJS 021A).

2-133
GE Medical Systems ADVANTX DLX INSTALLATION
REV 0 sm 2198944-100

VASCULAR PACKAGE INSTALLATION


Job Card IST8 O 2 of 2

SECTION 5
TASK DESCRIPTION

5.1 Check Contents of Vascular Package Kit 36006312

D Check for the Vascular package identification label.


D Check the Vascular Package Kit 36006312 contents against the packing list.
TABLE 1
VASCULAR PACKAGE CONTENTS

PART NAME PART NUMBER


IDENTIFICATION LABEL 39595507
OPTION ID 2101106
OPTION INSTALLATION NOTE 2101555

5.2 Vascular Package Installation

D Follow the instructions provided in the Advantx documentation to unblock the option on the DLX.

5.3 Functional Check

D See the chapter “Functional Check” in the Service Manual for the check procedure.

5.4 Record DLX Option Status

D After the successful completion of all tests, adhere the option identification label inside the DLX
cabinet front door, above the door diagrams.

2-134
GE Medical Systems ADVANTX DLX INSTALLATION
REV 0 sm 2198944-100

ADVANTX DLX INSTALLATION Job Card IST10 O 1 of 4

Purpose: INSTALLING AN ADDITIONAL DLX DISK Version No.: 1


DRIVE Date: 11–97

Time: 40 min Personnel: 1

SECTION 1
SUPPLIES

D Additional disk kit, p/n 2128830.

SECTION 2
TOOLS

D A standard service tool kit with metric wrenches.

SECTION 3
SAFETY PRECAUTIONS

BE SURE ALL POWER IS OFF TO THE DLX SYSTEM CABINET


WARNING BEFORE BEGINNING THIS PROCEDURE.

D Shut down the station as follows:


dlxlogin: halt <cr>
When the OK prompt appears, turn OFF the Sun workstation power. See IST1 E for power switch
locations.
D Power off the UPS option, if present.
D Power down the DLX System. Power OFF the DLX system cabinet.

SECTION 4
PREREQUISITES

D Remove the VDP front panel; see Job Card D/R 20.
D Check that the disk jumpers are correctly set for the disk you are installing (disk configurations are
listed in the Job Card LJS0 70A).

2-135
GE Medical Systems ADVANTX DLX INSTALLATION
REV 0 sm 2198944-100

INSTALLING AN ADDITIONAL DLX DISK DRIVE


Job Card IST10 O 2 of 4

SECTION 5
TASK DESCRIPTION

5.1 Check Disk Kit 2128830 Contents


TABLE 1
IMAGE DISK KIT

PART PART NUMBER


IMAGE DISK DRIVE + 2128119
JUMPER CONFIGURATION DOC
SET OF PAN HEAD SCREWS, 4 X 6 32 UNC 2 HDW60142003
SET OF WASHERS, L3N 99074884
OPTION IDENTIFICATION LABEL 39595507
OPTION INSTALLATION NOTE 2101555

ILLUSTRATION 2–58
DISK DRIVE LOCATIONS

VDP SIDE VIEW

FRONT

W317 – DISK 0

W317 – DISK 1

W317 – DISK 2

W317 – DISK 3
DISK POWER SUPPLY

2-136
GE Medical Systems ADVANTX DLX INSTALLATION
REV 0 sm 2198944-100

INSTALLING AN ADDITIONAL DLX DISK DRIVE


Job Card IST10 O 3 of 4

5.2 Install the additional disk

1. Remove the four screws (1) on the disk rack frame. See Illustration 2–59.
ILLUSTRATION 2–59
ADDING A DISK DRIVE

(1) (1)

DISK 0 DISK 0
ADDRESS

W305

(2)
(2)
(2)
DISK 1 ADDRESS (2)

W305

(1) (1)

2. Pull the disk rack out approximately 5 inches to access the sides of the disk drive.
3. Connect data cable W305 to the disk drive connector.
4. Connect the power cable W317 to the disk drive power connector. See Illustration 2–60 for the disk
drive power supply strip location.
5. Slide the disk into the appropriate disk slot (0, 1, 2, and 3 from top to bottom). See Illustration 2–58.
6. Secure the disk drive with the 4 Phillips head screws/and washers (2) provided in the kit.

2-137
GE Medical Systems ADVANTX DLX INSTALLATION
REV 0 sm 2198944-100

INSTALLING AN ADDITIONAL DLX DISK DRIVE


Job Card IST10 O 4 of 4

ILLUSTRATION 2–60
DISK POWER SUPPLY

POWER SUPPLY STRIP

5.3 Reassembly

D Reassemble (reverse disassembly procedure).


D Power ON the system.
D The DLX software needs to be reconfigured after the addition of an additional disk drive. See Job Card
LG003 for disk drive configuration information.

2-138
GE Medical Systems ADVANTX DLX INSTALLATION
REV 0 sm 2198944-100

ADVANTX DLX INSTALLATION Job Card IST12 O 1 of 16

Purpose: UPS INSTALLATION Version No.: 1


Date: 09–97

Time: 30 min Personnel: 1

SECTION 1
SUPPLIES

D UPS kit, p/n 2128834. For DLX – ADVANTX–E.


D UPS kit, p/n 2128835. For DLX – ADVANTX (LFX).

SECTION 2
TOOLS

D A standard service tool kit with metric wrenches.

SECTION 3
SAFETY PRECAUTIONS

BE SURE ALL POWER IS OFF TO THE


WARNING DLX SYSTEM CABINET BEFORE
BEGINNING THIS PROCEDURE.

D Set the DLX1 A72 VDP/options AC power


switch on the DLX cabinet to OFF.

ON / OFF

D Shut down the Sun station.


At the dlxlogin: prompt, type:
dlxlogin: halt <cr>
ok
The OK prompt appears. Power off the Sun workstation.
D Power OFF the main power source (XFMR); refer to Job Card IST E.
D Disconnect power at the main power source.

SECTION 4
PREREQUISITES

D Not applicable.

2-139
GE Medical Systems ADVANTX DLX INSTALLATION
REV 0 sm 2198944-100

UPS INSTALLATION
Job Card IST12 O 2 of 16

SECTION 5
PROCEDURE

5.1 Unpack the UPS Option ADVANTX (LFX)

D Check that the UPS kit 2128835 contains the following:

PART NAME PART NO.


ACP SMART 450X38 UPS (UNINTERRUPTED POWER SUPPLY) 2195622
SCSI TERMINAL SERVER 2123570
IDENTIFICATION LABEL 39595507
INSTALLATION NOTE 2101555
RS 232 UPS CABLE W026 2124043–6
POWER SUPPLY CABLE UPS/SUN W299 2129386
UPS SHELF 2184538
UPS FLOPPY DISK 2198941

2-140
GE Medical Systems ADVANTX DLX INSTALLATION
REV 0 sm 2198944-100

UPS INSTALLATION
Job Card IST12 O 3 of 16

ILLUSTRATION 2–61
UPS INSTALLATION FOR ADVANTX (LFX)

DLX1 CABINET

DLX1A1A50

SUN WORKSTATION
DLX1A2

POWER SUPPLY

ÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄ
FOR SCSI
TERMINAL

ÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄ
POWER STRIP OUTLET UPS

ÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄ
DLX1A72A1 DLX1A73A1

SCSI
TERMINAL
SERVER

VIDEO
FILTER

VIDEO
FILTER

DLX1A70 DLX1A72 DLX1A74

DLX1A71 DLX1A73

2-141
GE Medical Systems ADVANTX DLX INSTALLATION
REV 0 sm 2198944-100

UPS INSTALLATION
Job Card IST12 O 4 of 16

ILLUSTRATION 2–62
UPS POWER CABLES – ADVANTX (LFX)

DLX CABINET
FRONT VIEW

DLX1 A1

DLX1 A1 A50

DLX1 A1 A2
SUN WORKSTATION IN

W297
W299

DLX1 A73 A1
VDP BREAKER
UPS IN MAIN OUT

W293 MIS27080A TRANSFORMER XFMR


(LFX2 CABINET)
MIS27088A
FLAT SCREEN

DLX1 A72

DLX1 A73

MIS27092A
IMAGE MONITOR

MIS27101A
POWER FROM LFX2 A3 (CB8)

2-142
GE Medical Systems ADVANTX DLX INSTALLATION
REV 0 sm 2198944-100

UPS INSTALLATION
Job Card IST12 O 5 of 16

SECTION 6
PROCEDURE

6.1 Unpack the UPS Option ADVANTX–E

D Check that the UPS kit 2128834 contains the following:

PART NAME PART NO.


ACP SMART 450X38 UPS (UNINTERRUPTED POWER SUPPLY) 2195622
CABLE SET 2142401
IDENTIFICATION LABEL 39595507
INSTALLATION NOTE 2101555
UPS SHELF 2184538
UPS FLOPPY DISK UPGRADE 2198941

INSTALL UPS SHELF HERE.


IF NOT PRESENT, INSTALL
UPS ON THE SHELF.

2-143
GE Medical Systems ADVANTX DLX INSTALLATION
REV 0 sm 2198944-100

UPS INSTALLATION
Job Card IST12 O 6 of 16

ILLUSTRATION 2–63
UPS POWER CABLES – ADVANTX–E

DLX CABINET
FRONT VIEW

DLX1 A1

DLX1 A1 A50 XFMR 230–240V


(Not to Scale.)

DLX1 A1 A2 MIS27099A
SUN WORKSTATION IN
VAMP
W297
W299

DLX1 A73 A1
VDP BREAKER
UPS IN MAIN OUT

W293 MIS27080A TRANSFORMER XFMR


(LFX2 CABINET)
MIS27088A
FLAT SCREEN

DLX1 A72

DLX1 A73

MIS27092A
IMAGE MONITOR

MIS27101A
POWER FROM LFX2 A3 (CB8)

2-144
GE Medical Systems ADVANTX DLX INSTALLATION
REV 0 sm 2198944-100

UPS INSTALLATION
Job Card IST12 O 7 of 16

6.2 UPS Cable Connections (ADVANTX–E)

The Sun is installed in the DLX cabinet with the front of this device facing the left side of the DLX cabinet,
and the rear of this unit towards the right side of the DLX cabinet. The UPS is installed the reverse way.

7. Install UPS Shelf if not present. See paragraph 6.4 UPS SHELF INSTALLATION.
8. Connect W293 between the DLX1 A73 A1 UPS inlet and the cabinet bulkhead (UPS) power supply
unit IN.
9. Connect W299 between the UPS MAIN OUT and the DLX1 A2 Sun station IN.
10. Connect W026 between the DLX1 A2 Sun TTYB and the DLX1 A73 A1 UPS TTY.
11. Plug the flat screen power cable MIS27088A into the cabinet bulkhead outlet.
12. Connect the UPS power supply cable MIS 27080A between the bulkhead power supply unit inlet and
the system XFMR transformer.
13. Use the procedure in Section 5.4, of Job Card IST1 D, to check the ground connection’s impedance on
the newly installed option.
14. Use the velcro strips on the cabinet shelf to secure the UPS on the shelf in the DLX cabinet.
15. Install the UPS Software Upgrade: See paragraph 6.5 UPS SOFTWARE UPGRADE
INSTALLATION.
Note: In case of Digital Gateway Workstation option, you have to temporarily remove the workstation and its
shelf to install the UPS.

2-145
GE Medical Systems ADVANTX DLX INSTALLATION
REV 0 sm 2198944-100

UPS INSTALLATION
Job Card IST12 O 8 of 16

ILLUSTRATION 2–64
UPS AND SUN BACK PANEL CONNECTORS

OUT
I SUN BACK PANEL DLX1 A2
A/B
SCSI
IN
W297

W026 B

UPS
REAR PANEL
DLX1 A73 A1

W299

CABINET BULKHEAD

W293 TRANSFORMER

FLAT PANEL

DLX1 A73
Outlets Power inlet Overload protection
Push to reset

W297

2-146
GE Medical Systems ADVANTX DLX INSTALLATION
REV 0 sm 2198944-100

UPS INSTALLATION
Job Card IST12 O 9 of 16

6.3 UPS Cable Connections ADVANTX (LFX)

The Sun is installed in the DLX cabinet with the front of this device facing the left side of the DLX cabinet,
and the rear of this unit towards the right side of the DLX cabinet. The UPS is installed the reverse way.

1. Install UPS Shelf if not present. See paragraph 6.4 UPS SHELF INSTALLATION.
2. The SCSI terminal server and power supply are installed with velcro strips delivered on this kit.
3. Connect W293 between the DLX1 A73 A1 UPS inlet and the cabinet bulkhead (UPS) power supply
unit IN.
4. Connect W299 between the UPS MAIN OUT and the DLX1 A2 Sun station IN.
5. Connect W026 between the DLX1 A73 A1 UPS and the DLX1 A73 A2 SCSI terminal server serial 1.
6. Connect cables between the DLX1 A73 A2 SCSI terminal server and the DLX1 A2 SUN SCSI.
7. Plug the flat screen power cable MIS27088A into the cabinet bulkhead outlet.
8. Connect the UPS power supply cable MIS 27080A between the bulkhead power supply unit inlet and
the system XFMR transformer.
9. Use the procedure in Section 5.6, of Job Card IST1 D, to check the ground connection’s impedance on
the newly installed option.
10. Use the velcro strips on the cabinet shelf to secure the UPS on the shelf in the DLX cabinet.
11. Install the UPS Software Upgrade: See paragraph 6.5 UPS SOFTWARE UPGRADE
INSTALLATION.

2-147
GE Medical Systems ADVANTX DLX INSTALLATION
REV 0 sm 2198944-100

UPS INSTALLATION
Job Card IST12 O 10 of 16

ILLUSTRATION 2–65
UPS AND SUN BACK PANEL CONNECTORS

OUT
I SUN BACK PANEL DLX1 A2
A/B
IN SCSI (*)
W297
SCSI Address (4)
SCSI TERMINAL
SERVER
W026 SERIAL 1

DLX1 A73 A2
UPS
REAR PANEL (*)
DLX1 A73 A1

POWER
(*)

W299

CABINET BULKHEAD
W850

W293 TRANSFORMER

FLAT PANEL

DLX1 A73
Outlets Power inlet Overload protection
Push to reset

W297

(*) provided with the SCSI terminal server

2-148
GE Medical Systems ADVANTX DLX INSTALLATION
REV 0 sm 2198944-100

UPS INSTALLATION
Job Card IST12 O 11 of 16

6.4 UPS Shelf Installation

BE SURE ALL POWER IS OFF TO THE DLX SYSTEM CABINET


WARNING BEFORE BEGINNING THIS PROCEDURE

1. Fix the two rear squares – See View Bbelow.


2. Install the new UPS shelf, fixing. See Views A and B below.
Cables W322 and Power Strip outlet W302 must pass through the big hole of the shelf.
3. Route the cables in order to make easily accessible the new UPS Shelf.
4. Use the VELCRO strips to secure the UPS Shelf.
5. Install the other elements. – See View C below.

2-149
GE Medical Systems ADVANTX DLX INSTALLATION
REV 0 sm 2198944-100

UPS INSTALLATION
Job Card IST12 O 12 of 16

6.5 UPS SOFTWARE UPGRADE INSTALLATION

Before starting software installation, new UPS hardware must be installed.

1. Exit DLX application and wait for the UNIX login prompt.
2. Log in as root on the DLX:
dlx login: root [Return] (Enter the GEMS proprietary password.
It is not displayed on the screen)
3. Insert the floppy disk in the floppy drive of DLX’s workstation.
4. Type in the following commands to create the directory /tmp/ups:
dlx# cd tmp [Return]
dlx# mkdir ups [Return]
dlx# cd ups [Return]
5. Type in the following command to get files from the floppy disk
dlx# tar xvf /dev/rfd0 [Return]
dlx# eject floppy [Return]
6. Type in the following commands to uncompress files:
dlx# uncompress *.Z [Return]
dlx# tar xvf *.tar [Return]
7. Type in the following command to execute the installation script:
dlx# ./ups_flopinst [Return]

2-150
GE Medical Systems ADVANTX DLX INSTALLATION
REV 0 sm 2198944-100

UPS INSTALLATION
Job Card IST12 O 13 of 16

6.6 Post Installation Procedure

1. Reassemble system.
2. Place the adhesive-backed option label on the inside of the DLX cabinet door.
3. Reconnect any disconnected cables (i.e. system power). Ty-rap any loose cables in the cabinet.
4. Power ON the power supply to the DLX1 A72 bulkhead power supply.
5. Power ON the UPS unit. Push the ON switch found on the front of the unit.
6. Power ON the Sun workstation.
FRONT PANEL INDICATORS

CABLE PART NO. FROM TO


DATA CABLE RS232 (W026) 2129708 SUN OR SCSI TERMINAL UPS COMPUTER INTERFACE
SUN POWER CABLE (W299) 2129386 UPS SUN (IN)
POWER CABLE W297 2129380 CABINET BULKHEAD OUTLET SUN (OUT)
UPS POWER CABLE (W293) 2129369 UPS CABINET BULKHEAD POWER UPS
UPS GROUND CABLE (W224) 2129802 UPS CABINET BULKHEAD POWER CABINET GROUND

6.7 Check UPS Connection

Check that the UPS is connected and recognized by the system as follows:

D Upon booting the Sun workstation, check that the message UPS CONNECTED is displayed in the
boot sequence messages.
D Check that the green ON LINE LED, on the front of the UPS, is lit.

6.8 UPS Battery Replacement

D This procedure is only to be carried out by a GE Service Engineer. See Job Card D/R 81.
Note: The UPS battery must be properly disposed of. Do not thow it out in the regular garbage. The UPS
battery must be disposited in a container for recyclable batteries.

2-151
GE Medical Systems ADVANTX DLX INSTALLATION
REV 0 sm 2198944-100

UPS INSTALLATION
Job Card IST12 O 14 of 16

ILLUSTRATION 2–66
UPS OPTION GROUNDING DIAGRAM ADVANTX–E

DLX CABINET

SUN

UPS
IMAGE FLAT PANEL
MONITOR PLASMA
MONITOR

MIS 27094A MIS 27136A

MIS 27992A MIS 27088A

MIS 27100A

TABLE BASE
MIS 27080A

BUILDING
GROUND
BUS BAR
LEGEND

XFMR MECHANICAL GROUND

MIS 27099A POWER SUPPLY GROUND


GROUNDED METAL PARTS IN
THE DLX SUB–SYSTEM
VAMP
*C ADVANTX PART
GND CABLE FOR
POWER SUPPLY CORD

SEPARATED GROUND CABLE

TERMINAL AND AVAILABLE


RESISTANCE BETWEEN GROUND
METAL PART

2-152
GE Medical Systems ADVANTX DLX INSTALLATION
REV 0 sm 2198944-100

UPS INSTALLATION
Job Card IST12 O 15 of 16

ILLUSTRATION 2–67
UPS OPTION GROUNDING DIAGRAM ADVANTX–LFX

DLX CABINET

SUN

UPS
IMAGE FLAT PANEL
MONITOR PLASMA
MONITOR

MIS 27094A MIS 27136A

MIS 27992A MIS 27088A

MIS 27100A
MIS 27080A

TABLE BASE

XFmr
BUILDING
GROUND
BUS BAR
LFX2 CABINET LEGEND

MECHANICAL GROUND
POWER SUPPLY GROUND
GROUNDED METAL PARTS IN
THE DLX SUB–SYSTEM
*C ADVANTX PART
GND CABLE FOR
POWER SUPPLY CORD

SEPARATED GROUND CABLE

TERMINAL AND AVAILABLE


RESISTANCE BETWEEN GROUND
METAL PART

2-153
GE Medical Systems ADVANTX DLX INSTALLATION
REV 0 sm 2198944-100

UPS INSTALLATION
Job Card IST12 O 16 of 16

Blank page

2-154
GE Medical Systems ADVANTX DLX INSTALLATION
REV 0 sm 2198944-100

ADVANTX DLX INSTALLATION Job Card IST13 O 1 of 6

Purpose: ANALOG IMAGER OPTION INSTALLATION Version No.: 1


Date: 11–97

Time: 30 min Personnel: 1

SECTION 1
SUPPLIES

D 1024 Analog Imager.

SECTION 2
TOOLS

D A standard service tool kit with metric wrenches.

SECTION 3
SAFETY PRECAUTIONS

BE SURE ALL POWER IS OFF TO THE DLX SYSTEM CABINET


WARNING BEFORE BEGINNING THIS PROCEDURE.

D Turn OFF the power switch on the DLX cabinet bulkhead.


D Shutdown the Sun workstation.
At the dlxlogin: prompt, type:
dlxlogin: halt <cr>
The OK prompt appears. Power off the Sun workstation.
D Power down the DLX System.

SECTION 4
PREREQUISITES

D If a wall box is used, refer to the MIS MAP.

SECTION 5
TASK DESCRIPTION

5.1 Unpack the Analog Imager Kit

D Unpack the Analog Imager kit. See the vendor’s manual.


D Check that the contents of the kit are not damaged.

2-155
GE Medical Systems ADVANTX DLX INSTALLATION
REV 0 sm 2198944-100

ANALOG IMAGER OPTION INSTALLATION


Job Card IST13 O 2 of 6

5.2 Connect the Imager

1. Plug the multiformat camera power cord into the DLX cabinet bulkhead (via the wallbox socket
MBX2, if a wallbox is used). See Illustration 2–68.
ILLUSTRATION 2–68
DLX CABINET

MBX2
IMAGER
26831A 1451A
VIDEO IN

1453C 1452B
230–240 V 230–240 V IN

10342A
GROUND

V REPRO

IMAGER

2-156
GE Medical Systems ADVANTX DLX INSTALLATION
REV 0 sm 2198944-100

ANALOG IMAGER OPTION INSTALLATION


Job Card IST13 O 3 of 6

2. Connect the video cable MIS 26831 between VVCR on the DLX1 A70 cabinet data bulkhead and the
video input connector on the multiformat camera (through the wallbox MBX2 VIDEO IN input, if a
wallbox is used).
3. Connect the power cable MIS 1453C between the DLX1 A72 cabinet bulkhead and the analog imager.
Note: If the Matrix Camera is located in the patient area, route the additional ground conductor MIS 10342A
as shown in the MISMAP.
4. If the multiformat camera has a VIDEO OUT connector, check that a 75 Ohm terminating plug is fitted
in this connector.
5. Power ON the DLX cabinet power (the cabinet bulkhead power switch).
6. Power ON the Sun station.

Note: You may need the the DLX timing and amplitude values, listed in Illustration 2–69, when connecting
an analog imager to the DLX.
ILLUSTRATION 2–69
XDG OUTPUT VIDEO FORMAT

WHITE LEVEL

WHITE LEVEL

BLACK LEVEL
BLACK LEVEL
BLANK LEVEL
BLANK LEVEL
SYNC LEVEL 0
0

Min Typ Max Units


* Sync level –20 –15 10 mV
* Blank level 236 282 336 mV
Black level relative to Blank 36 54 71 mV
White level relative to Black 628 661 694 mV
* are measured from 0 V level

2-157
GE Medical Systems ADVANTX DLX INSTALLATION
REV 0 sm 2198944-100

ANALOG IMAGER OPTION INSTALLATION


Job Card IST13 O 4 of 6

5.3 Update DLXINSTAL

DLXINSTAL must be configured so that the laser imager option is recognized.

1. Login at the dlxlogin prompt. Type: dlx <cr>


2. Position the cursor near the bottom of the screen and press the left mouse button,
3. The DLX Main Menu appears. Drag with the mouse, and select DLXINSTAL in the DLX OTHERS
menu.

The DLX Main Menu appears.

DLXINSTAL PROGRAM (Initialization Utility)


Version Cxx.xx, Date xx/xx/xx

Command Command Description


1: Identification/Options
2: Consoles Configuration
3: Acquisition Parameters
4: Processing Parameters
5: Other Options
6: XDG spatial filters configuration
7: Iris aperture curve input
8: DA MODE luts parameters
To Exit Program, Choose an Application from the DLX Main Menu.

Enter Command Number:

4. At the Enter Command Number prompt, select the Identification/Options Menu.


Enter Command Number: 1 <Return> {to select the Identification/Options Menu}

2-158
GE Medical Systems ADVANTX DLX INSTALLATION
REV 0 sm 2198944-100

ANALOG IMAGER OPTION INSTALLATION


Job Card IST13 O 5 of 6

The Identifications Menu appears.

Identification/Option
––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––
1: Hospital Name (16 Characters) =DEE CIN BUC
2: Hospital Address =283 route de la minière
=78xxx BUC
3: Identification Number (1..9999) =1
4: Line frequency (50Hz, 60Hz) =60Hz
5: Metric Unit (YES/NO) =NO
6: MFC type (1024 Video, Digital) =1024 Video
7: Model Period Number =MPE2
––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––
0 List all
1..7 Update Values
99 Back to Main Menu
Enter Command :

5. In the Identifications Menu, type the number that corresponds with MFC type, and press <Return>.
Enter Command: 7 <Return> {to select MFC Type}
6. Type v to select video.
MFC type [1024 Video/Digital ]: v <Return> {to select the 1024 Video Imager}
7. Return to the DLXINSTAL Main Menu.
Enter Command: 99 <Return> {to return to the DLXINSTAL Main Menu}
8. Select DLX Application in the pop–up DLX Main Menu to exit DLXINSTAL.
9. Carry out the functional test as described in the Analog Imager’s Vendor’s Manual to check the Imager
functioning.

Note: Refer to Job Card CNF1 A and to the chapter “DLXINSTAL” in the Service Manual for more
information on DLXINSTAL configuration menus.

2-159
GE Medical Systems ADVANTX DLX INSTALLATION
REV 0 sm 2198944-100

ANALOG IMAGER OPTION INSTALLATION


Job Card IST13 O 6 of 6

Blank page

2-160
GE Medical Systems ADVANTX DLX INSTALLATION
REV 0 sm 2198944-100

ADVANTX DLX INSTALLATION Job Card IST14 O 1 of 6

Purpose: DLX LINELOCK OPTION INSTALLATION Version No.: 1


Date: 11–97

Time: 20 min Personnel: 1

SECTION 1
SUPPLIES

DLX Linelock option kit, p/n 2151550.

SECTION 2
TOOLS

A standard service tool kit with metric wrenches.

SECTION 3
SAFETY PRECAUTIONS

BE SURE ALL POWER IS OFF TO THE DLX SYSTEM CABINET


WARNING BEFORE BEGINNING THIS PROCEDURE.

D Power OFF the cabinet bulkhead power enable switch on the DLX1 A72 cabinet bulkhead.
D Shut down the station as follows:
dlxlogin: halt <cr>
When the ok prompt appears, turn OFF the DLX1 A2 Sun workstation power.
D Power OFF the the UPS, if present.
D Disconnect power to DLX1 A72 cabinet bulkhead, and XFMR power to DLX1 A73.

SECTION 4
PREREQUISITES

D Remove the 10 Phillips head screws, securing the VDP front panel, to access the VDP. See Job Card
D/R 20 A.

2-161
GE Medical Systems ADVANTX DLX INSTALLATION
REV 0 sm 2198944-100

DLX LINELOCK OPTION INSTALLATION


Job Card IST14 O 2 of 6

SECTION 5
PROCEDURE

5.1 Check the Linelock Kit Contents


TABLE 1
LINELOCK KIT P/N 2123562 CONTENTS

PART NAME PART NUMBER


CSS BOARD 29515129
CSS TRANSFORMER BOARD 29515189
CABLE SET (SEE BELOW) 2127834
CABLE W307 2127738
CABLE W318 2127760
CABLE W304 2127813
CABLE W448 2127826

5.2 Install the CSS Transformer

1. Remove power cables W298 and W435 from the VDP panel power supply.
2. Remove the screws on the VDP panel power supply cover.
3. Secure the transformer board in the VDP panel. See Illustration 2–71.

ILLUSTRATION 2–70
CSS TRANSFORMER I

CSS BOARD CSS BOARD TRANSFORMER

ÉÉ ÉÉ
W304 
CSS BOARD TRANSFORMER

W318
ASTEC
ÉÉ ÉÉ
ÉÉ ÉÉ
W318 W304

2-162
GE Medical Systems ADVANTX DLX INSTALLATION
REV 0 sm 2198944-100

DLX LINELOCK OPTION INSTALLATION


Job Card IST14 O 3 of 6

4. Connect the transformer cable W318 between the terminal connector (A) and the ASTEC power
supply (C).
5. Connect the CSS transformer cable W304. Run the other end of cable W304 through the opening at the
back of the VDP, going up to the disk rack (you will later connect this to the CSS board).
6. Refit the VDP panel power supply cover, and secure with the screws removed in step 2.
7. Plug in power cables W298 and W435, which were removed in step 1.
5.3 Install the CSS Board

1. Pull power cableW307 out from the back of the disk rack area, and connect it to J4 on the CSS board.
2. Connect cable W304, from the CSS transformer, to J1 on the CSS board.
3. Connect cable W448, from the VAPZ board, to J3 on the CSS board.
4. Slide the CSS board into the CSS slot, see Illustration 2–71.

ILLUSTRATION 2–71
CSS BOARD INSTALLATION

TO VAPZ

CSS BOARD

W248

DLX1A3A1 CSS BOARD

J1 Power
W304 Connector
Transfo CSS

W307 J4 Power
Connector

J3 Linelock
W448 Connector

2-163
GE Medical Systems ADVANTX DLX INSTALLATION
REV 0 sm 2198944-100

DLX LINELOCK OPTION INSTALLATION


Job Card IST14 O 4 of 6

5. Refit the VDP front panel.


6. Power ON the DLX system.
7. Place the adhesive backed option lable above the door diagrams inside of the DLX1 cabinet door.
8. Close the cabinet.

5.4 Configure the Linelock Option

1. Login at the dlxlogin prompt. Type: dlx <cr>


2. Position the cursor near the bottom of the screen and press the left mouse button, the DLX Main Menu
appears.
3. Drag with the mouse, and select DLXINSTAL in the DLX OTHERS menu.

The DLX Main Menu appears.

DLXINSTAL PROGRAM (Initialization Utility)


Version Cxx.xx, Date xx/xx/xx

Command Command Description


1: Identification/Options
2: Consoles Configuration
3: Acquisition Parameters
4: Processing Parameters
5: Other Options
6: XDG spatial filters configuration
7: Iris aperture curve input
8: DA MODE luts parameters
To Exit Program, Choose an Application from the DLX Main Menu.
Enter Command Number:

2-164
GE Medical Systems ADVANTX DLX INSTALLATION
REV 0 sm 2198944-100

DLX LINELOCK OPTION INSTALLATION


Job Card IST14 O 5 of 6

4. At the Enter Command Number prompt, select the Identification/Options Menu.


Enter Command Number: 3 <Return> {to select the Acquisition Parameters Menu}
The Acquisition Parameters Menu appears.

Acquisition Parameters
––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––
1 Shutter Diameter (in pixels) (0..720) =470 (or 512 for 50Hz)
2 Vascular Setup Optimum Level (0..255) = 230
3 Vascular Lower Threshold Setup Value (0..254) = 30
4 Vascular Upper Threshold Setup Value (1..255) = 240
5 Cardiac Setup Optimum Level (0..255) = 230
6 Automatic review after acquisition [NO/PAUSE/YES] = YES
7 Acquisition Subtract Curve: # | Brightness | Contrast = 1 | 340 | 416
8 Fluoro Roadmap Curve: # | Brightness | Contrast = 1 | 256 | 384
9 CINE Tagalong Curve: *** No longer used ***
10 Line Lock Option [YES/NO] = NO
11 Type of Fluoro [CONTINUOUS/PULSED] = PULSED
12 Roadmap Option Exists [YES/NO] = NO
13 Number of VCRs = 0 = NO
14 DA Mode Lut (norm/inv) [N/I] =I
15 Default trial box % = 50%
16 Highlighted Boundaries Trial Display [YES/NO] =NO
17 LIH on one plane retains the other plane [YES/NO] = YES
18 Iris correction for BOLUS (–75 ...75) = –35
19 Iris correction for SPIN (–75 ...75) =0
––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––
0 To list the values of the above parameters
1..19 To modify the values of the above parameters
99 Back to Main Menu
Enter Command Number:

5. In the Acquisition Parameters Menu, type the number that corresponds with Linelock Option, and
press <Return>.
Enter Command: 10 <Return> {to select Linelock Option}
6. Type y to confirm.
Linelock Option: y <Return> {to confirm}
7. Return to the DLXINSTAL Main Menu.
Enter Command: 99 <Return> {to return to the DLXINSTAL Main Menu}
8. Select DLX Application in the pop–up DLX Main Menu to exit DLXINSTAL.

Note: Refer to Job Card CNF1 A for more information on the configuration menus, and to the chapter
“DLXINSTAL” in the Service Manual for more information on DLXINSTAL.

2-165
GE Medical Systems ADVANTX DLX INSTALLATION
REV 0 sm 2198944-100

DLX LINELOCK OPTION INSTALLATION


Job Card IST14 O 6 of 6

Blank page

2-166
GE Medical Systems ADVANTX DLX INSTALLATION
REV 0 sm 2198944-100

ADVANTX DLX INSTALLATION Job Card IST15 O 1 of 2

Purpose: DLX TRACKBALL INSTALLATION Version No.: 1


Date: 11–97

Time: 10 min Personnel: 1

SECTION 1
SUPPLIES

D DLX Trackball kit, p/n 2119384.

SECTION 2
TOOLS

D A standard service tool kit with metric wrenches.

SECTION 3
SAFETY PRECAUTIONS

D Not applicable.

SECTION 4
PREREQUISITES

D Not applicable.

SECTION 5
PROCEDURE

5.1 Check the Contents of the Trackball Kit


TABLE 1
LINELOCK KIT P/N 2123562 CONTENTS

PART NAME PART NUMBER


MOUSE–TRAK TRACKBALL 2127683
IDENTIFICATION LABEL 39595507
OPTION ID 2101106
OPTION INSTALLATION NOTE 2101555

2-167
GE Medical Systems ADVANTX DLX INSTALLATION
REV 0 sm 2198944-100

DLX TRACKBALL INSTALLATION


Job Card IST15 O 2 of 2

5.2 Trackball Installation

1. Lift to remove the image monitor from the console base; see Job Card D/R 50 A.
2. Pull to separate the DLX keyboard mouse cable from the extension cable connector. See Illustration
2–72.
3. Connect the trackball cable to the extension cable connector. The trackball, like the mouse, can be used
from either side of the DLX console base.
4. Set the monitor back on the DLX console base.

ILLUSTRATION 2–72
TRACKBALL CONNECTOR

DLX1 CABINET

SUN WORKSTATION
DLX1 A2

W300
CABINETBULKHEAD
DLX1 A70
MIS 27085

EXTENSION
CONNECTOR

2124177
EXTENSION CABLE

ÀÀÀÀÀÀÀÀÀÀÀÀÀÀÀÀÀ
ÀÀÀÀÀÀÀÀÀÀÀÀÀÀÀÀÀ
TRACKBALL

ÀÀÀÀÀÀÀÀÀÀÀÀÀÀÀÀÀ

2-168
GE Medical Systems ADVANTX DLX INSTALLATION
REV 0 sm 2198944-100

ADVANTX DLX INSTALLATION Job Card IST16 O 1 of 20

Purpose: INSTALLING THE DICOM ETHERNET Version No.: 1


OPTION Date: 11–97

Time: 40 min Personnel: 1

SECTION 1
SUPPLIES

D DLX DiCom Ethernet Option, PN 2165563.

SECTION 2
TOOLS REQUIRED

D A standard service tool kit with metric wrenches.

SECTION 3
SAFETY PRECAUTIONS

BE SURE ALL POWER IS OFF TO THE DLX SYSTEM CABINET


WARNING BEFORE BEGINNING THIS PROCEDURE.

D Set the DLX1 A72 VDP/options AC Power.


D Switch on the DLX cabinet to OFF.
D Shut down the Sun station.
At the dlxlogin: prompt, type:
dlxlogin: halt <cr>
The OK prompt appears. Power OFF the Sun workstation.
D Power OFF the UPS, if present.
D Power OFF the Main Power Source (XFMR), refer to Job Card IST1 E.
D Disconnect power to DLX1 A72 cabinet bulkhead, and XFMR power to DLX1 A73.

Notice: To avoid equipment damage take the usual precautions against static electricity for this procedure.
Wear an antistatic wrist strap when handling the Ethernet board.

2–169
GE Medical Systems ADVANTX DLX INSTALLATION
REV 0 sm 2198944-100

INSTALLING THE DICOM ETHERNET OPTION


Job Card IST16 O 2 of 20

SECTION 4
PREREQUISITES

D Remove the velcro strips securing the Sun on the DLX cabinet shelf. See also Job Card D/R 51.
D Disconnect all cables from the Sun back panel.

SECTION 5
TASK DESCRIPTION

5.1 Check DiCom Ethernet Kit Contents

D Check the Dicom Ethernet Kit p/n 2165563 contents.


TABLE 1
DICOM ETHERNET KIT P/N 2165563 CONTENTS

PART NAME PART NUMBER


ETHERNET BOARD, SBS520A 2138934
IDENTIFICATION LABEL 39595507
OPTION ID 2101106
OPTION INSTALLATION NOTE 2101555
SUN SS4 32 MB MEMORY EXTENSION 2150991
TRANSCEIVER LOCK KIT 2165671

D Open the SBUS package, and check the board as shown in Illustration 2–73.

ILLUSTRATION 2–73
ETHERNET BOARD PACKAGING

2–170
GE Medical Systems ADVANTX DLX INSTALLATION
REV 0 sm 2198944-100

INSTALLING THE DICOM ETHERNET OPTION


Job Card IST16 O 3 of 20

5.2 Ethernet board Installation procedure

D Use a 1/4 x 4” Phillips head screwdriver to loosen the screw on the upper right corner on the back of
the Sun unit. See also the Sun SPARCStation “Installation Guide”.
D Use a Phillips head screwdriver to remove on the lock block screw on the back of the Sun unit.
D The Sun cover hinges are located at the front of the unit. Holding the cover by the sides, lift to open
the Sun unit.
D Open the SBus clips. See Illustration 2–74.
D Squeeze the tabs on the SBus filler to disengage the filler panel. Unlatch to remove.
D Plug the Ethernet board into the Sbus slot.
ILLUSTRATION 2–74
SBUS LOCATION IN SUN WORKSTATION

2–171
GE Medical Systems ADVANTX DLX INSTALLATION
REV 0 sm 2198944-100

INSTALLING THE DICOM ETHERNET OPTION


Job Card IST16 O 4 of 20

5.3 Memory extension Installation

5.3.1 CHECK THE MEMORY ON DLX

Login as Service and open an Xterm window.


Type the command: dmesg | grep mem <return>

Size of memory is indicated by: mem = ...........(in octets)


If size is smaller than 64 Mbytes, you have to install memory extension (Refer to following procedure)
DLX Service Manuals)

Memory kits extension are : 2201936 (1x8 MB) for SS4 Workstations
2201938 (1x8 MB + 1x32MB) for SS4 Workstations
2202025 (1x32MB) for SS4 Workstations
2202026 (2x16MB) for Classic Workstations

5.3.2 CASE #1

Your SS4 Workstation has 32 MB of memory: one slot used by one 32 MB bank. Mount the 32 MB memory
extension into the next memory slot.

5.3.3 CASE #2

Your SS4 Workstation has 24 MB of memory: three slots used by three 8 MB memory banks extension into
the next available memory slot.

The SS4 memory needs to be extended to 32 megabytes. For this the 8 megabytes kit 2201936 needs to be
installed.

Then mount the 32 MB memory extension into the next available slot.

Note: A system with 56 Megabytes can operate normally. The only thing is that the Ethernet transfers are
a little slow. The 8 megabytes kit can be installed in a later visit to the site.

In both cases, at the end of installation, you must have 64 MB of memory.

2–172
GE Medical Systems ADVANTX DLX INSTALLATION
REV 0 sm 2198944-100

INSTALLING THE DICOM ETHERNET OPTION


Job Card IST16 O 5 of 20

ILLUSTRATION 2–75
MOUNTING MEMORY BANKS IN THEIR SLOTS

Use an antistatic wrist strap

5.4 Terminate installation

D Close the station. Refit screw on the back corner of the Sun.
D Refit the lock block screw.
D Remount the station in the cabinet.
D Reconnect all disconnected cables.
D Connect the Ethernet cable W306 between the Sun SBus connector (1) and the Ethernet AUI connector
on the cabinet bulkhead. See Illustration 2–76.

ILLUSTRATION 2–76
SUN REAR PANEL

DLX1 A2
(1) SBUS
I
I

2–173
GE Medical Systems ADVANTX DLX INSTALLATION
REV 0 sm 2198944-100

INSTALLING THE DICOM ETHERNET OPTION


Job Card IST16 O 6 of 20

D Route the cable through the cabinet cable guides, and ty-rap the cable with existing cabinet cables.
D Reconnect the velcro strips that secure the Sun on the DLX cabinet shelf.
D Stick the option label on the inside of the DLX cabinet door.
D Reconnect the DLX1 A73 system power from the XFMR and DLX1 A72 Cabinet Bulkhead.
D Connect a transceiver kit on 2nd Ethernet DLX1 A70.
D Connect either a 50 Ω Terminator on the transceiver coaxial output (in case of a workstations network
not yet installed)
or connect the transceiver to the workstations network as shown in illustration 2–77 or in Illustration
2–78

IT IS MANDATORY TO CONNECT A 50 Ω TERMINATOR AT BOTH


WARNING ENDS OF THE WORKSTATIONS NETWORKS.

D Power ON the DLX1 A72 system power.


D Power ON the UPS, if present.
D Power ON the DLX1 A2 Sun workstation. During the boot, check that the station has 64 MB of
memory.
D Once the system has booted, check that the dlx login> prompt is displayed on the flat panel screen.

2–174
GE Medical Systems ADVANTX DLX INSTALLATION
REV 0 sm 2198944-100

INSTALLING THE DICOM ETHERNET OPTION


Job Card IST16 O 7 of 20

ILLUSTRATION 2–77
BASIC WORKSTATIONS NETWORK WITH NO ROUTER

50 Ω terminator 50 Ω terminator
acquisition system network

le0: ethernet
vdp ethernet frontal ethernet
dlx interface

VDP TITAN
DLX
SUN
Classic

192.100.10.5
netmask: 255.255.255.0 dlx–dicom1 le 1
dicom ethernet I/F
board

AUI cable
50 Ω terminator transceiver 50 Ω terminator

transceiver / AUI

aw1 ethernet
192.100.10.2

AW3.0
STATION

2–175
GE Medical Systems ADVANTX DLX INSTALLATION
REV 0 sm 2198944-100

INSTALLING THE DICOM ETHERNET OPTION


Job Card IST16 O 8 of 20

ILLUSTRATION 2–78
WORKSTATIONS SUBNETWORKS WITH ONE ROUTER SAMPLE

SIGNA AW 1 CT/MR YMS


192.100.10.1 192.100.10.2 192.100.10.4

ETC board

AW 1 (to reach AW 2)
route add net 192.100.9.0 192.100.10.3 1
coaxial cable
50 Ω
terminator 192.100.10.0 Network 50 Ω
terminator
transceiver

AUI cable

192.100.10.5 Dicom Ethernet I/F bd


NETWOK PRINTER
dlx–dicom1 le1 on DLX

DLX 192.100.10.10

DLX
route add net 192.100.9.0 192.100.10.3 1
( le1 netmask : 255.255.255.128 )

CT HLA/HSA

AW 2
GATE 192.100.10.3
or route add net 192.100.10.0 192.100.9.1 1
ROUTER CT SBC
CT OC AW 2
192.100.9.2
192.100.9.1
192.100.9.4

CT OC: Use ”setAdoption” to configure


50 Ω 50 Ω
terminator AW 2 as non Genesis host within the suite terminator
192.100.9.0 Subnetwork

2–176
GE Medical Systems ADVANTX DLX INSTALLATION
REV 0 sm 2198944-100

INSTALLING THE DICOM ETHERNET OPTION


Job Card IST16 O 9 of 20

5.5 Software Configuration

1. Login as service and enter the GEMS proprietary service password.


2. Select DLXINSTAL in the DLX Main Menu.
3. In the DLXINSTAL Main Menu, select the Other Options menu (command number 5). The Other
Options command menu is displayed.

Other Options
–––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––
1: Cardiac Analysis (YES/NO) = NO
2: In Room QA (YES/NO) = NO
3: Archive Option
4: Network Option (None/Ethernet/Gemnet) = NONE
5: Network Configuration menu
6: COMPAS option (YES/NO) = NO
7: Send to positioner (YES/NO) = ONLY AVAILABLE ONLY WITH COMPAS OPTION
8: Draw Epipolars (YES/NO) = ONLY AVAILABLE ONLY WITH COMPAS OPTION
––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––
0 List all
1...8 Update Values
99 Back to Main Menu
Enter Command :

4. To install the DiCom Ethernet option, enter 4 at the command prompt and press <Return> to confirm.
A GE proprietary password is required to enable the DICOM ethernet option.
5. Enter the number that corresponds with DiCom Ethernet, 1 and press <Return>.
6. Check that Ethernet appears in the Other Options menu.
7. DICOM Ethernet Board IP address and host name configurations.
You will need to assign a unique IP address and a hostname to the Dicom Ethernet Board in the DLX
System.
The IP address can be given by the hospital network administrator or by your OLC. The hostname is
given by you.

2–177
GE Medical Systems ADVANTX DLX INSTALLATION
REV 0 sm 2198944-100

INSTALLING THE DICOM ETHERNET OPTION


Job Card IST16 O 10 of 20

EXAMPLES:

In Illustration 2–77 “Basic workstations network with no router” and Illustration 2–78 “Workstations
subnetworks with one router sample, you have for the DLX Dicom Ethernet Board:

Host–Name IP Address

Example: Illustration 2–77 dlx–dicom1 192.100.10.5


and Illustration 2–78
Yours *
* given by the hospital or by the OLC

8. Ethernet Card IP Address setting


9. Click on Ethernet Card in the Settings Menu.

DLX Main Menu


DLX Application
DLX Others DLX Others Menu
Refresh Screen Image Disk
Abort Application Service
Utilities
Settings Language
Settings Menu
password Ethernet
167–NVRAM
Tftpboot Variables IP address
Ethernet Ethernet Card
Worklist Routers
ATM Netmask
AE–Title Table
Screen Saver Time
System Date
Language
password

Note that with C13.xx DLX software, you will find directly under the settings menu “Ethernet Card”.

2–178
GE Medical Systems ADVANTX DLX INSTALLATION
REV 0 sm 2198944-100

INSTALLING THE DICOM ETHERNET OPTION


Job Card IST16 O 11 of 20

10. Position the cursor in IP # window and type the Ethernet board IP address.

ETHERNET CARD

WARNING: REBOOTS WHEN EXITING AFTER ANY CHANGE

IP#: Name:

Add Remove Help Exit

11. Position the cursor in Name window and type the name of the DLX system seen by the
network.
Note: If you need more information on entering the Ethernet card address, click on Help in the Ethernet
Card window. The Help Text window appears. Click on OK when you are ready to continue.

12. Click on Add then on Exit .

13. le1: Network Configuration


In order to set properly the le1: netmask, you need to know:
– the class of your IP address ;
– the number of subnetworks of your configuration.

2–179
GE Medical Systems ADVANTX DLX INSTALLATION
REV 0 sm 2198944-100

INSTALLING THE DICOM ETHERNET OPTION


Job Card IST16 O 12 of 20

IP ADDRESS CLASSES
CLASS A NETWORK
0 8 16 24 32

0 NETWORK HOST

Class A network address between 1 and 127.


Maximum of 127 class A networks and 16777214 hosts per network.
Typical netmask (no mask) is 255.0.0.0.

e.g. : 3 . 45 . 16. 101 Network address 3.0.0.0


network host id

CLASS B NETWORK
0 8 16 24 32

1 0 NETWORK HOST

Class B network address between 128 and 191.


(16 bits for the Network, 16 bits for the host).
Typical netmask (no mask) is 255.255.0.0.

e.g. : 129 . 32 . 100 . 54 Network address 129.32.0.0


network host id

CLASS C NETWORK
0 8 16 24 32

1 1 NETWORK HOST

Class C network between 192 and 223


(24 bits for the Network, 8 bits for the host)
Typical netmask (no mask) is 255.255.255.0.
Most commonly used for small “Local Area Networks”. (A lot of possible networks but few hosts per
network).

2–180
GE Medical Systems ADVANTX DLX INSTALLATION
REV 0 sm 2198944-100

INSTALLING THE DICOM ETHERNET OPTION


Job Card IST16 O 13 of 20

SUBNETWORKS

Allows a single network address to span several physical networks.

Some of the bits in the host portion of an IP address are used to specify the subnet number on the network
backbone, and the remaining are used to specify the host number within the subnet. How these bits are divided
between subnet and host depends on the type of netmask used.

D The 0–bit netmask (255.255.255.0) is the default netmask for Class C networks, since it has no effect
on the IP address.
D The 7–bit and 8–bit netmasks are useless because they don’t contain any useable host addresses.
D Of the remaining netmasks types, the 3–bit, 4–bit, and 5–bit types are the most practical to use because
they offer realistic subnet/host combinations.

Possible Netmasks for Class C Network (not commonly used)

HOST PORTION OF NUMBER OF USEABLE


NETMASK NUMBER OF HOST ADDRESSES
NETMASK (BINARY)
SUBNETS
Type Number Subnet Bits Host Bits Per Subnet Total
0–bit 255.255.255.0 00000000 1 254 254
1–bit 255.255.255.128 1 0000000 2 126 252
2–bit 255.255.255.192 11 000000 4 62 248
3–bit 255.255.255.224 111 00000 8 30 240
4–bit 255.255.255.240 1111 0000 16 14 224
5–bit 255.255.255.248 11111 000 32 6 192
6–bit 255.255.255.252 111111 00 64 2 128
7–bit 255.255.255.254 1111111 0 128 0 0
8–bit 255.255.255.255 11111111 0 256 0 0

To determine which netmask type to use, you must first know which subnet/host combination is needed for the
network.
When looking at the table, you can notice that the number of useable host addresses is always equal to the
number of host addresses minus 2.
e.g.: 8 >>6 useable ; 16 >>14 useable ; 64 >>62 useable host addresses.

2–181
GE Medical Systems ADVANTX DLX INSTALLATION
REV 0 sm 2198944-100

INSTALLING THE DICOM ETHERNET OPTION


Job Card IST16 O 14 of 20

If, for instance, we consider a 255.255.255.192 netmask, we can see that we are able to split the network into 4
subnetworks. See following illustration
Each subnet will have 62 possible addresses.
–subnet 1 : from 1 to 62
–subnet 2 : from 65 to 126
–subnet 3 : from 129 to 190
–subnet 4 : from 193 to 254
The missing addresses are reserved for SRI–NIC administration and subnet broadcasting.
ILLUSTRATION 2–79

SUBNET 2
NETMASK : 255.255.255.192

DLX-DICOM1 ROUTER1 AW1 AW2

192.100.9.2 192.100.9.3
192.100.9.66 192.100.9.67

192.100.9.4

ROUTER GATE1

192.100.9.0  SUBNET 1

ROUTER ROUTER
GATE2 GATE3
192.9.100.5 192.100.9.6

ROUTER 2 AW3 ROUTER 3 AW4

192.100.9.132 192.100.9.131 192.100.9.212 192.100.9.213

SUBNET 3 SUBNET 4

Note: For Class A or Class B subnetworks, consult the Network Administrator of the Site.

le1: netmask example:


le1: netmask value IP address class # of subnet
Example: illustration 2–77 255.255.255.0 C 1*
Example: illustration 2–78 255.255.255.128 C 2
Example: illustration 2–79 255.255.255.192 C 4
Yours
* between le1 and the AW Workstation.
Note that the acquisition network is a second network and not a subnet.

2–182
GE Medical Systems ADVANTX DLX INSTALLATION
REV 0 sm 2198944-100

INSTALLING THE DICOM ETHERNET OPTION


Job Card IST16 O 15 of 20

14. Procedure
15. Enter the service menu and select DLX Others and Settings and Ethernet and Netmask

DLX Main Menu


DLX Application
DLX Others DLX Others Menu
Refresh Screen Image Disk
Abort Application Service
Utilities
Settings Language
Settings Menu
password Ethernet
167–NVRAM
Tftpboot Variables IP address
Ethernet Ethernet Card
Worklist Routers
ATM Netmask
AE–Title Table
Screen Saver Time
System Date
Language
password

Note that with C13.xx DLX Software, you will find directly under the settings menu “Netmask”.

2–183
GE Medical Systems ADVANTX DLX INSTALLATION
REV 0 sm 2198944-100

INSTALLING THE DICOM ETHERNET OPTION


Job Card IST16 O 16 of 20

The following screen appears (le1 is the name of the second Ethernet port of the DLX used for the
Dicom Ethernet output.

16. Click on Network le1 button:

1 Position the mouse cursor here and


type the netmask you got.

2 Click on Apply 3 Click on See for the following command:


”ifconfigle1”’shcat/etc/hostname.le1’”netmask x.x.x.x

17. Click on close and the Sun workstation will reboot.

2–184
GE Medical Systems ADVANTX DLX INSTALLATION
REV 0 sm 2198944-100

INSTALLING THE DICOM ETHERNET OPTION


Job Card IST16 O 17 of 20

18. ROUTER Configuration in the DLX system.


In the case of more than one subnet, the DLX will push Dicom images to the Dicom server stations
through routers or gateways (DLX is on subnet 1 and AW3.0 is on another subnet).
In this case you will need to define touters in the DLX System.
Example:
ILLUSTRATION 2–80

Net
e.f.g.0
DICOM station
e.f.g.1

Network
e.f.g.0

Router
e.f.g.4
x.y.z.1

Network
x.y.z.0

DLX SUN
2nd Ethernet Port (le1)
x.y.z.2 route add net e.f.g.0 x.y.z.1 1

Destination network IP router IP address seen by Number of .........


DLX (number of routers to go
through from DLX to des-
tination network)
Illustration 2–80 e.f.g.0 x.y.z.& 1
Illustration 2–78 192.100.9.0 192.100.10.3 1
Illustration 2–79 192.100.9.0 192.100.9.67 1
Yours subnetworks

2–185
GE Medical Systems ADVANTX DLX INSTALLATION
REV 0 sm 2198944-100

INSTALLING THE DICOM ETHERNET OPTION


Job Card IST16 O 18 of 20

19. Procedure
20. Enter the service menu and select DLX Others and Settings and Ethernet and Routers

DLX Main Menu


DLX Application
DLX Others DLX Others Menu
Refresh Screen Image Disk
Abort Application Service
Utilities
Settings Settings Menu
167–NVRAM
IP address
Tftpboot Variables Ethernet Card
Ethernet Routers
Worklist Netmask
ATM
AE–Title Table
Screen Saver Time
System Date
Language
password

Note that with C13.xx DLX Software, you will find directly under the settings menu “Routers”.

2–186
GE Medical Systems ADVANTX DLX INSTALLATION
REV 0 sm 2198944-100

INSTALLING THE DICOM ETHERNET OPTION


Job Card IST16 O 19 of 20

21. The following tool is displayed :

22. Click on Dicom button::

Position the mouse cursor here


1 and type the DICOM station
subnet address.

2 Position the mouse cursor here


and type the router address.
3 Type the number of hops to
reach the Dicom station

4 Click here to add Click on See to check the route add net (dicom station
5 subnet address) (router address) (nb hops) is in this file

23. Click on Close button when finished, the Sun workstation will reboot.

2–187
GE Medical Systems ADVANTX DLX INSTALLATION
REV 0 sm 2198944-100

INSTALLING THE DICOM ETHERNET OPTION


Job Card IST16 O 20 of 20

5.6 Record DLX Option Status

D After the successful completion of the functional check, install the option identification label inside
the DLX cabinet front door, above the door diagrams.
5.7 Save configuration

D Now you must updated your save configuration diskette with the new IP address and Ethernet server.
Use UTILITIES menu to do that.
5.8 Server Network Configuration

D Use the DLX operator manual to declare the Dicom server stations (A Windows Stations) where you
want to be able to push DLX images.
Refer to para 4–3–2 Chapter 3 Section “Network Option – Host Management – Host Configuration”
in the DLX Operator Manual to perform this configuration.
Note: For each Dicom Server station that you want to configure in the DLX, you will need to know its IP
address and to give it a Dicom server name.

2–188
GE Medical Systems ADVANTX DLX INSTALLATION
REV 0 sm 2198944-100

ADVANTX DLX INSTALLATION Job Card IST17 O 1 of 14

Purpose: INSTALLING THE HIS/RIS ETHERNET Version No.: 1


OPTION Date: 11–97

Time: 40 min Personnel: 1

SECTION 1
SUPPLIES

D DLX HIS/RIS Option, PN 2181890

SECTION 2
TOOLS REQUIRED

D A standard service tool kit with metric wrenches.

SECTION 3
SAFETY PRECAUTIONS

BE SURE ALL POWER IS OFF TO THE DLX SYSTEM CABINET


WARNING BEFORE BEGINNING THIS PROCEDURE.

D Set the DLX1 A72 VDP/options AC Power.


D Switch on the DLX cabinet to OFF.
D Shut down the Sun station.
At the dlxlogin: prompt, type:
dlxlogin: halt <cr>
The OK prompt appears. Power OFF the Sun workstation.
D Power OFF the UPS, if present.
D Power OFF the Main Power Source (XFMR), refer to Job Card IST E.
D Disconnect power to DLX1 A72 cabinet bulkhead, and XFMR power to DLX1 A73.

Notice: To avoid equipment damage take the usual precautions against static electricity for this procedure.
Wear an antistatic wrist strap when handling the Ethernet board.

2-189
GE Medical Systems ADVANTX DLX INSTALLATION
REV 0 sm 2198944-100

INSTALLING THE HIS/RIS ETHERNET OPTION


Job Card IST17 O 2 of 14

SECTION 4
PREREQUISITES

D Remove the velcro strips securing the Sun on the DLX cabinet shelf. See also Job Card D/R 51.
D Disconnect all cables from the Sun back panel.

SECTION 5
TASK DESCRIPTION

5.1 Check HIS/RIS Ethernet Kit Contents

D Check the HIS/RIS Ethernet Kit p/n 2181890 contents.


TABLE 1
DICOM ETHERNET KIT P/N 2165563 CONTENTS

PART NAME PART NUMBER


ETHERNET BOARD, SBS520A 2138934
SUN SS4 32 MB MEMORY EXTENSION 2150991
IDENTIFICATION LABEL 39595507
OPTION ID 2177629
TRANSCEIVER DICOM ETHERNET 2184071
OPTION INSTALLATION NOTE 2187934
ETHERNET INSTALLATION 2111157

D Open the SBUS package, and check the board as shown in Illustration 2–73.

ILLUSTRATION 2–81
ETHERNET BOARD PACKAGING

2-190
GE Medical Systems ADVANTX DLX INSTALLATION
REV 0 sm 2198944-100

INSTALLING THE HIS/RIS ETHERNET OPTION


Job Card IST17 O 3 of 14

5.2 Ethernet board Installation procedure

D Use a 1/4 x 4” Phillips head screwdriver to loosen the screw on the upper right corner on the back of
the Sun unit. See also the Sun SPARCStation “Installation Guide”.
D Use a Phillips head screwdriver to remove on the lock block screw on the back of the Sun unit.
D The Sun cover hinges are located at the front of the unit. Holding the cover by the sides, lift to open
the Sun unit.
D Open the SBus clips. See Illustration 2–74.
D Squeeze the tabs on the SBus filler to disengage the filler panel. Unlatch to remove.
D Plug the Ethernet board into the Sbus slot.
ILLUSTRATION 2–82
SBUS LOCATION IN SUN WORKSTATION

2-191
GE Medical Systems ADVANTX DLX INSTALLATION
REV 0 sm 2198944-100

INSTALLING THE HIS/RIS ETHERNET OPTION


Job Card IST17 O 4 of 14

5.3 Memory extension Installation

D Mount the 32 MB memory extension into the next memory slot available on the SUN SS4; Note that
there may be 3 slots used by 8 MB banks (case of first SS4 stations), or 1 slot occupied with
132 MB banks (latest workstations); for each case, use the next available slot.
ILLUSTRATION 2–83
MOUNTING MEMORY BANKS IN THEIR SLOTS

5.4 Terminate installation

D Close the station. Refit screw on the back corner of the Sun.
D Refit the lock block screw.
D Remount the station in the cabinet.
D Reconnect all disconnected cables.

2-192
GE Medical Systems ADVANTX DLX INSTALLATION
REV 0 sm 2198944-100

INSTALLING THE HIS/RIS ETHERNET OPTION


Job Card IST17 O 5 of 14

D Connect the Ethernet cable W306 between the Sun SBus connector (1) and the Ethernet AUI connector
on the cabinet bulkhead. See Illustration 2–76.

ILLUSTRATION 2–84
SUN REAR PANEL

DLX1 A2
(1) SBUS
I
I

D Route the cable through the cabinet cable guides, and ty-rap the cable with existing cabinet cables.
D Reconnect the velcro strips that secure the Sun on the DLX cabinet shelf.
D Stick the option label on the inside of the DLX cabinet door.
D Reconnect the DLX1 A73 system power from the XFMR and DLX1 A72 Cabinet Bulkhead.
D Power ON the DLX1 A72 system power.
D Power ON the UPS, if present.
D Power ON the DLX1 A2 Sun workstation.
D Once the system has booted, check that the dlx login> prompt is displayed on the flat panel screen.
D Connect a transceiver kit on 2nd Ethernet DLX1 A70.
AUCUN LIEN
5.5 Ethernet Card IP address

You will need to access the Settings Menu.

D Login as service and enter the service password.


dlxlogin: service <Return>
password: <Return> {Enter the GEMS proprietary service password; it is not displayed.}
D Drag with the mouse button pressed and select DLX Others. Continue to drag and select Settings
and then Ethernet .
D Refer to CN22 Jobcard (para AUCUN LIEN ) to enter the Ethernet card address.

2-193
GE Medical Systems ADVANTX DLX INSTALLATION
REV 0 sm 2198944-100

INSTALLING THE HIS/RIS ETHERNET OPTION


Job Card IST17 O 6 of 14

5.6 Software Configuration

1. Login as service and enter the GEMS proprietary service password.


2. Select DLXINSTAL in the DLX Main Menu.
3. In the DLXINSTAL Main Menu, select the Other Options menu (command number 5). The Other
Options command menu is displayed.

Other Options
–––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––
1: Cardiac Analysis (YES/NO) = NO
2: In Room QA (YES/NO) = NO
3: Archive Option
4: Network Option (None/Ethernet/Gemnet) = ETHERNET
5: Network Configuration menu
6: COMPAS option (YES/NO) = NO
7: Send to positioner (YES/NO) = ONLY AVAILABLE ONLY WITH COMPAS OPTION
8: Draw Epipolars (YES/NO) = ONLY AVAILABLE ONLY WITH COMPAS OPTION
––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––
0 List all
1...8 Update Values
99 Back to Main Menu
Enter Command :

4. To install the DiCom Ethernet or Gemnet option, enter 4 at the command prompt and press <Return> to
confirm.
A GE proprietary password is required to enable the DICOM ethernet option.
5. Enter the number that corresponds with DiCom Ethernet, 1 or Gemnet 2 and press <Return>.
6. Check that ETHERNET or GEMNET appears in the Other Options menu.
7. Select Network configuration Menu: type 5 and press <Return>

2-194
GE Medical Systems ADVANTX DLX INSTALLATION
REV 0 sm 2198944-100

INSTALLING THE HIS/RIS ETHERNET OPTION


Job Card IST17 O 7 of 14

8. Set the His/Ris option (patient worklist) by Entering command : 4, and press <Return>,
and select Y <return>
The following menu is displayed:
1: Default Transfer mode (Gemnet only) = Manual
2: AutoArchive Destination default value = Network
3: Gateway Network is an Archive or a Transfer
destination = TRANSFER DESTINATION
4: Patient Worklist Management Option = YES
––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––
0 List all
1...4 Update Values
99 Back to Main Menu
Enter Command :

Note: Even if Patient Worklist Management Option is displayed as YES, reenter YES again to reinitialize
the configuration files properly.

9. Go to Job Card CNF 22A Chapter 5.5 “Ethernet Card IP address” section in order to declare the IP
addresses of your Ethernet board.
10. The CNF22A will ask you to enter a name for DLX as seen from Hospital Network, and the
corresponding IP address. These informations must be given by the Hospital Administration.
Note: In order for the system to operate correctly, it is MANDATORY that the le1 Network, the le0 Network
and the Insite Port Master Network do not have the same Network address. Both IP address and
Netmask are necessary for the Network address calculation. The le1 Netmask must be given by the
Hospital Administration.
Example :

IP address : 3. 45. 18. 54


Netmask : 255. 255. 252. 0

==> Network address = 3.45.16


Host address = 2.54

2-195
GE Medical Systems ADVANTX DLX INSTALLATION
REV 0 sm 2198944-100

INSTALLING THE HIS/RIS ETHERNET OPTION


Job Card IST17 O 8 of 14

5.7 His/Ris Server Network Installation

Enter the service menu and select DLX Others and Settings and Worklist

DLX Others Menu


Settings Menu
Image Disk
167–NVRAM
DLX Main Menu Service
Tftpboot Variables
DLX Application Utilities
Ethernet
DLX Others Settings Worklist
Refresh Screen ATM
Abort Application Remote AE–Title Table
Screen Saver Time
System Date
Language
password

The following menu is displayed :You must complete the fields.

5.8 Record DLX Option Status

D After the successful completion of the functional check, install the option identification label inside
the DLX cabinet front door, above the door diagrams.

2-196
GE Medical Systems ADVANTX DLX INSTALLATION
REV 0 sm 2198944-100

INSTALLING THE HIS/RIS ETHERNET OPTION


Job Card IST17 O 9 of 14

5.9 Application check

1. Start the DLX Application.


2. Check that the “Worklist” button is displayed on the patient browser screen.

Note: if the “Worklist” button is displayed and then erased again, go to DLXINSTALL:
– select Network Configuration Menu (Command 5)
– Select 4. Patient Worklist Management
– Reselect YES even if YES is already displayed.

5.10 Save configuration

D Now you must updated your save configuration diskette with the new IP address and Ethernet server.
Use UTILITIES menu to do that.

2-197
GE Medical Systems ADVANTX DLX INSTALLATION
REV 0 sm 2198944-100

INSTALLING THE HIS/RIS ETHERNET OPTION


Job Card IST17 O 10 of 14

SECTION 6
HIS/RIS | DICOM DLX ROUTE TABLE

6.1 Purpose

If the customer network requires a router to communicate from DLX to another station, the router address
must be declared in DLX

Note: It is important that you contact the hospital network administrator to determine whether–given the
IP address of the DLX on le1 (le1 is the name of the second Ethernet port), the IP address of the
HIS/RIS review station and the netmask on le1–there is a gateway to declare on the DLX side.
Adding router information is not always necessary.

6.2 Explanantions

D How to declare a router address:


A router address is declared by using the following UNIX command:
route add net <Destination IP> <Router IP> <metric>
Route add net allows you to operate directly on the routing for the specific network indicated by
<Destination IP>.
The gateway ”router” argument indicates the Network gateway to which the packet should be
addressed and the metric argument indicates the number of hops to the destination.

D What are you going to do for HIS/RIS:


The system must be loaded with the necessary routes (address paths) to allow access.
Since all external calls from the system are routed through the External Router mode, the address of the
External Router must be included in each route.
The command used is:
route add net < HIS/RIS station subnet address> <Router address> 1

2-198
GE Medical Systems ADVANTX DLX INSTALLATION
REV 0 sm 2198944-100

INSTALLING THE HIS/RIS ETHERNET OPTION


Job Card IST17 O 11 of 14

Net
e.f.g.0
HIS/RIS station
e.f.g.1

Network
e.f.g.0

Router
e.f.g.4
x.y.z.1

Network
x.y.z.0

DLX SUN
2nd Ethernet Port (le1)
x.y.z.2 route add net e.f.g.0 x.y.z.1 1

6.3 Procedure

1. Enter the service menu and select DLX Others and Settings and Ethernet and Routers

DLX Others Menu


Image Disk Settings Menu
DLX Main Menu
Service 167–NVRAM
DLX Application IP address
Utilities Tftpboot Variables Ethernet Card
DLX Others Settings Ethernet Routers
Refresh Screen Worklist Netmask
Abort Application ATM
AE–Title Table
Screen Saver Time
System Date
Language
password

2-199
GE Medical Systems ADVANTX DLX INSTALLATION
REV 0 sm 2198944-100

INSTALLING THE HIS/RIS ETHERNET OPTION


Job Card IST17 O 12 of 14

2. The following tool is displayed :

3. Click on Dicom button:

*
Position the mouse cursor here
1 and type the DICOM station
subnet address.

2 Position the mouse cursor here


and type the router address.
3 Type the number of hops to
reach the Dicom station

4 Click here to add Click on See to check the route addnet (dicom station
5 subnet address) (router address) (nb hops) is in this file

4. Click on Close button when finished, the Sun workstation will reboot.

* : DICOM or HIS/RIS

2-200
GE Medical Systems ADVANTX DLX INSTALLATION
REV 0 sm 2198944-100

INSTALLING THE HIS/RIS ETHERNET OPTION


Job Card IST17 O 13 of 14

6.4 Particular cases.

If the hospital administrator asks for a new netmask on le1 (le1 is the name of the second Ethernet port),
open the service menu and select : DLX Others and Settings and Netmasks

1. Click on Network le1 button:

Position the mouse cursor here and


1 type the netmask given by your
network administrator.

2 Click on Apply 3 Click on See for the following command:


”ifconfigle1”’shcat/etc/hostname.le1’”netmask x.x.x.x

2. Click on Close and the Sun workstation will reboot.

2-201
GE Medical Systems ADVANTX DLX INSTALLATION
REV 0 sm 2198944-100

INSTALLING THE HIS/RIS ETHERNET OPTION


Job Card IST17 O 14 of 14

Blank page

2-202
GE Medical Systems ADVANTX DLX INSTALLATION
REV 0 sm 2198944-100

CHAPTER 3 – SOFTWARE CONFIGURATION

SECTION 1
INTRODUCTION

This chapter permits you to change certain system default settings and personalize the DLX system. The
functions described are:

D DLXINSTAL Software Configuration (declare site options and parameters)


D Update the DLX Time and Date
D Select the System Language
D Modify the Screen Saver Time
D Set Internet Address (UNIX, and/or MVME–167)
D Update the Software Configuration (UNIX and NV-RAM)

SECTION 2
COMMON PROCEDURES

2–1 Accessing the DLX Settings Menu

For most of the software configuration procedures, you will need to do the following:

1. Login as service.

2. At the password prompt enter the service password, and press <Return>.

3. When the system initialization has finished, position the cursor near the bottom of the screen and press the
left mouse button. The DLX Main Menu appears.

DLX Main Menu


DLX Application
DLX Others DLX Others Menu
Refresh Screen Image Disk
Abort Application Service
Utilities
Settings

4. Drag, with the mouse button still pressed, select the DLX Others Menu.

5. Still pressing the mouse button, drag the cursor to the appropriate function, and release the mouse button.

3–1
GE Medical Systems ADVANTX DLX INSTALLATION
REV 0 sm 2198944-100

D The Utilities Menu

DLX Main Menu


DLX Application
DLX Others DLX Others Menu
Refresh Screen Image Disk
Abort Application Service
Utilities Utilities Menu
Settings xterm
MVME–167 console
Save Logfiles
Save Configuration
Restore Configuration
Diagnostics
Setup burnin test
Cancel burnin test
Display pattern (flat panel)
DLX–VDP Ethernet Test

D The Service Menu

DLX Main Menu


DLX Application
DLX Others DLX Others Menu
Refresh Screen Image Disk
Abort Application Service
Utilities Service Menu
Settings DLXINSTAL
DLXTEST
Technical Menu
Download IRK
Consult errlog
Consult errlogsav
Consult dgtlog
Consult dgtlogsav
Save InSite Image

3–2
GE Medical Systems ADVANTX DLX INSTALLATION
REV 0 sm 2198944-100

D The Settings Menu

DLX Main Menu


DLX Application
DLX Others DLX Others Menu
Refresh Screen Image Disk
Abort Application Service
Utilities
Settings Settings Menu
167–NVRAM
Tftpboot Variables
Ethernet
Worklist
ATM
Remote AE–Title Table
Screen Saver Time
System Date
Language
password

2–2 Performing a Reset/Abort

For some of the Software Job Cards, you will need to perform a software reset and/or abort. Carry out a reset
and/or abort as follows:

D Access the VDP (see Job Card D/R020) to perform the SW abort and reset.
1. Open the VDP (remove the 10 Phillips head screws on the VDP front panel).
2. Press the reset button (the red button).
3. Press the software abort button (black button). (The 167–Bug> prompt appears on
the monitor screen.)

The following procedure performs a reset/abort.

D Access the system’s Ethernet cable.


1. Disconnect the Ethernet cable.
2. Power OFF the DLX cabinet.
3. Power ON the DLX cabinet. The 167–Bug> prompt appears on the monitor screen
in the MVME–167 window.

3–3
GE Medical Systems ADVANTX DLX INSTALLATION
REV 0 sm 2198944-100

2–3 Quitting an Application/Function

1. Click on the Exit icon in the lower right corner of the flat panel screen. The Exit window appears.

2. Click on EXIT.

3–4
GE Medical Systems ADVANTX DLX INSTALLATION
REV 0 sm 2198944-100

ADVANTX DLX INSTALLATION Job Card CNF 1 A 1 of 18

Subassembly (FRU): DLX SYSTEMS

Purpose: DLX INSTAL SOFTWARE CONFIGURATION Version No.: 0


Date: 02–98

Time: 10 min Personnel: 1

SECTION 1
SUPPLIES

D Not applicable.

SECTION 2
TOOLS

D Not applicable.

SECTION 3
SAFETY PRECAUTIONS

D Not applicable.

SECTION 4
PREREQUISITES

D Change any hardware parts that require software reconfiguration before entering the DLXINSTAL
tool.
D Start–up the DLX (refer to Job Card IST1 E).

SECTION 5
TASK DESCRIPTION

The following pages give the DLXINSTAL, factory set, software configurations for DLX Systems.

5.1 Start the DLXINSTAL Tool

D Login as service and enter the service password.


dlxlogin: service <Return>
password: <Return> {Enter the GEMS proprietary service password.
It will not be displayed on the screen.}
D To access the DLXINSTAL Menu:
– Position the cursor near the bottom of the screen and press the left mouse button,

3-5
GE Medical Systems ADVANTX DLX INSTALLATION
REV 0 sm 2198944-100

DLX INSTAL SOFTWARE CONFIGURATION


Job Card CNF 1 A 2 of 18

– Drag, with the mouse button still pressed, select the DLX Others Menu,
– Still pressing the mouse button, select Service and then drag with the mouse to select
DLXINSTAL; release the mouse button.

DLX Main Menu


DLX Application
DLX Others DLX Others Menu
Refresh Screen Image Disk
Abort Application Service
Utilities Service Menu
Settings DLXINSTAL
DLXTEST
Technical Menu
Download IRK
Consult errlog
Consult errlogsav
Consult dgtlog
Consult dgtlogsav
Save InSite Image

– The message Please wait...Starting DLXINSTAL Application appears on the screen.

5.2 Close the DLXINSTAL Tool

When you have finished modifying or checking parameters, exit the DLXINSTAL tool as follows.
D You can select either DLX APPLICATION in the DLX Main Menu, or DLXTEST in the DLX Others
Menu. Doing so automatically quits the DLXINSTAL tool.

D You can also click on the Exit icon in the lower right corner of the flat panel screen. The Exit

window appears. Click on EXIT.

3-6
GE Medical Systems ADVANTX DLX INSTALLATION
REV 0 sm 2198944-100

DLX INSTAL SOFTWARE CONFIGURATION


Job Card CNF 1 A 3 of 18

5.3 Main Menu

DLXINSTAL PROGRAM (Initialization Utility)


Version Cxx.xx, Date xx/xx/xx

Command Command Description


* 1: Identification/Options
* 2: Consoles Configuration
* 3: Acquisition Parameters
* 4: Processing Parameters
* 5: Other Options
6: XDG spatial filters configuration
7: Iris aperture curve input
8: DA MODE luts parameters

To Exit Program, Choose an Application from the DLX Main Menu.

Enter Command Number:

Note: * Must be performed at installation.


D Commands 1 to 4 access new menus for parameter selection.
D Command 2 is no longer used.
D Command 5 allows you to configure the software options. (These options are protected by a password).

D Command 6 allows you to change the strength of the filter for each acquisition mode.
D Command 7 allows you to enter the ACC curve values manually (for either frontal or lateral ACC).
D Command 8: DA Mode Luts Parameters: no longer used.
D Typing 99 <cr> returns you to the Main Menu from any other menu.
D When all parameter changes have been made, select another application from the DLX Main Menu
or use the pop–up menu to exit from DLXINSTAL.

3-7
GE Medical Systems ADVANTX DLX INSTALLATION
REV 0 sm 2198944-100

DLX INSTAL SOFTWARE CONFIGURATION


Job Card CNF 1 A 4 of 18

5.4 Command 1: Identification/Options

Identification/Option
––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––
1: Hospital Name (16 Characters) =DEE CIN BUC
2: Hospital Address =283 route de la minière
=78xxx BUC
3: Identification Number (1..9999) =1
4: Line frequency (50Hz, 60Hz) =60Hz
5: Metric Unit (YES/NO) =NO
6: MFC type (1024 Video, Digital) =1024 Video
7: Model Period Number =MPE2
––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––
0 List all
1..7 Update Values
99 Back to Main Menu
Enter Command :

Note: Parameters 1, 2 , 4, 5 and 7 must be performed at installation.


Parameter 1: Hospital name (16 characters)

– See the User’s Manual.


Parameter 2: Hospital Address (2 lines with 31 characters/line)

Parameter 3: Identification Number (1...9999)

– This number identifies the system. This parameter is set by Manufacturing and must not be
changed. (This is the serial number of the DLX which can be found on a label stuck on the DLX
cabinet. Product locator label.)
Parameter 4: Line Frequency (50Hz, 60Hz)

Parameter 5: Metric Unit (YES/NO)

– Determines the measurement units for a patient’s height and weight.


– Centimeters and kilograms are the measurement units if YES is selected.
– Feet, inches and pounds are the measurement units if NO is selected.
– This parameter does not control units of measurement in processing, which are in centimeters in
a calibrated sequence.

3-8
GE Medical Systems ADVANTX DLX INSTALLATION
REV 0 sm 2198944-100

DLX INSTAL SOFTWARE CONFIGURATION


Job Card CNF 1 A 5 of 18

Parameter 6: MFC type (1024 Video, Digital)

– When Digital is selected in the Multi Format Camera option, the parity must be entered and must
be the same as the camera’s parity (even or odd parity). If the Host Control option is present (batch
filming), enter Yes when the system proposes the option.

MFC Type <V/D>:


MFC Parity [E/O]:
MFC Host Control:
Parameter 7: Model Period Number

– To be set according to the model period number of the Advantx system. The model period number
must be greater than or equal to 11 for DLX.

Model Period Number?


( >= 11 for Advantx )
( >= E2 for Titan ) =
MP Number:

Note: Type 99 <cr> to return to the Main Menu from any other menu.

5.5 Command 2: Console configuration menu

– At the command number prompt, enter the command number:


Enter Command Number: 2 <Return>
the following messages is displayed.

*****************************************************************************************
*****CONSOLE CONFIGURATION PARAMETERS NO LONGER USED *****
*****************************************************************************************

3-9
GE Medical Systems ADVANTX DLX INSTALLATION
REV 0 sm 2198944-100

DLX INSTAL SOFTWARE CONFIGURATION


Job Card CNF 1 A 6 of 18

5.6 Command 3: Acquisition parameter menu

Acquisition Parameters
––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––
1 Shutter Diameter (in pixels) (0..720) =470 (or 512 for 50Hz)
2 Vascular Setup Optimum Level (0..255) = 230
3 Vascular Lower Threshold Setup Value (0..254) = 30
4 Vascular Upper Threshold Setup Value (1..255) = 240
5 Cardiac Setup Optimum Level (0..255) = 230
6 Automatic review after acquisition [NO/PAUSE/YES] = YES
7 Acquisition Subtract Curve: # | Brightness | Contrast = 1 | 341 | 416
8 Fluoro Roadmap Curve: # | Brightness | Contrast = 1 | 255 | 384
9 CINE Tagalong Curve: *** No longer used ***
10 Line Lock Option [YES/NO] = NO
11 Type of Fluoro [CONTINUOUS/PULSED] = PULSED
12 Roadmap Option Exists [YES/NO] = NO | Immediate display [YES/NO] = NO
13 Number of VCRs = 0
14 DA Mode Lut (norm/inv) [N/I] =I
15 Default trial box % = 50%
16 Highlighted Boundaries Trial Display [YES/NO] =NO
17 LIH on one plane retains the other plane *** No longer used ***
18 Iris correction for BOLUS (–75 ...75) = –35 for LCA
= 0 for LCV+ & LC+
19 Iris correction for SPIN (–75 ...75) = 0 for LCA , LCV+ & LC+
––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––
0 To list the values of the above parameters
1..19 To modify the values of the above parameters
99 Back to Main Menu
Enter Command Number:

THE ”AUTOMATIC REVIEW AFTER ACQUISITION” OPTION


WARNING SHOULD BE SET:
. TO YES FOR CARDIAC LABS
. ACCORDING TO THE CUSTOMER WISHES FOR ANGIO LABS

Parameter 1: Shutter diameter (in pixels)

– This is the diameter of the black circular mask that appears on the image monitor during acquisition
and processing. This value is 512 (an inscribed circle) for a 50Hz system and 470 for a 60Hz
system.
Parameter 2: Vascular Setup Optimum Level (0..255)

– This specifics the desired pixel level of a ”good” trial image. When performing Vascular trials, the
DLX will calculate a new (optimal) iris value based on achieving the maximum histogram level
(Peak Video Level) of this value. This value is set to 230.

3-10
GE Medical Systems ADVANTX DLX INSTALLATION
REV 0 sm 2198944-100

DLX INSTAL SOFTWARE CONFIGURATION


Job Card CNF 1 A 7 of 18

Parameter 3: Vascular Lower threshold setup value (0..254)

– This value defines the smallest region value of trial images. During a trial, all regions with a pixel
value of less than this value will be shaded. To prevent too shading, the lower default threshold is
10 (not 0); therefore, all values greater that 10 but less than the Vascular Lower Threshold setup
value will be shaded.
Parameter 4: Vascular Upper threshold setup value (0..254)

– This value defines the uppermost region of trial images. During a trial, all regions with a pixel value
of less than 255 but more than ”Vascular Upper threshold setup value” will be shaded. This value
is set to 240.
Parameter 5: Cardiac Setup Optimum Level (0..255)

– This specifies the desired pixel level for a ”good” trial image for Cardiac aperture optimize
acquisitions. When performing Cardiac trials, the DLX will calculate a new (optimal) iris value
based on achieving a maximum histogram level (Peak Video Level) of this value. This value is set
to 230.
Parameter 6: Automatic review after acquisition (YES/NO/PAUSE)

– When YES is selected, the review starts immediately after each acquisition is completed. If NO
is selected the user must press the REVIEW key to start the review function. If Pause is selected
the system is in review pause mode.
Parameter 7: Acquisition Subtract Curve (#, Brightness, Contrast)

– Allows the user to define a specific B/C curve for this specific acquisition. See section 5.12 for
details on B/C curves.
Parameter 8: Fluoro Roadmap Curve (#, Brightness, Contrast)

– Allows the user to define specific B/C curve for this specific acquisition. See section 5.12 for
details on B/C curves.
Parameter 9: No longer used.

Parameter 10: Line lock option (YES/NO)

– When set to YES, the line lock is turned ON during vascular acquisition.
Parameter 11: Type of Fluoro (CONTINUOUS/PULSED)

– Defines the type of fluoro option that is installed on the Advantx system.
Parameter 12: Roadmap option exists.

– Indicates whether or not the Roadmap option is installed.


– IMMEDIATE DISPLAY: When set to YES, photos are displayed automatically on the second
monitor when a Store Photo is performed.

3-11
GE Medical Systems ADVANTX DLX INSTALLATION
REV 0 sm 2198944-100

DLX INSTAL SOFTWARE CONFIGURATION


Job Card CNF 1 A 8 of 18

Parameter 13: Number of VCR

– Enter the number of VCRs (1 for a monoplane or biplane system, 2 if 2 VCRs are available – on
a biplane system only). If the parameter Automatic VCR in acquisition is set to YES, DLX
automatically records each acquisition performed either in the cardiac or the angio application on
to the VCR.
Parameter 14: DA MODE LUT (NORM,INV)

– If this parameter is set to INV the inversed LUT specified for DA stepping is used; otherwise the
normal gamma LUT is used.
Parameter 15: TRIAL BOX SIZE:

– Image area/trial box area ratio per default.


– Available for CARDIAC and VASCULAR modes.
Parameter 16: HIGHLIGHTED BOUNDARIES TRIAL DISPLAY (Y/N)

– If the parameter is set to YES, all underexposed areas (pixels having values smaller than the
vascular upper threshold value) have their boundaries highlighted on the monitor.
This parameter will be used for both DSA trial and Stepping Optimized Sub Test Run.
Parameter 17: LIH ON ONE PLANE RETAINS THE OTHER PLANE (Y/N)

– Fluoroscopy on a plane does not blank the other’s plane fluoroscopy images.
– Fluoroscopy images on live monitors are tagged with ”L” at the left.
Parameter 18: IRIS CORRECTION FOR BOLUS (–75..75)

– Specifies the desired correction to apply to the current Iris of bolus on terms of aperture steps. The
default value is –35. The range of the parameter is [–75..75].
A. Default value
– The default value –35 corresponds to a 40 cm FOV acquisition with two legs. (LCA system)
– On a 32 cm system or a 22 cm system, this value shall be set to 0 since only one leg is usually
visualized (no gap on the center of the image ). (LCV+ or LC+ systems)
B. Iris readjustment

ANY IRIS CORRECTION FACTOR READJUSTMENT FOR BOLUS


WARNING SHALL BE MADE ONLY WHEN ALL CALIBRATIONS (DOSES, DSA
IRIS APERTURES, T009 SERVICE UNIT) ARE PROPERLY
PERFORMED.
THIS READJUSTMENT HAS TO BE MADE WITH THE
REFERENCE OF SEVERAL BOLUS EXAMINATIONS BEFORE
AND AFTER THE READJUSTMENT.

3-12
GE Medical Systems ADVANTX DLX INSTALLATION
REV 0 sm 2198944-100

DLX INSTAL SOFTWARE CONFIGURATION


Job Card CNF 1 A 9 of 18

B.1/ If, in application, image saturation is frequently observed within the sequence:
– First check that bolus filters are properly used and put in place.
– If the application is OK, iris has to be closed by increments of 10 steps until the phenomenon
is strongly reduced. That means that one bolus examination at least has to take place between
each iris increment of 10 steps.
B.2/ If, in application, levels are far from saturation within the sequence :
– Iris has to be opened by decrements of 10 steps until images are just under the saturation
within the sequence. That means that one bolus examination at least has to take place between
each iris increment.
– Never decrease the iris by more than 10 steps at a time;
– Check after the iris readjustment that no saturation is created ( use CV phantom on a 40 cm
long bolus ).
Parameter 19: IRIS CORRECTION FOR SPIN (–75..75)

– Specifies the desired correction to apply to the current Iris of Spin in terms of Iris aperture steps.
The default value is 0. The range of the parameter is [–75..75].
A. Default value
The default value corresponds to the default aperture for DSA. 0 for LCA or LCV+ or LC+ systems.
B. Iris readjustment

ANY IRIS CORRECTION FACTOR READJUSTMENT FOR BOLUS


WARNING SHALL BE MADE ONLY WHEN ALL CALIBRATIONS (DOSES, DSA
IRIS APERTURES, T009 SERVICE UNIT) ARE PROPERLY
PERFORMED.
THIS READJUSTMENT HAS TO BE MADE WITH THE
REFERENCE OF SEVERAL SPIN EXAMINATIONS BEFORE AND
AFTER THE READJUSTMENT.

B.1/ If, in application, levels at image periphery are frequently saturated within the sequence :
– First check that lateral blades or neck absorber (if any) are properly put in place
– If no application issue appears, iris has to be closed by increments of 10 steps until the
phenomenon is strongly reduced. That means that one spin examination at least has to take
place between each iris increment of 10 steps.
B.2/ If, in application, levels are far from saturation within the sequence :
– Iris has to be opened by decrements of 10 steps until some levels at image periphery are just
under the saturation within the sequence. That means that one spin examination at least has
to take place between each iris increment.
– Never decrease the iris by more than 10 steps at a time;
– Check after the iris readjustment that no saturation is created (use CV phantom on a 15° spin).
Note: Type 99 <cr> to return to the Main Menu from any other menu.

3-13
GE Medical Systems ADVANTX DLX INSTALLATION
REV 0 sm 2198944-100

DLX INSTAL SOFTWARE CONFIGURATION


Job Card CNF 1 A 10 of 18

5.7 Command 4: Processing parameters menu

ENTER COMMAND NUMBER: 4

Post Processing parameters


–––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––
1: Ball calibration size (cm) =4.00
2: Photo Gamma 1 (Linear Cur=0.0, Gamma Cur (0.1....3.0) =0.0
3: Photo Gamma 2 (0.0..3.0) =0.0
4: Catheter calibration unit =French
5: Amplificator size (9, 12 or 16 inches) = 9
6: Auto Pause (0=Loop forever, else=delay in seconds) = 120
7: Roam direction (direct / inverse) =Inverse
8: Default Review (ON / PAUSE) = PAUSE
9: First Cardiac Review starts at 1/3 of scale [YES/NO] = NO
–––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––
Enter Command Number:
0 To list the values of the above parameters
1..9 To modify the values of the above parameters
99 Back to Main Menu
Enter Command Number:

Parameter 1:Ball Calibration Size

– Defines the size of the ball used in the cardiac mode, to calculate the volume.
Parameters 2 and 3: These define the Gamma curve used for Video Images (1024).

– Photo gamma 1 gives the shape of the curve for low values, from 0 to the transition point (standard
value = 0.4).
– Photo gamma 2 gives the shape of the curve for high values from the transition point to 255
(standard value = 2.0).
– If a Gamma curve is selected, the user should be aware that the film asked for from the pedal
(without gamma correction) will be different from the film from the REPRO key (with Gamma
correction). The Laser Imager has its own set of gamma curves, and the user can choose among
these.
Parameter 4: Catheter Calibration Unit

– Selects the catheter size measurement unit (mm or French).


Parameter 5: Amplificator size

– Enter the physical size of the Image Intensifier that is installed on the Advantx system. This
parameter is used by the stenosis algorithm to correct a specific II distortion.

3-14
GE Medical Systems ADVANTX DLX INSTALLATION
REV 0 sm 2198944-100

DLX INSTAL SOFTWARE CONFIGURATION


Job Card CNF 1 A 11 of 18

Parameter 6: Auto Pause

– When set to 0, the review loops until the user presses the Play/Pause key. If an another value is
entered, as soon as a review is selected an automatically pause comes after this programmed delay.
This function is used to avoid having a continuous review when a batch archive/restore is in
progress.
Parameter 7: Roam direction

– Allows inversion of the roam direction. If INVERSE is selected, pressing on the left arrow will
scroll the image to the right. If DIRECT is selected, pressing on the left arrow will scroll the image
to the left. (This applies to all of the arrow keys.)
Parameter 8: Default review

– Allows two ways to start the review.


If ON is selected, review will be running when selecting a sequence icone in Viewer.
If PAUSE is selected, review will be in pause.
Parameter 9: First Cardiac Review starts at 1/3 of scale

– Allows two ways to start cardiac Review.


If YES is selected, current image number is processed so that review will start at 1/3 of total number
of images.
If NOT is selected, review will start with the first image of the sequence.
This concerns only the first review (immediate or no). The next ones will start with the current
image number stored in database.
Note: Type 99 <cr> to return to the Main Menu from any other menu.

3-15
GE Medical Systems ADVANTX DLX INSTALLATION
REV 0 sm 2198944-100

DLX INSTAL SOFTWARE CONFIGURATION


Job Card CNF 1 A 12 of 18

5.8 Command 5: Other Options

This menu is used to configure the software options. Each option is protected by a specific password which
is delivered with the option.

ENTER COMMAND NUMBER: 5

Other Options
–––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––
1: Cardiac Analysis (YES/NO) = NO
2: In Room QA (YES/NO) = NO
3: Archive Option / Auto eject (YES/NO) = Exabyte Auto eject: NO
4: Network Option (None/Ethernet/Gateway) = NONE
5: Network Configuration menu
6: COMPAS option (YES/NO) = NO
7:Send to positioner (YES/NO) = NO (ONLY AVAILABLE WITH COMPAS OPTION)
8:Draw Epipolars (YES/NO) = NO (ONLY AVAILABLE WITH COMPAS OPTION)
9: 3D POS option (YES/NO) = NO
10: System is an Archive System (YES/NO) = NO
––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––
0 List all
1..10 Update Values
99 Back to Main Menu
Enter Command :

Parameter 1: Cardiac Analysis

– Allows you to perform cardiac analysis quantifications (all methods except the Center Line
method).
Parameter 2: In Room QA (Quantitative Analysis)

– This function, In Room QA, can be selected in the MENU SOFTKEY displayed on the console
(or in–room) monitor. It allows the calibration of a sequence, then performs vessels measurements
to determine the correct size of the balloon to be used for intervention procedures.
Parameter 3: Archive option

– This function allows you to install the Exabyte option


Parameter 4: Network Option

– This function allows you to install one of two Network options: Ethernet DiCom or Gemnet.
Select Ethernet for the Ethernet board (the Ethernet DiCom option), Gemnet for the ATM board
(Gemnet option), or None if neither of these network options are installed on the system.
Notice that when Gemnet is selected the Net icon host window, in the DLX Application, is not
active (the Gemnet host should not be modified by the user).

3-16
GE Medical Systems ADVANTX DLX INSTALLATION
REV 0 sm 2198944-100

DLX INSTAL SOFTWARE CONFIGURATION


Job Card CNF 1 A 13 of 18

Parameter 5: Network Configuration Menu (Only if GATEWAY Option is selected)

– To install option 5,
a. Type 5, and press <Return>
b. Verify and if necessary update the parameters:

1: Default Transfer Mode (Gateway only) = Manual


2: Auto transfer path default value = Network
3: Fixed/User can modify automatic transfer node = Fixed
4: Patient Worklist Management Option = YES
––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––
0 List all
1...4 Update Values
99 Back to Main Menu
Enter Command :

– The Default Transfer Mode can only be used when the Network Option is set to Gemnet. When
the Default Transfer is set to Automatic, any sequence that is newly acquired by the DLX will
automatically be sent to Gemnet. The DLX keypad ”Auto Archive” key is automatically lit.
If the Default Transfer is set to Manual, only items that are manually selected are transferred to
Gemnet.

– The Auto transfer path default value can only be used when the Network Option is set to Gemnet
and the Exabyte is selected. Any new exam will automatically be initialized in order to send its
newly acquired sequences automatically either to Network, to tape or to both according the
selected option. These destinations can be partially changed for one exam in the Exam Information
Screen.
Note: In some critical protocols, it may exist a need to retrieve the archived images on the control room or on
the exam room monitor.
The only way to retrieve images is from Exabyte. In case of Auto–Archive, select on the Exam Browser
one of the key : Tape or Both.

– The Fixed/User can modify auto transfer node allows or prohibits the user from changing the
automatic destination node. Typically, for DCR 500 or DCR 2000, this should be set to prohibit
the user from changing the destination.
– The Patient Worklist Management can only be used when the Network Option is set to Ethernet
or Gemnet.
For this option, the presence of an Ethernet board is necessary in the DLX Sun.

3-17
GE Medical Systems ADVANTX DLX INSTALLATION
REV 0 sm 2198944-100

DLX INSTAL SOFTWARE CONFIGURATION


Job Card CNF 1 A 14 of 18

This option allows the user to update the DLX patient database from an outside His/Ris system.
This feature eliminates the need for manual data entry from the DLX console. Data transfer
between the DLX and the His/Ris system uses DICOM V3.0 standards.
The following is an operational description of a Worklist request:
In the patient Browser, the operator presses the Worklist key. The arrow cursor changes to a clock
(busy) cursor, and the message Patients Worklist request in progress.... is displayed. After the DLX
has retrieved the Worklist data from the Worklist server, the Browser patient list is updated and a
message indicating successful processing of the Worklist data is displayed, Patient Worklist
transfer succeeded.
Along with this final message, detailed statistics are given about the total number of items
requested, the successfully added items, the number of duplicate (dismissed) items, and the number
of items that failed to be created.
Note: 1– The Worklist key is accessible only when DLX is offline with
respect to Advantx; i.e., not in Exam Ready Mode.
2– The Worklist key is dimmed if a background Ethernet Transfer is
in progress.
3– While Worklist data processing is taking place, no Acquisition or
DICOM Ethernet transfer can be started.
a. The Worklist key is accessible only when DLX is offline with respect to Advantx; i.e., not in
Exam Ready Mode.
b. The Worklist key is dimmed if a background Ethernet Transfer is in progress.
c. While Worklist data processing is taking place, no Acquisition or DICOM Ethernet transfer
can be started.
When the system detects an error during Worklist processing, the message Invalid data received is
displayed, and the busy cursor reverts to the arrow cursor.
Possible causes of error are:
. Consistency of patient name, data length, or forbidden characters,
. Network problems,
. Destination system or destination software down,
. File access failures (on either DLX or DICOM remote server side).

Parameter 6: COMPAS Option (Computerized Optimum Method for Profile Angle of Sight)

– This function lets you improve the visibility of vascular structures, in intervention procedures, and
the accuracy of quantification in diagnostics. The COMPAS function is available at any time,
except when the selected Viewer does not correspond to the Exam in progress.
The Compas function helps the user position the gantry at calculated angles for L and a horizontal
pivoting. This allows the C–arm to rotate around the axis of the vessel of interest. This function
is especially useful during an examination, but can also be used with a Demo exam.

3-18
GE Medical Systems ADVANTX DLX INSTALLATION
REV 0 sm 2198944-100

DLX INSTAL SOFTWARE CONFIGURATION


Job Card CNF 1 A 15 of 18

Parameter 7: Send to Positioner

– This function can be selected on systems connected with a CARMEN room. With this option
selected, the user can use the “Send to Positioner” key, after angle computation, to send angles to
the positioner module. The user can move the L and P arms to calculated angles using two buttons.
Parameter 8: Draw Epipolars

– This function, if selected, helps the operator when drawing lines on XDG. It shows where the
operator should position graphic elements.
Parameter 9: 3D POS

– This is linked with the presence of the 3D option.


– This function can be selected on systems connected with a biplane room. With this option selected,
the user can use the “Send to Positioner” key to send angles to the positioner module, if angles
computed on the 3D workstation have been sent to the DLX before.
Parameter 10: System is an Archive

– This is used only for systems with a gateway.


– This parameter should be set to Archive if it is anticipated that one or more of the hosts on the site’s
Ethernet network is an Archive host. If the system is set to Archive, you will be able to identify
certain hosts as Archive Hosts in the DLX Select Host menu. Otherwise, if system is set to NOT
ARCHIVE, no Ethernet host can be set to Archive.
– Enter 10 and press <Return>.
– Select YES or NO to specify ARCHIVE or NOT ARCHIVE.
– Check that the option appears in option 10.
Note: Type 99 <cr> to return to the Main Menu from any other menu.
5.9 Command 6: XDG SPATIAL FILTERS CONFIGURATION

1: XDG Vascular Acquisition Filters


2: XDG Cardiac Acquisition Filters
3: XDG Fluoro filters
4: XDG DA Stepping Acquisition Filters
5: XDG DSA Stepping Acquisition Filters
99: Exit Filter Menu
Enter Command Number:

Select the RT filter according to the ACQ mode.

– Four filter groups are available to cover all of the acquisition modes. Each filter group can have
a LOW, MEDIUM, or HIGH strength.

3-19
GE Medical Systems ADVANTX DLX INSTALLATION
REV 0 sm 2198944-100

DLX INSTAL SOFTWARE CONFIGURATION


Job Card CNF 1 A 16 of 18

DLXINSTAL defines a logical value in a range of 1 thru 5 for each filter group and for each force strength
(Low/Medium/High). A value of 1 corresponds to the minimum strength, and a value of 5 to the maximum.

The filter fields must be initialized at the following values:

– Low = 1, Medium = 3 and High = 5.


However, these values may be modified if the default values are not adapted for the site.

5.10 Command 7: Iris Aperture Curve Input

Define the Iris aperture according to brightness. This function should not be used to calibrate the iris
aperture curve as this calibration is done using the Technical Menu.

The default values are as follows:

5.11 Command 8: DA MODE LUT’S PARAMETERS

– At the command number prompt, enter the command number:


Enter Command Number: 8 <Return>
the following messages is displayed.

*****************************************************************************************
*****DA MODE LUTS PARAMETERS NO LONGER USED *****
*****************************************************************************************

3-20
GE Medical Systems ADVANTX DLX INSTALLATION
REV 0 sm 2198944-100

DLX INSTAL SOFTWARE CONFIGURATION


Job Card CNF 1 A 17 of 18

5.12 B/C Curves for Acquisition

The B/C curves allow the user to define specific brightness/contrast curves for subtraction operations. Two
curves can be defined in DLXINSTAL: subtract acquisition, roadmap fluoro. Acquisition uses these values
to set the window while performing these functions. Now, in DLXINSTALL acquisition subtract curves,
the brightness and contrast correspond to application parameters.

The shape of the curve is:

255 / / OUTPUT / VALUE / / / 0 INPUT 511 VALUE

To define the brightness/contrast curve enter the following 3 parameters:

1. The first parameter defines the type of the curve.


This value should always be 1.
2. The second parameter defines the brightness value: its range is 0..511. Its adjustment corresponds to an
horizontal translation of the curve.
0< Brighter 256 Darker >511
medium position
centered on level
128
Normally this value is 256.
3. The third parameter defines the contrast value: its range is 0...511. Its adjustment corresponds to a
rotation of the slope around its middle.
0< slope <0 256 slope >0 >511
reverse video area normal video area
slope = 0 –90 .......–45 .........0 ...........45 ..........90
For a neutral curve use the following values:
Curve: 1
Brightness: 256
Contrast: 384

5.13 EXIT FROM THE DLXINSTAL MENU

D Click on the Exit icon in the lower right corner of the flat panel screen. The Shutdown

window appears.
D Click on EXIT.

3-21
GE Medical Systems ADVANTX DLX INSTALLATION
REV 0 sm 2198944-100

DLX INSTAL SOFTWARE CONFIGURATION


Job Card CNF 1 A 18 of 18

Blank page

3-22
GE Medical Systems ADVANTX DLX INSTALLATION
REV 0 sm 2198944-100

ADVANTX DLX INSTALLATION Job Card CNF 2 A 1 of 10

Purpose: DLX SYSTEM SERVICE UTILITIES Version No.: 1


Date11–97

Time: 20 min Personnel: 1

SECTION 1
INTRODUCTION

The system service procedures described in this Job Card are:

D 3.1 Update the DLX Time and Date


D 3.2 Select the System Language
D 3.3 Modify the Screen Saver Time
D 3.4 UNIX Internet Address
D 3.5 CPU-167 Internet Address
D 3.6 Password Modification

SECTION 2
PREREQUISITES

To perform any of the set-up procedures, you will need to access the Settings Menu. To do this:

D Login as service and enter the service password.


dlxlogin: service <Return>
password: <Return> {Enter the GEMS proprietary service password.
It will not be displayed on the screen.}
D Once the DLX has finished with the system initialization, position the cursor near the bottom of the
screen and press the left mouse button. The DLX Main Menu appears.
D Drag with the mouse button pressed and select DLX Others.
D Continue to drag the mouse, and select Settings.

DLX Main Menu


DLX Application
DLX Others DLX Others Menu
Refresh Screen Image Disk
Abort Application Service
Utilities
Settings

3-23
GE Medical Systems ADVANTX DLX INSTALLATION
REV 0 sm 2198944-100

DLX SYSTEM SERVICE UTILITIES


Job Card CNF 2 A 2 of 10

SECTION 3
TASK DESCRIPTION

3.1 Update the DLX Time and Date

1. In the Settings Menu drag with the mouse and select SYSTEM DATE.
2. A Main Menu window appears. Enter the number that corresponds with the desired function, and press
<Return>.

Note: If you need more information on the function, select 4 and press <Return> for help.

TIME/DATE HELP SCREEN

3-24
GE Medical Systems ADVANTX DLX INSTALLATION
REV 0 sm 2198944-100

DLX SYSTEM SERVICE UTILITIES


Job Card CNF 2 A 3 of 10

3. Answer y to the following question to continue the time/date update.


Would you like to continue? (Y / N ): y <Return>

4. Enter the time and date in this format:


Enter last two digits of year: 95 <Return>
Enter month (two digits): 04 <Return>
Enter day of month (two digits): 20 <Return>
Enter hours (two digits): 12 <Return>
Enter minutes (two digits): 29 <Return>

Enter 2 digits for each line, and press <Return> after each to continue.

Note: The DLX system time is set in military time, using 24 hours (i.e. 5:00 p.m. = 17:00).

5. A confirmation message similar to this one appears:


Date (mm/dd/yy): 04/20/95

Time (mm/hh): 29:12

If you have not entered 2 digits for each line, the system will prompt you to enter the information again. If
any of the fields were not filled in, the following message appears:
Date not correctly entered. Sorry, no changes done. Please, try again. Hit the <Enter> key to
continue.

6. Check that the information is correct.


7. Confirm that the information is correct by pressing <Return>; the Sun workstation automatically
reboots.
***The Sun Workstation will reboot in a few seconds***

3-25
GE Medical Systems ADVANTX DLX INSTALLATION
REV 0 sm 2198944-100

DLX SYSTEM SERVICE UTILITIES


Job Card CNF 2 A 4 of 10

3.2 Select the System Language

1. In the Settings Menu, drag with the mouse and select SET LANGUAGE.
2. Continue to drag with the mouse and release on the desired language. The following confirmation
window appears.

3. Click on Continue to change the language.


– Click on CANCEL to quit the function without changing the language (no changes are made).
– Click on HELP for more information.

3-26
GE Medical Systems ADVANTX DLX INSTALLATION
REV 0 sm 2198944-100

DLX SYSTEM SERVICE UTILITIES


Job Card CNF 2 A 5 of 10

3.3 Modify the Screen Saver Time

This is to turn off the display when the mouse and keyboard are idle for an extended period that is specified
by using the following tool.

1. In the Settings Menu, drag with the mouse and select SET SCREEN SAVER TIME.
2. Change the Screen Saver waiting period as described below. Valid times range from 1 to 180 minutes.
– Use the mouse to position the cursor on the slide bar.
– Press with the left mouse button and drag, with the mouse, to adjust the screen saver time on the
slide bar. The corresponding time appears in the MINUTES box.

3. Click on APPLY to validate the time period.


– Click on CANCEL to quit without changing the screen saver time.
Note: The original default value on the DLX system is 10 minutes.

3-27
GE Medical Systems ADVANTX DLX INSTALLATION
REV 0 sm 2198944-100

DLX SYSTEM SERVICE UTILITIES


Job Card CNF 2 A 6 of 10

3.4 Set the UNIX Internet Address

To change or update the IP address for the DLX, VDP or another host you will need to login as service.

1. In the Settings Menu, drag with the mouse and select Set IP Addresses.

2. Click on See Hosts to view existing Internet Addresses and hostnames. Click on Close to close the
See Hosts window.

3. Click on Exit to quit the Internet Setting tool when you have finished.

3-28
GE Medical Systems ADVANTX DLX INSTALLATION
REV 0 sm 2198944-100

DLX SYSTEM SERVICE UTILITIES


Job Card CNF 2 A 7 of 10

3.4.1 Add an Internet Number and Hostname other than DLX, VDP or Frontal

D Position the cursor in the IP# field, and enter the IP number.
D Position the cursor in the Name field, and enter the hostname.
D Click on Add to add this Internet address and hostname to the Host list. A message box appears telling
you that the Add procedure was successful. Click on OK to close this box.

IF YOU MUST ENTER DLX INTERNET ADDRESS, USE HOST


WARNING NAME “dlx”, NOT “dlx loghost”.

3.4.2 Delete an IP Address

D Position the cursor in the IP# field, and enter the IP number.
D And/or, Position the cursor in the Name field, and enter the hostname.
D Click on Remove to delete this Internet address and hostname to the Host list. A message box appears
telling you that the remove procedure was successful. Click on OK to close this box.

3.4.3 DLX and VDP IP Addresses

D To enter the DLX IP address, follow the instructions in Section 3.4.1. Enter the DLX IP address and,
in the Name field, type dlx (in lower case letters).
D To enter the VDP IP address, follow the instructions in Section 3.4.1. Enter the VDP IP address and,
in the Name field, type vdp (in lower case letters).
3.4.4 Frontal IP Addresses

As the frontal IP is used as router to reach Insite workstations, when you modify or enter for the first
time the frontal IP address, it will automatically set the Insite route table.
D To enter the frontal IP address, follow instructions in section 3.4.1.
D Enter the frontal IP address, in the name field type frontal (in lower case letters).
D After clicking on Add a message box appears telling you that the Add procedure and update of route
paths for Insite Ethernet were successful.
Note: To add or remove a route path from Insite, please refer to Job Card IST 1IInsite .

Note: Click on HELP for more information. See the HELP screen below.

D Click on Exit when you have finished entering the DLX and/or VDP IP address.

3-29
GE Medical Systems ADVANTX DLX INSTALLATION
REV 0 sm 2198944-100

DLX SYSTEM SERVICE UTILITIES


Job Card CNF 2 A 8 of 10

3.5 Set the CPU-167 Internet Address

If you have changed the host for the DLX and/or the VDP you will need to update the CPU-167 Internet
address. CPU–167 needs to know the internet address of dlx and vdp. The following tool allows you to set
these addresses in the CPU–167. See Job Card CNF 22 A, for other instances when you may need this
procedure.

1. If you are not logged in as service, login as service before continuing.


2. In the Settings Menu, drag with the mouse and select TFTPBOOT Variables.
3. The 167–NVRAM TFTPBOOT window appears. If you are ready to proceed with the procedure,
click on Continue.

167–NVRAM TFTPBOOT setting

4. On the DLX cabinet, remove the VDP front panel and press the reset button (red) on the MVME 167
(DLX1A1A1). Wait 5 seconds until red LED on the VME Board goes off.
5. In the DLX cabinet VDP, press the abort button (black button) to perform a SW abort, on the MVME
167 (DLX1A1A1).

Note: If you need more information on the procedure, click on Help.

3-30
GE Medical Systems ADVANTX DLX INSTALLATION
REV 0 sm 2198944-100

DLX SYSTEM SERVICE UTILITIES


Job Card CNF 2 A 9 of 10

6. Position the cursor in the xterm window, and press <Return> to get the 167–Bug > prompt.
Type ~> ( do not press these keys simultaneously – type the ~ then the > )
Note that ~> are not echoed on the screen.
CPU–167 needs to know the internet address of dlx and vdp. The following tool allows you to set these
addresses in the CPU–167.
7. After the message Local File Name appears, type niot and press <Return>.
8. At the Update NVRAM question, answer y and press <Return>.

MVME–167

167–Bug> {the command characters ~ > are not displayed on the screen}
167–Bug> Local File Name niot <Return>

Update Non–Volatile RAM [Y/N]? y <Return>

9. Perform a reset on the MVME 167 (DLX1A1A1) red button.

10. With the cursor positioned in the window, type ~. to exit the CPU–167 tool ( do not press these keys
simultaneously – type the ~ then the . ).

Note: To quit the MVME–167 window at any time type ~. to exit. (You do not have to be at the 167–Bug>
prompt.)

3-31
GE Medical Systems ADVANTX DLX INSTALLATION
REV 0 sm 2198944-100

DLX SYSTEM SERVICE UTILITIES


Job Card CNF 2 A 10 of 10

3.6 Password Management

You can use the password management to create a DLX password, change the password, or disactivate the
password. Select Password Management in the Settings Menu. The Password Management screen
appears.

PASSWORD MANAGEMENT

Desactivate Change Help Exit

3.6.1 Add a Password for the First Time

D Click on the Change button. In the window that appears, you will be prompted for the password.
Enter the DLX password (the password will not appear on the screen), and press<Return>.
Changing password for DLX on DLX.
New password:
D You will be prompted to re-enter the password; do so, and press <Return>.
Changing password for DLX on DLX.
New password: {The password does not appear on the screen.}
Retype new password: {The Password Management window automatically closes.}
3.6.2 Change the Existing Password

D Click on the Change button. In the window that appears, you will be prompted for the old password.
Enter the DLX password (the password will not appear on the screen), and press<Return>.
Changing password for DLX on DLX.
Old password:
New password: {The password does not appear on the screen.}
D You are then asked to enter the new password; do so, and press <Return>. Repeat when prompted.
Changing password for DLX on DLX.
Old password:
New password: {The password does not appear on the screen.}
Retype new password: {The Password Management window automatically closes.}
Note: If you enter the incorrect old password, the Password Management window automatically
closes.

3.6.3 Disactivate the Password Option

D Click on the Disactivate button. The Password Management window is automatically closed, and no
longer password will be required when logging as dlx.
To enter a password, redo section 3.6.1

3-32
GE Medical Systems ADVANTX DLX INSTALLATION
REV 0 sm 2198944-100

ADVANTX DLX INSTALLATION Job Card CNF 22 A 1 of 10

Purpose: SOFTWARE CONFIGURATION Version No.: 1


Date: 10–96

Time: 20 min Personnel: 1

SECTION 1
SUPPLIES

D Not applicable.

SECTION 2
TOOLS

D Not applicable.

SECTION 3
SAFETY PRECAUTIONS

D Not applicable.

SECTION 4
PREREQUISITES

D Not applicable.

SECTION 5
TASK DESCRIPTION

D The following pages give the factory set software configuration for VME167 CPU board.
D You will, during this Job Card, need to do a Reset (red button) and/or SWAbort (the black button) on
the MVME–167 Board. For VDP disassembly information refer to the Job Card D/R020 in the chapter
Disassembly/Reassembly.

3-33
GE Medical Systems ADVANTX DLX INSTALLATION
REV 0 sm 2198944-100

SOFTWARE CONFIGURATION
Job Card CNF 22 A 2 of 10

5.1 Access the Settings Menu

For all of the procedures in this job card, you will need to access the Settings Menu.

D Login as service and enter the service password.


dlxlogin: service <Return>
password: <Return> {Enter the GEMS proprietary service password; it is not displayed.}
D When the system initialization has finished, press the left mouse button. The DLX Main Menu
appears on the flat panel display.
D Drag with the mouse button pressed and select DLX Others. Continue to drag and select Settings.

DLX Main Menu


DLX Application
DLX Others DLX Others Menu
Refresh Screen Image Disk
Abort Application Service
Utilities
Settings Settings Menu
167–NVRAM
Tftpboot Variables
Ethernet
Worklist
ATM
Remote AE–Title Table
Screen Saver Time
System Date
Language
password

3-34
GE Medical Systems ADVANTX DLX INSTALLATION
REV 0 sm 2198944-100

SOFTWARE CONFIGURATION
Job Card CNF 22 A 3 of 10

5.2 Update the CPU-RT Non-Volatile RAM (NVRAM)

5.2.1 Set–up NVRAM Environment Variables

D Click on 167 – NVRAM in the Settings Menu.


D The 167–NVRAM Setting window appears. Click on Continue.

Note: If you need more information on the procedure, click on Help.

D On the DLX cabinet, access the VDP and press the red reset button on the MVME–167 board
(DLX1A1A1). See section 2–2 in the Software Introduction, for more information on performing a
reset.
D Press the black abort button on the MVME–167 board (DLX1A1A1) in the VDP to perform a SW
abort.

3-35
GE Medical Systems ADVANTX DLX INSTALLATION
REV 0 sm 2198944-100

SOFTWARE CONFIGURATION
Job Card CNF 22 A 4 of 10

D Press <Return> to get the 167–Bug> prompt to appear on the screen.


D Position the cursor in the MVME–167 window, and type ~> ( do not press these keys simultaneously
– type the ~ then the > ). Note that ~> are not echoed on the screen.

MVME–167

connected

167–Bug> {the command characters ~ > are not displayed on the screen}

D After the message Local File Name appears, type nvram and press <Return>The tool automatically
sends the necessary data by serial line ttya to the CPU–167. When the transfer is complete, respond
to the NVRAM questions as indicated below.

MVME–167

connected

167–Bug> Local File Name nvram <Return>


Update Non–Volatile RAM (Y/N)? y {Enter y if any change was made.}

Reset Local System (CPU) (Y/N)? n {If any change was made, enter n.}
167–Bug>

D Perform a reset (press the red reset button in VDP MVME–167 Board (DLX1A1A1).
D With the cursor positioned in the window, type ~. to exit the CPU–167 tool ( do not press these keys
simultaneously – type the ~ then the . ).

Note: To quit the MVME–167 window at any time type ~. to exit. (You do not have to be at the 167–Bug>
prompt.)

3-36
GE Medical Systems ADVANTX DLX INSTALLATION
REV 0 sm 2198944-100

SOFTWARE CONFIGURATION
Job Card CNF 22 A 5 of 10

5.2.2 Set–up TFTPBOOT Variables

You will need to use this function when you change the MVME 167 or when you change the DLX and VDP
IP addresses on UNIX. The Sun directory /tftpboot is the directory that the CPU–RT board uses to fetch a
file (IMAGE MEMORY). It downloads by itself when it is configured in auto network boot; this
parameter is set in the procedure env.

D Use the same procedure as that given in Job Card CNF 2 Section 3.5 “Set the CPU-167 Internet
Address” to set-up the TFTPBOOT Variables.

3-37
GE Medical Systems ADVANTX DLX INSTALLATION
REV 0 sm 2198944-100

SOFTWARE CONFIGURATION
Job Card CNF 22 A 6 of 10

5.3 Configuration Verification

Follow the instructions in steps 5.3.1 and 5.3.2 to check the software configuration.
If you are unsuccessful:
– boot the workstation,
– login as service,
– open a MVME–167 window, and
– repeat procedures 5.3.1 and 5.3.2.
5.3.1 Check that the MVME–167 is recognized by the workstation in Network Auto–Boot Mode

Verify that the MVME–167 is recognized by the workstation UNIX in the Network Auto–Boot
Mode as follows.
D Open a MVME–167 window.
D Perform a reset/abort on the MVME–167 (DLX1A1A1) to access the 167–Bug> prompt.
D Position the cursor in the MVME–167 window and type:
167–Bug> reset <Return>

D Answer C to the first question. Answer Y to the questions that follow.

Y
Y
Y

This procedure resets the MVME–167 board. It is now set–up in the Network Auto–Boot Enable Mode.

Check in the MVME–167 window that the CPU–RT is downloading ”dlx” software. This software is
downloaded through the Ethernet link from the directory /tftpboot on the Sun workstation.

5.3.2 Check that the MVME–167 is recognized by the workstation

Verify that the MVME–167 is recognized by the workstation UNIX as follows.


D Select XTERM in the DLX Utilities menu to open an XTERM window.
D Position the cursor in the XTERM window and type:
dlx{dlx}xx: ping vdp <Return>
vdp is alive
D The system should answer: vdp is alive.

3-38
GE Medical Systems ADVANTX DLX INSTALLATION
REV 0 sm 2198944-100

SOFTWARE CONFIGURATION
Job Card CNF 22 A 7 of 10

5.4 Ethernet Address Information

The MVME–167 Ethernet address is done automatically declared on the UNIX workstation by the
system each time you start the DLX Application, DLXINSTAL, or DLXTEST.

If you need to find the Ethernet Address:

D Press the left mouse button. The DLX Main Menu appears on the flat panel display.
D Drag with the mouse button pressed and select DLX Others. Continue to drag and select Utilities,
then MVME–167 console.
D Perform a reset & abort on the MVME–167 board (DLX1A1A1) (see the CNF Introduction for more
information).
D Position the cursor in the MVME–167 window; at the 167–Bug prompt type cnfg;m.

MVME–167

connected

167–Bug> cnfg;m <Return>


Board (PWA) Serial Number = ”xxxxxxx”?<Return>
Board Identifier = ”mvme167–02a”? <Return>
Artwork (PWA) Identifier = ”xx–xxxxxxxxx”? <Return>
MPU Clock Speed = ”2500”? <Return>
Ethernet Address = 0800xxxxxx ? <Return>
Local SCSI Identifier = ”07”? <Return>
Optional Board 1 Artwork (PWA) Identifier = ”xxxxxxxx”? <Return>
Optional Board 1 (PWA) Serial Number = ”xxxxxxxx”? <Return>
Optional Board 2 Artwork (PWA) Identifier = ”0”? <Return>
Optional Board 2 (PWA) Serial Number = ”0”? <Return>
167–Bug>

D Note the Ethernet address using the convention: 08:00:xx:xx:xx:xx (you will need to add a colon
“:” between every two characters, as colons are not displayed in the on-screen address).
D Click on the exit icon to quit the service account.
D To restart the application, select DLX Application in the DLX Main Menu.

3-39
GE Medical Systems ADVANTX DLX INSTALLATION
REV 0 sm 2198944-100

SOFTWARE CONFIGURATION
Job Card CNF 22 A 8 of 10

5.5 Ethernet Card IP Address

If you have added an Ethernet card to the Sun station, or changed the Ethernet card, you will need to enter
the Ethernet card address.

1. Click on Ethernet Card in the Settings Menu.

DLX Main Menu


DLX Application
DLX Others DLX Others Menu
Refresh Screen Image Disk
Abort Application Service
Utilities
Settings Language
Settings Menu
password
167–NVRAM
Tftpboot Variables IP address
Ethernet Ethernet Card
Worklist Routers
ATM Netmask
AE–Title Table
Screen Saver Time
System Date
Language
password

3-40
GE Medical Systems ADVANTX DLX INSTALLATION
REV 0 sm 2198944-100

SOFTWARE CONFIGURATION
Job Card CNF 22 A 9 of 10

2. Position the cursor in IP # window and type the Ethernet board IP address.

3. Position the cursor in Name window and type the name of the system seen by the network.
Note: If you need more information on entering the Ethernet card address, click on Help in the Ethernet
Card window. The Help Text window appears. Click on OK when you are ready to continue.

4. Use Job Card CNF 2A Sectoin 3.4 to enter all IP adresses and hostnames needed.

3-41
GE Medical Systems ADVANTX DLX INSTALLATION
REV 0 sm 2198944-100

SOFTWARE CONFIGURATION
Job Card CNF 22 A 10 of 10

Blank page

3-42
GE Medical Systems ADVANTX DLX INSTALLATION
REV 0 sm 2198944-100

CHAPTER 4 – SOFTWARE

SECTION 1
DLX SOFTWARE INTRODUCTION

This chapter provides instructions for carrying out the following procedures:

D DLX Software Regeneration from Floppy Disks


D Sun Disk Drive Configuration (disk software swap and DLXTEST procedure)
D DLX Image Hard Disk Drive Update (for a disk replacement or addition)
D Workstation Set-up for Software Load from CD ROM
D Complete Software Load, Operating System and DLX application, from CD ROM
D DLX Application (only) Software Load from CD ROM
D Formatting the Sun Hard Disk Drive
D Regenerate VCR Patient Information

4–1
GE Medical Systems ADVANTX DLX INSTALLATION
REV 0 sm 2198944-100

ILLUSTRATION 4–1
SOFTWARE PROCEDURE FLOWCHART

PROCEDURE JOB CARD

SOFTWARE RELOAD
BY FLOPPY DISK PERFORM JOB CARD LG001

SUN REPLACEMENT
DISK CONFIGURATION PERFORM JOB CARD LG002

IMAGE DISK UPDATE PERFORM JOB CARD LG003

COMPLETE SOFTWARE
LOAD BY CDROM PERFORM JOB CARD LG004

PERFORM JOB CARD LG005

PROBLEM

FORMAT DAMAGED
SUN DISK (FOR
SUN O.S. ONLY)

PERFORM JOB CARD LG008

RELOAD APPLICATION PERFORM JOB CARD LG006


BY CDROM

REGENERATE VCR PATIENT


INFORMATION AFTER PERFORM JOB CARD LG009
CLEAR DATABASE

AFTER ANY OF THE ABOVE PROCEDURES PERFORM FUNCTIONAL CHECKS

4–2
GE Medical Systems ADVANTX DLX INSTALLATION
REV 0 sm 2198944-100

SECTION 2
COMMON PROCEDURES

2.1 Accessing the DLX Main Menu

For many of the software procedures described in this chapter, you will need to use the DLX Others Menu. To
do this:

1. Log in as service.

2. At the password prompt enter the service password, and press <Return>.

3. When the system initialization has finished, position the cursor near the bottom of the screen and press the
left mouse button. The DLX Main Menu appears.

4. With the mouse button still pressed, select the DLX Others Menu.

2.2 Accessing the Service Menu

Still pressing the mouse button, drag to the Utilities Menu. Select a function and release the mouse button.

The Service Menu

4–3
GE Medical Systems ADVANTX DLX INSTALLATION
REV 0 sm 2198944-100

2.3 Accessing the Utilities Menus

From the DLX Others Menu, drag to the Utilities Menu. Select a function and release the mouse button.

The Utilities Menu

DLX Main Menu


DLX Application
DLX Others DLX Others Menu
Refresh Screen Image Disk Utilities Menu
Abort Application Service xterm
Utilities MVME–167 console
Settings Save Logfiles
Save Configuration
Restore Configuration
Diagnostics
Setup burnin test
Cancel burnin test
Display pattern (flat panel)
DLX–VDP Ethernet Test

2.4 Quitting a Function

1. Click on the Exit icon in the lower right corner of the flat panel screen. The Shutdown window

appears. Click on EXIT. Or,

2. Start the DLX application by clicking on DLX Application in the DLX Main Menu.

4–4
GE Medical Systems ADVANTX DLX INSTALLATION
REV 0 sm 2198944-100

ADVANTX DLX INSTALLATION Job Card LG001 1 of 4

Subassembly (FRU): DLX SYSTEMS

Purpose: DLX SOFTWARE REGENERATION Version No.: 2


(FOR SUN O.S.) Date: 04–97

Time: 15 min Personnel: 1

SECTION 1
PROCEDURE

Note: If you have a release less than C11.26 and you want to download C11.26 or C14.XX, please use the
CDROM C11.26 or C14.XX and refer to the Job Card LG005. This is to grab the latest release of
drivers for the SCSI server CENTRAL DATA when UPS option is installed on a DLX–AdvantX
system. These new drivers are not on the floppies.
If you have already downloaded C11.26 or C14.XX with a CDROM, you can reload the software with
floppies.

CAUTION Image database will not be lost during this procedure.

Note: Before starting this procedure, save the DLX configuration if not already done (use Utilities menu)

DLX Main Menu


DLX Application Utilities Menu
DLX Others DLX Others Menu xterm
Refresh Screen Image Disk MVME–167 console
Abort Application Service Save Logfiles
Utilities Save Configuration
Settings Restore Configuration
Diagnostics
Setup burnin test
Cancel burnin test
Display pattern (flat panel)
DLX–VDP Ethernet Test

4–5
GE Medical Systems ADVANTX DLX INSTALLATION
REV 0 sm 2198944-100

DLX SOFTWARE REGENERATION


(FOR SUN O.S.) Job Card LG001 2 of 4

1.1 Extracting a Compressed File from Floppy Diskettes

Note: When entering UNIX commands be sure enter spaces as shown in the sample text.
D Login on the machine as root.
login: root <cr>
password: <cr> {Enter the GEMS proprietary password. It is not displayed on screen.}
D Insert the floppy disk number 1
D Type the following three commands to start the installation from floppy disks:
# cd /home_local <cr>
# tar xvf /dev/rfd0 flopinst <cr>
# flopinst C1xxx <cr> (the C in upper case)

Note: xxx signifies the sofware release sent with your system.
For example: C13.32 release will be C1332

Note: If the message: Installation from floppies aborted is displayed, perform a complete software
reload using Job Cards LG004 and LG005.

D The system will ask you to insert the floppy ; start with floppy disk number 1 and press return to
continue.
Note: Be careful not to insert the same diskette twice. Doing so could cause serious system problems,
which may be difficult to diagnose at a later date.

D Follow the instructions until you have inserted the last floppy disk. (The number of diskettes may vary
depending upon the version.) You will see a message similar to the sample screen shown below.

total 8495
–rw–r––r–– 1 dlxarchv 8669921 Aug 25 13:44
C1xxx.tar.Z
–rwxr–xr–– 1 dlxarchv 3256 Jun 30 16:20 dlxtar
dlx#

1.2 Extracting Application Files from a Compressed File

D Type y and press <Return> when asked if you would like to try to extract files.

Try to extract files OK ([y]/n): y <cr>

4–6
GE Medical Systems ADVANTX DLX INSTALLATION
REV 0 sm 2198944-100

DLX SOFTWARE REGENERATION


(FOR SUN O.S.) Job Card LG001 3 of 4

D You will see a screen similar to the sample session shown below.

Saving system configuration ...


Deleting old version ...
Uncompress tar–file: C1xxx.tar.Z
C1xxx.tar.Z: –– replaced with C1xxx.tar
–rw–r––r–– 1 root 24092672 May 14 16:34 C1xxx.tar
Extracting files from tar–file ...
x /home_local/dlx/.cshrc, 1993 bytes, 4 tape blocks
...
x /home_local/dlx/stop_application, 571 bytes, 2 tape blocks
x /tftpboot/dlxinstal, 2424832 bytes, 4736 tape blocks
x /tftpboot/dlxtest, 3145728 bytes, 6144 tape blocks
x /tftpboot/dlx, 3145728 bytes, 6144 tape blocks
Restoring system configuration.
Database selected.
(con’t.)...
Table altered.
DLX Installation complete.

D Power OFF/ON the DLX1 A72 bulkhead power.


D Log back in on the system.
D Restore the configuration.
D If the DLX is equipped with Smart UPS 450 VA (part number 2195622),
IMPORTANT
install the UPS Software Upgrade.

Use Floppy Disk 2199684 delivered with the UPS.


Before starting software installation, new UPS hardware must be installed.

1. Exit DLX application and wait for the UNIX login prompt.
2. Log in as root on the DLX:
dlx login: root [Return] (Enter the GEMS proprietary password.
It is not displayed on the screen)
3. Insert the floppy disk in the floppy drive of DLX’s workstation.
4. Type in the following commands to create the directory /tmp/ups:
dlx# cd tmp [Return]
dlx# mkdir ups [Return]
dlx# cd ups [Return]

4–7
GE Medical Systems ADVANTX DLX INSTALLATION
REV 0 sm 2198944-100

DLX SOFTWARE REGENERATION


(FOR SUN O.S.) Job Card LG001 4 of 4

5. Type in the following command to get files from the floppy disk
dlx# tar xvf /dev/rfd0 [Return]
dlx# eject floppy [Return]
6. Type in the following commands to uncompress files:
dlx# uncompress *.Z [Return]
dlx# tar xvf *.tar [Return]
7. Type in the following command to execute the installation script:
dlx# ./ups_flopinst [Return]
To check installation use DLX Jobcard IST 12 O “Check UPS Connection” paragraph.

Note: Regenerate the test patterns in DLXTEST before any tests are run, or the tests will fail.
Note: If you’re upgrading the DLX system with a release C14.XX or higher, check in DLXINSTAL that the
options AUTO ARCHIVE DESTINATION DEFAULT VALUE
and NETWORK IS an ARCHIVE or a TRANSFER DESTINATION
are properly set according to your system.
For this, enter Command 5: OTHER OPTIONS,
then select parameter 5: NETWORK CONFIGURATION MENU
and check the above fields.
For detailed description of this command, please refer to Engineer’s Guide paragraph 32.7.
Note: A new mechanism to configure routers and netmasks is introduced in the C13.31 DLX release and more.
In C11, as no tools were available to configure its, you may manually configured routers or netmasks
in /etc/rc.local or in /etc/rc.dlx or in other rc files.
Upgrading C11 to C13 automatically configures the routers with the new mechanism but not the
netmasks. If you manually configured netmasks, please refer to the Job Card IST16 O section 6.4
”Particular Case” and:
––> Click on the ”See” button to check whether your netmask is configured or not.
––> Otherwise, enter your netmask and click on ”Apply”.
(Ask the Network Hospital Administrator for the netmask value).

4–8
GE Medical Systems ADVANTX DLX INSTALLATION
REV 0 sm 2198944-100

ADVANTX DLX INSTALLATION Job Card LG001Solaris 1 of 4

Subassembly (FRU): DLX SYSTEMS

Purpose: DLX SOFTWARE REGENERATION Version No.: 0


(FOR SOLARIS) Date: 02–98

Time: 1 hour Personnel: 1

SECTION 1
PROCEDURE

CAUTION Image database will be lost during this procedure.

1.1 Extracting a Compressed File from Floppy Diskettes

Note: When entering UNIX commands be sure enter spaces as shown in the sample text.
D Login on the machine as root.
login : root <cr>
password: <cr> {Enter the GEMS proprietary password. It is not displayed on screen.}

D Stop the volume management daemon (vold).


# kill –9 ‘/usr/ucb/ps –ax | grep vold | grep –v grep | awk ’{print $1}’‘

D Insert the floppy disk number 1.


D Type the following three commands to start the installation from floppy disks:
# cd /home_local <cr>
# tar xvf /dev/rdiskette flopinst <cr>
# ./flopinst C1xxx <cr> (the C in upper case)

Note: If the message: Installation from floppies aborted is displayed, perform a complete software
reload using Job Cards LG004 and LG005.

D The system will ask you to insert the floppy ; start with floppy disk number 1 and press return to
continue.
Note: Be careful not to insert the same diskette twice. Doing so could cause serious system problems,
which may be difficult to diagnose at a later date.

4–9
GE Medical Systems ADVANTX DLX INSTALLATION
REV 0 sm 2198944-100

DLX SOFTWARE REGENERATION (FOR SOLARIS)


Job Card LG001Solaris 2 of 4

D Follow the instructions until you have inserted the last floppy disk. (The number of diskettes may vary
depending upon the version.) You will see a message similar to the sample screen shown below.

Please insert the floppy 1 and press Return when ready


x GEMSdlxC1608.tar.Z_01.part, 1445888 bytes, 2824 tape blocks
.
. (con’t.)
.
Please insert the floppy 20 and press Return when ready
x GEMSdlxC1608.tar.Z_20.part, 1151031 bytes, 2249 tape blocks
x package_install, 1675 bytes, 4 tape blocks

4–10
GE Medical Systems ADVANTX DLX INSTALLATION
REV 0 sm 2198944-100

DLX SOFTWARE REGENERATION (FOR SOLARIS)


Job Card LG001Solaris 3 of 4

1.2 Removing the previous DLX package and installing a new one

D Type y and press <Return> when asked if you would like to remove the package.
You will see a screen similar to the sample screen shown below.

The following package is currently installed :


GEMSdlx DLX Unix Software
(sparc) C16.07
Do you want to remove this package ? y <cr>

This package contains scripts which will be executed with super–user permission during
the process of removing this package.
Do you want to continue with the removal of this package [y,n,?,q] y <cr>
## Verifying package dependencies
.
. (con’t.)
.
Removal of <GEMSdlx> was successful.

Uncompress GEMSdlxC16.08.tar.Z ...

Restore Package File ...


.
. (con’t)
.
Install GEMSdlx Package ...
Processing package instance <GEMSdlx> from </home_local>
DLX Unix Software
(sparc) C16.08
Using </home_local> as package base directory
## Processing package information.
.
. (con’t)
.
Database selected
Installation of <GEMSdlx> was successful

Remove temporary files ...


Installation succeeded
Reboot now ...

4–11
GE Medical Systems ADVANTX DLX INSTALLATION
REV 0 sm 2198944-100

DLX SOFTWARE REGENERATION (FOR SOLARIS)


Job Card LG001Solaris 4 of 4

Note: Regenerate the test patterns in DLXTEST before any tests are run, or the tests will fail.
Note: If you are upgrading the DLX system with a release C14.XX or higher, check in DLXINSTAL that the
options AUTO ARCHIVE DESTINATION DEFAULT VALUE and NETWORK IS an ARCHIVE or
a TRANSFER DESTINATION are properly set according to your system. For this, enter Command 5:
OTHER OPTIONS, then select parameter 5: NETWORK CONFIGURATION MENU and check the
aboce fileds.

For detailed description of this command, please refer to Engineer’s Guide paragraph 32–7.

4–12
GE Medical Systems ADVANTX DLX INSTALLATION
REV 0 sm 2198944-100

ADVANTX DLX INSTALLATION Job Card LG002 1 of 4

Subassembly (FRU): DLX SYSTEMS

Purpose: DLX WORKSTATION HARD DISK Version No.: 1


REPLACEMENT Date: 04–97

Time: 20 min Personnel: 1

SECTION 1
SUPPLIES

D A saved configuration floppy diskette (from installation).

SECTION 2
TOOLS

D Not applicable.

SECTION 3
SAFETY PRECAUTIONS

D Not applicable.

SECTION 4
PREREQUISITES

D Disassemble the Sun hard disk drive (see Job Card D/R 56 A).
D When replacing a Sun hard disk, please check the hard disk’s DLX software release version. Reload
the DLX software if it is not the most recent version.

SECTION 5
PROCEDURE

CAUTION The image database will be lost during this procedure.

4–13
GE Medical Systems ADVANTX DLX INSTALLATION
REV 0 sm 2198944-100

DLX WORKSTATION HARD DISK REPLACEMENT


Job Card LG002 2 of 4

5.1 Sun Hard Disk Drive Replacement

1. Install the replacement hard disk drive (See DR56A Jobcard).


2. Reassemble the Sun station and remount it in the cabinet.
3. Power ON the station.
4. Log in as service, and enter the service password.
dlxlogin: service <Return>
password: <Return> {Enter the GEMS proprietary service password.}
5.2 Disk Software swap

1. Select Restore Configuration in the Utilities menu (Do not start the DLX Application).
2. A message appears asking “Do you want to restore configuration files?”. Click on YES.
3. A message appears asking you to insert the floppy diskette. Insert the “save configuration” floppy
diskette and follow the instructions. Click on OK when you are ready to continue.
4. When the restore configuration process is finished, the SUN WORKSTATION automatically reboots.
5. Turn off–on the VDP.
6. Return in Service Menu and go on to Section 5.3 DLXTEST procedures only if you must retrieve the
old patient images.

5.3 DLXTEST procedures for Disk Replacements

1. Select DLXTEST in the Service Menu.

4–14
GE Medical Systems ADVANTX DLX INSTALLATION
REV 0 sm 2198944-100

DLX WORKSTATION HARD DISK REPLACEMENT


Job Card LG002 3 of 4

2. The DLXTEST Main Menu appears. Enter the number that corresponds with the following selections,
and press <Return> after each.
– Select the UTILITIES MENU.
– Select CHECK-REPAIR-RECOVER DATABASE (approx. 30 minutes per disk).

Patients that you will recover will be named (xxx _R) with minimum
CAUTION information.

3. Select the UTILITIES MENU in DLXTEST again.


4. Enter the number that corresponds with the CHECK-REPAIR DATABASE function, and press
<Return> (takes approximately 10 minutes).

5. When the check and repair procedure is finished, click on the EXIT icon in the lower

right-hand corner of the flat panel screen. The Shutdown window appears.
6. Click on EXIT in the Shutdown window to quit the application.

5.4 Disk Software Swap

1. Select Restore Configuration in the Utilities Menu. (Do not start the DLX Application.)

DLX Main Menu


DLX Application Utilities Menu
DLX Others DLX Others Menu xterm
Refresh Screen Image Disk MVME–167 console
Abort Application Service Save Logfiles
Utilities Save Configuration
Settings Restore Configuration
Diagnostics
Setup burnin test
Cancel burnin test
Display pattern (flat panel)
DLX–VDP Ethernet Test

4–15
GE Medical Systems ADVANTX DLX INSTALLATION
REV 0 sm 2198944-100

DLX WORKSTATION HARD DISK REPLACEMENT


Job Card LG002 4 of 4

2. A message appears asking “Do you want to restore configuration files?”. Click on YES.
3. A message appears asking you to insert the floppy diskette. Insert the “save configuration” floppy
diskette and follow the instructions. Click on OK when you are ready to continue.
4. When the restore configuration process is finished, the Sun station automatically reboots.
5. Turn OFF–ON the VDP.
6. Return in Service Menu (see 5.1.4) and go on to Section 5.3 DLX TEST procedures only if you must
retrieve the old patient imageries.

4–16
GE Medical Systems ADVANTX DLX INSTALLATION
REV 0 sm 2198944-100

ADVANTX DLX INSTALLATION Job Card LG003 1 of 8

Subassembly (FRU): DLX SYSTEMS

Purpose: UPDATE FOR DLX IMAGE HARD DISK DRIVE Version No.: 1
MODIFICATION Date: 04–97

Time: 20 min Personnel: 1

Note: After changing a disk, followed by the Clear Data Base operation, return to Application mode before
using the operation Check and Repair. If you do not, an error message will be generated.
SECTION 1
SUPPLIES

D Not applicable.
SECTION 2
TOOLS

D Not applicable.
SECTION 3
SAFETY PRECAUTIONS

D When you use the Clear Database command, all disk information is lost. Perform the
“Regenerate VCR Patient Information” procedure in Job Card LG009 using the Clear
Database command.
SECTION 4
PREREQUISITES

D Follow the instructions in Job Card D/R 020 A to power off the DLX and open the VDP.
D Make the required VDP Image disk drive modifications (see Job Card D/R 71).
D Check, and modify if necessary, the Image disk jumper configuration (see Job Card LJS070A/071A).
SECTION 5
PROCEDURE

Choose a configuration procedure according to the disk modifications that have been made:

Section 5.1 Addition of a Image Disk Drive Images will not be lost
Section 5.2 Replacement of Disk 0 Images WILL BE LOST
Section 5.3 Replacement of Image Disk Drive other than Disk 0 Images WILL BE LOST
Section 5.4 Removal of Image Disk Drive 0 – Degraded Operation Images WILL BE LOST
Section 5.5 Removal of Image Disk drive other than Disk 0 – Images WILL BE LOST
Degraded Operation

4–17
GE Medical Systems ADVANTX DLX INSTALLATION
REV 0 sm 2198944-100

UPDATE FOR DLX IMAGE HARD DISK DRIVE


MODIFICATION Job Card LG003 2 of 8

5.1 Addition of a Image Disk Drive

If you have simply added another Image disk drive to the system, no configuration modification is
necessary. Restart the DLX, the system automatically takes the new disk into account.

5.2 Replacement of Disk 0

1. Power ON the workstation.


2. Log in as service, and enter the service password.
dlx login: service <Return>
password: .... <Return> Enter the GEMS proprietary service password. It is not displayed.
3. Near the bottom of the screen, press and hold the left mouse button to access the DLX Main Menu.
4. Drag with the mouse and select Image Disk, then Clear Data Base. Release the mouse button.

The following screen message appears. Click on HELP for more information.

5. Click on OK to clear the database.


6. When the clear database procedure is finished, log back in as service. Enter the service password.

4–18
GE Medical Systems ADVANTX DLX INSTALLATION
REV 0 sm 2198944-100

UPDATE FOR DLX IMAGE HARD DISK DRIVE


MODIFICATION Job Card LG003 3 of 8

7. Select DLXTEST in the Service Menu. For more information on the DLXTEST see chapter 11 the
“Engineer’s Guide”.

8. The DLXTEST Main Menu appears.


– Type the number that corresponds with the UTILITIES MENU, and press <Return>.
Note: Normally the disk is already formatted. If the disk is not formatted, select FORMAT IMAGE DISK,
enter 0 <Return> (where 0 indicates the disk position). This will take approximately 30 minutes per
disk.
– Type the number that corresponds to BUILD ADJUSTMENT PATTERNS, and press <Return>
(this takes approximately 15 minutes).
– Type the number that corresponds to REBUILD LOOK–UP TABLES, and press <Return>.

9. When the procedure is finished, click on the EXIT icon in the lower right-hand corner of the flat
panel screen. Click EXIT to quit the application.
10. Log back in on DLX.

4–19
GE Medical Systems ADVANTX DLX INSTALLATION
REV 0 sm 2198944-100

UPDATE FOR DLX IMAGE HARD DISK DRIVE


MODIFICATION Job Card LG003 4 of 8

5.3 Replacement of a Image Disk Drive Other than Disk 0

1. Power ON the workstation; log in as service, and enter the service password.
dlx login: service <Return>
password: ....<Return> Enter the GEMS proprietary service password. It is not displayed.
2. In the lower portion of the screen, press the left mouse button to access the DLX Main Menu.
3. Drag with the mouse and select Image Disk, then Clear Data Base. Release the mouse button.

The following screen appears. Click on HELP for more information.

4. Click on OK to clear the database.


The dlx login prompt is displayed when the clear database procedure is finished.

4–20
GE Medical Systems ADVANTX DLX INSTALLATION
REV 0 sm 2198944-100

UPDATE FOR DLX IMAGE HARD DISK DRIVE


MODIFICATION Job Card LG003 5 of 8

5.4 Removal of Image disk drive 0 – Degraded Operation

Note: Be sure that you have made the appropriate hardware configuration changes before continuing (see Job
Cards LJS070 and LJS071). Peripherals must be installed in the order 0, 1, 2, 3, with the correct
corresponding configuration and SCSI number.
1. Power ON the workstation; log in as service, and enter the service password.
dlx login: service <Return>
password: ....<Return> Enter the GEMS proprietary service password. It is not displayed.
2. Position the cursor in the lower portion of the screen, and press the left mouse button to access the DLX
Main Menu.
3. Drag with the mouse and select Image Disk, then Clear Data Base. Release the mouse button.

The following screen message appears. Click on HELP for more information.

4. Click on OK to clear the database.


5. When the clear database procedure is finished, log back in as service. Enter the service password.
6. Use the DLX Main Menu to access DLXTEST. See section 5.2.

4–21
GE Medical Systems ADVANTX DLX INSTALLATION
REV 0 sm 2198944-100

UPDATE FOR DLX IMAGE HARD DISK DRIVE


MODIFICATION Job Card LG003 6 of 8

7. The DLXTEST Main Menu appears. Enter the number that corresponds with the following selections,
and press return after each.
– Select the UTILITIES MENU.
– Select BUILD ADJUSTMENT PATTERNS (this procedure takes about 15 minutes).
– Select REBUILD LOOK–UP TABLES.

8. When the procedure is finished, click on the EXIT icon in the lower right-hand corner of the

flat panel screen, then click on EXIT to quit the application.


9. Log back in on DLX.

5.5 Removal of a Image Disk Drive Other than Image Disk Drive 0 – Degraded Operation

1. Power ON the workstation; log in as service, and enter the service password.
dlx login: service <Return>
password: ....<Return> Enter the GEMS proprietary service password. It is not displayed.
2. Position the cursor in the lower portion of the screen, and press the left mouse button to access the DLX
Main Menu.
3. Drag with the mouse and select Image Disk, then Clear Data Base. Release the mouse button.

4–22
GE Medical Systems ADVANTX DLX INSTALLATION
REV 0 sm 2198944-100

UPDATE FOR DLX IMAGE HARD DISK DRIVE


MODIFICATION Job Card LG003 7 of 8

The following screen message appears.

Clicking on HELP gives you the following screen message.

4. Click on OK to clear the database.

5. When the clear database procedure is finished, click on the EXIT icon in the lower right-hand
corner of the flat panel screen, then click on EXIT to quit the application.
6. Log back in on DLX.

4–23
GE Medical Systems ADVANTX DLX INSTALLATION
REV 0 sm 2198944-100

UPDATE FOR DLX IMAGE HARD DISK DRIVE


MODIFICATION Job Card LG003 8 of 8

5.6 DISK FORMATTING

To format disk 0 perform the procedure in Section 5.2, “Replacement of Disk 0”.

To format any disk other than disk 0 perform steps 1 through 5 in Section 5.2 and then do the following.

1. Access the DLXTEST Main Menu. Enter the number that corresponds with each of the following
selections and press <Return> to confirm.
– Select the UTILITIES MENU.
– Select FORMAT IMAGE DISK from the UTILITIES MENU options.
– Follow the instructions and enter the number of the disk you would like to format.
Enter: x <Return> {where x indicates the disk position}

2. Click on the EXIT icon in the lower right-hand corner of the flat panel screen, then click on
EXIT in the screen window to quit the application. .
3. Log back in on DLX.

4–24
GE Medical Systems ADVANTX DLX INSTALLATION
REV 0 sm 2198944-100

ADVANTX DLX INSTALLATION Job Card LG004 1 of 6

Subassembly (FRU): DLX SYSTEMS

Purpose: HOW TO CONNECT A LAPTOP Version No.: 1


Date: 04–97

Time: 20 min Personnel: 1

SECTION 1
SUPPLIES

D A CD ROM drive (p/n 2113636) compatible with the Sun workstation.


D Service laptop computer with 9 pin to 25 pin remote diag. Advantx DRS null modem cable p/n
2102311, found in the DLX Tools and Emergency Kit (delivered with the DLX).

25 PIN (MALE) 9 PIN (FEMALE)

2 (TX) 2 (RX)
3 (RX) 3 (TX)
7 (GND) 5 (GND)

SECTION 2
TOOLS REQUIRED

Not applicable.

SECTION 3
SAFETY PRECAUTIONS

D The CD ROM drive must be terminated when standing last in line.


D THE LINE VOLTAGE SELECTION IS AUTOMATIC FOR SUN CD–2PLUS CD DRIVES.

SECTION 4
PREREQUISITES

D Not applicable.

4–25
GE Medical Systems ADVANTX DLX INSTALLATION
REV 0 sm 2198944-100

HOW TO CONNECT A LAPTOP


Job Card LG004 2 of 6

SECTION 5
PROCEDURE

5.1 Set-up the Laptop Environment

1. Halt the workstation. At the dlxlogin prompt, type:

dlxlogin: halt <cr>

Note: If cannot access the dlx login prompt, press the <Stop> and < a > keys simultaneously to halt the
system and get the ok prompt.

2. Type the following commands at the ok prompt, to set the correct environment variables.

ok setenv auto–boot? false <cr>


ok setenv ttya–mode 9600,7,e,1,s <cr>

3. Power OFF the workstation.

4. Power OFF the UPS, if option is present.

5.2 Connect the CD ROM drive

1. Check the CD ROM drive SCSI address, it should be set to #6. This is selectable by means of target address
switch located on the back of the device.

Never change the SCSI address when power is on.


CAUTION

D When found in-line (connected and powered up) during the workstation boot sequence, the CD ROM
drive is recognized as device sr0 at target 6.

2. Connect the CD ROM drive. See Illustration 4–1.

D If no UPS is connected to the DLX system: 1) Connect the CD ROM drive to the Sun workstation, 2)
Terminate the CD ROM drive connector.
D Depending on the DLX and UPS model, the SCSI may be used by the UPS. In the case where the UPS
is connected to the Central Data SCSI driver, disconnect the Central Data SCSI Device. Then:
1) Connect the CD ROM drive to the Sun workstation,
2) Terminate the CD ROM drive connector.

4–26
GE Medical Systems ADVANTX DLX INSTALLATION
REV 0 sm 2198944-100

HOW TO CONNECT A LAPTOP


Job Card LG004 3 of 6

ILLUSTRATION 4–1
PREPARE FOR SOFTWARE LOAD

SUN WORKSTATION

I
I DISCONNECT
SCSI DEVICE
(IF PRESENT)

SCSI CABLE

A B
SCSI
TERMINATOR

2102311
CDROM DRIVE
COM 1
LAPTOP (OR EQUIVALENT)

5.3 Connect the Laptop Computer

1. Disconnect the serial interface cable A between the DLX cabinet and Serial port A/B on the Sun
workstation.

2. Connect the 25 to 9 pin remote diag. cable 2102311 between the laptop COM1 (or equivalent) and
connector A on the Sun serial interface A/B cable. See Illustration 4–1.

3. Power ON the laptop.

4. From the Window Program Manager laptop screen, click on the desktop ACCESSORIES icon.

5. In the Accessories Window, click on the TERMINAL icon to access the Terminal Application.

4–27
GE Medical Systems ADVANTX DLX INSTALLATION
REV 0 sm 2198944-100

HOW TO CONNECT A LAPTOP


Job Card LG004 4 of 6

6. Click on the window box in the upper right hand corner of the Terminal Application window to enlarge the
window to full screen size.

7. Pull down the FILE menu and select OPEN. In the OPEN window select dlx.trm in the File Name box.
Check that the parameters below are selected for dlx.trm, and click on OK to confirm. If you do not have
the set-up dlx.trm, create it as described below.

– Click on SETTINGS and scroll down the Settings Menu to configure the laptop terminal parameters.
Make the following menu and parameter selections.

– Select Terminal Emulation. Choose the following, then click on OK to confirm and continue.

– DEC VT–100 (ANSI)

– Select Terminal Preferences. Click on OK, after making all of the following selections, to confirm.

– Line Wrap (click in box next to option to select)


– Sound
– Columns: 80
– Terminal Font: Terminal, 12
– Cursor: Block, Blink
– Translation: United Kingdom
– Show Scroll Bars
– Buffer Lines: 350
– Use Function, Arrow and Ctrl Keys...

– Select Communications. Select the following; click on OK to confirm and continue.

– Connector: COM1 (or equivalent)


– Baud Rate: 9600
– Data Bits: 7
– Parity: Even
– Flow Control: XON/XOFF
– Stop Bits: 1

– Pull down the FILE menu, select Save As... and enter the name dlx.trm to store these settings.

8. Turn ON the CD ROM drive.

4–28
GE Medical Systems ADVANTX DLX INSTALLATION
REV 0 sm 2198944-100

HOW TO CONNECT A LAPTOP


Job Card LG004 5 of 6

9. Disconnect the DLX keyboard from the Sun workstation so that input and output are channeled through
the laptop (ttya).

10. Turn ON the UPS, if the option is present.

11. Turn ON the workstation and wait for the ok prompt to appear on the laptop.

12. Before going on, read section 5.4 on Sun CD2 CD ROM drive operation.

4–29
GE Medical Systems ADVANTX DLX INSTALLATION
REV 0 sm 2198944-100

HOW TO CONNECT A LAPTOP


Job Card LG004 6 of 6

5.4 Sun CD2 Plus Drive (part number 2113636)

D Open the drive tray.

Push the eject button to release the drive tray, and pull the drive tray out completely. The tray will eject
only about 1/2 inch from the drive unit. You must pull the tray out completely before inserting a disk.
D Place compact disk in the drive tray.

Place the disk (label side up) into the tray. A compact disk is a single–sided storage medium. It is
important to place the disk into the tray with the label side up as shown.
D Push the disk over the small ball bearings on the center spindle.

You should feel the disk snap firmly into place.

D Close the drive tray.

Push the tray completely back into the drive until the tray snaps shut. The SunCD 2Plus drive does not
have an automated closing mechanism. You must push the tray all the back into the drive, until the tray
snaps shut.

4–30
GE Medical Systems ADVANTX DLX INSTALLATION
REV 0 sm 2198944-100

ADVANTX DLX INSTALLATION Job Card LG005 1 of 14

Subassembly (FRU): DLX SYSTEMS

Purpose: COMPLETE SOFTWARE LOAD FROM Version No.: 3


CD ROM: O.S. AND APPLICATION (FOR SUN O.S.) Date: 03–98

Time: 1 hour Personnel: 1

SECTION 1
SUPPLIES

D DLX CD ROM set (see Renewal Parts for the part number).
D A service laptop computer.
D A CD ROM drive usable with Sun Workstation (part number 
D The configuration floppy diskette from the DLX system installation (see IST1F JOBCARD)
or a blank diskette to back–up the configuration.
Note: If you do not have the configuration floppy disk from installation, the following files will be lost:
dlxconf.a, ethers, hosts, and hostname.le1. Default files are supplied on the application CD-ROM
to allow the application to be updated without the configuration diskette. Note that without the con-
figuration diskette you will have to re-enter all configuration and DLXINSTAL data.

SECTION 2
TOOLS REQUIRED

D Not applicable.

SECTION 3
SAFETY PRECAUTIONS

D Not applicable.

SECTION 4
PREREQUISITES

D CD ROM drive is connected to Sun workstation (see Job Card LG004).


D Service laptop is connected to Sun workstation (Job Card LG004).

4–31
GE Medical Systems ADVANTX DLX INSTALLATION
REV 0 sm 2198944-100

COMPLETE SOFTWARE LOAD FROM


CD ROM: O.S. AND APPLICATION (FOR SUN O.S.) Job Card LG005 2 of 14

SECTION 5
PROCEDURE

IMAGE DATABASE WILL BE LOST WHEN PERFORMING THIS


WARNING PROCEDURE.

Note: The operating system and application software have been factory loaded. The following procedure
is ONLY done when you need to reinstall all of the DLX software.

Note: Use the <Delete> key, and not the <Backspace> key, when erasing an item.

4–32
GE Medical Systems ADVANTX DLX INSTALLATION
REV 0 sm 2198944-100

COMPLETE SOFTWARE LOAD FROM


CD ROM: O.S. AND APPLICATION (FOR SUN O.S.) Job Card LG005 3 of 14

5.1 Sun Operating System Reinstallation

1. Open the CD ROM drive tray and insert the Solaris 1.1.2 operating system CD.

2. At the ok prompt boot from the CD ROM.

ok boot cdrom <cr>

You will be asked a series of questions. Enter the following responses, and press <Return> after each.

________________________________________________________________

What would you like to do?


1 – Install Sun OS mini–root
2 – Exit to single user shell

Enter 1 or 2: 1 <cr>

________________________________________________________________

Do you want to format and/or label disk sd0?


1 – yes, run format
2 – no, continue with loading miniroot
3 – no, exit to single user shell

Enter 1, 2 or 3: 2 <cr>

________________________________________________________________

Mini–root installation complete.

What would you like to do?


1 – Reboot using the just installed mini–root
2 – Exit to single user shell

Enter 1 or 2: 1 <cr>
________________________________________________________________

3. At this point the system reboots and the mini-root prompt (u) appears. Enter the following command to
change the CD ROM.

# eject cd <cr>

Note: The prompt may be a  or a  instead of the “#” sign (this is normal, continue with the proce-
dure).
4. Remove the Solaris CD ROM from the tray and insert the DLX application CD ROM. Close the drive tray.

4–33
GE Medical Systems ADVANTX DLX INSTALLATION
REV 0 sm 2198944-100

COMPLETE SOFTWARE LOAD FROM


CD ROM: O.S. AND APPLICATION (FOR SUN O.S.) Job Card LG005 4 of 14

5. Mount the application CD ROM. Type the following commands:

# mkdir /cdrom <cr>

# mount –t hsfs –r /dev/sr0 /cdrom <cr>


{If the error message –No such device or address– is displayed, check that you have correctly placed
the CD ROM in the drive tray, and pushed the CD ROM tray completely back into the CD drive.}

# /cdrom/init.sun <cr>

# install.sun <cr>

The DLX application CD ROM is automatically ejected. Remove the DLX application CD ROM from the
tray and insert the Solaris CD ROM. Push the drive tray shut, and press <Return> to continue.

Sun Installation: Please insert the Solaris CD ROM and press <Enter> to continue.

6. The Sun Installation script, similar to the text given below, begins. Answer the questions as shown. To
move horizontally through a menu, press the <Space bar>. To move vertically through menus, press
<Control> < f >, and use <Control> < b > to move backwards in the menu.

________________________________________________________________

Welcome to Sun Install.


1 – Quick Installation
2 – Custom Installation
Your choice (or Press Q to Quit)>>> 2 <cr>
________________________________________________________________

Select your terminal type:


1 – Televideo 925
2 – Wyse Model 50
3 – Sun Workstation
4 – Other
Enter: 4 <cr>

________________________________________________________________

Others: Enter name of terminal: vt100 <cr>

________________________________________________________________

Enter the local time zone name (enter ? for help).


Enter: MET <cr> {Enter the zone in upper case letters.}

________________________________________________________________

4–34
GE Medical Systems ADVANTX DLX INSTALLATION
REV 0 sm 2198944-100

COMPLETE SOFTWARE LOAD FROM


CD ROM: O.S. AND APPLICATION (FOR SUN O.S.) Job Card LG005 5 of 14

7. A time and date are displayed. Check the time/date information. If the time or date is not correct, answer N
and re-enter the information.

________________________________________________________________
Is this the correct time/date: Mon Aug 1 16:00:00 1995? [y/n] >> y <cr>

________________________________________________________________
8. In the following screens, type an x in front of your selection, or enter the requested information. Press
<Return> when asked to do so, to confirm choices, and to continue.

________________________________________________________________
Sun Microsystems System Installation Tool [? = Help]

x Assign host information

Exit Sun install

[RET/Space = next choice] [x = select choice] [^B/^P = backward] [^F/^N = forward]

________________________________________________________________
Workstation Information:

Name: dlx <cr>

Type: x [standalone] [server] [dataless] <cr>

Note: When the second Ethernet interface [le1] is present, pressing the Return key <cr> does not forward
the cursor. (Le1 is only displayed when a 2nd Ethernet is installed.) If pressing the <Return> key
does not move the cursor forward, press the <Ctrl> and <F> keys simultaneously to move on to the
next field.

Note: The Ethernet address shown in the following section is the default value; type only <cr> to validate
it.
Network Information:

Ethernet interface: [none] x [le0] [le1] <cr>

Internet address: 192.54.162.1 <cr> {default value, press <Return> to continue}


IP address is set during the download DLX.

NIS Type: x [none] [master] [slave] <cr>

Miscellaneous Information:

Reboot after completed? [yes] x [no]


Are you finished with this form? [y/n]: y <cr>

4–35
GE Medical Systems ADVANTX DLX INSTALLATION
REV 0 sm 2198944-100

COMPLETE SOFTWARE LOAD FROM


CD ROM: O.S. AND APPLICATION (FOR SUN O.S.) Job Card LG005 6 of 14

9. Select Assign disk information in the following menu.

________________________________________________________________

Sun Microsystems System Installation Tool

( + means the data file exists)

+ Assign host information

x Assign disk information


Exit Sun install

________________________________________________________________

10. Select the following system disk device. Press <Return> to confirm or move on to the next line.

________________________________________________________________

Attached disk devices:

x [sd0]
Disk label ........... [default] x [use existing] [modify existing]
Free hog disk partition ........... [d] [e] [f] [g] x [h]
Display Unit: ........... x [Mbytes] [Kbytes] [blocks] [cylinders]
________________________________________________________________

Use the space bar to move in menu, and type an x before an item to select it.

11. Fill in the last two columns, Mount PT and Preserve, of the disk partition table as shown below. Press
<Return> to move on after each line. (It is important that you DO NOT modify the partition information
listed in the columns Start_cyl, Blocks, and Size.)

PARTITION START_CYL BLOCKS SIZE MOUNT PT PRESERVE (Y/N)

a 0 133056 67 / <CR> n <CR>


b 132 266112 135 <CR>
c 0 2052288 1050 <CR>
d 0 0 0
e 396 133056 67 /tftpboot <CR> n <CR>
f 528 266112 135 <CR>
g 792 399168 203 /usr <CR> n <CR>
h 1188 854784 437 /home_local <CR> n <CR>

4–36
GE Medical Systems ADVANTX DLX INSTALLATION
REV 0 sm 2198944-100

COMPLETE SOFTWARE LOAD FROM


CD ROM: O.S. AND APPLICATION (FOR SUN O.S.) Job Card LG005 7 of 14

12. After entering the information in the table above, confirm that you are ready to continue.

________________________________________________________________

OK to use this partition table? [y/n]: y <cr>

Are you finished with this form? [y/n]: y <cr>


________________________________________________________________

Sun Microsystems System Installation Tool

+ Assign host information

+ Assign disk information

x Assign software information


________________________________________________________________

Software Architecture Operation

x [add new release]

________________________________________________________________

13. You do not need to insert a release media when the message – Please insert the release media you want
to install, then press Return – is displayed. However, do press <Return> to continue.

Please insert the release media you want to install, then press <Return> to continue.

4–37
GE Medical Systems ADVANTX DLX INSTALLATION
REV 0 sm 2198944-100

COMPLETE SOFTWARE LOAD FROM


CD ROM: O.S. AND APPLICATION (FOR SUN O.S.) Job Card LG005 8 of 14

14. Select the following media device and location. Make the selections shown below, and press <Return> to
continue.

________________________________________________________________

Media Information:

Media device [st0] [st1] [st2] [st_] [xt0] [mt0] [fd0] x [sr0]
Media location x [local] [remote]
OK to use these values to read the table of contents? [y/n]: y <cr>

You have the 4.1.4 Sun OS media loaded. Is this OK? [y/n]: y <cr>
________________________________________________________________

Media Information:

Choice: [all] [default] [required] x [own choice]


Executables Path: /usr <cr>

Kernel Executables Path: /usr/kvm <cr>

OK to use these values to select software categories? [y/n]: y <cr>


________________________________________________________________

4–38
GE Medical Systems ADVANTX DLX INSTALLATION
REV 0 sm 2198944-100

COMPLETE SOFTWARE LOAD FROM


CD ROM: O.S. AND APPLICATION (FOR SUN O.S.) Job Card LG005 9 of 14

15. Use the list below to respond to the Name field choices in the line near the bottom of the screen. Enter y
for yes, or n for no, and press <Return> after each to continue. (The Name field choice will
automatically move on to the next Name after you press <Return>.)

Name: Networking {the first Name to appear on the screen}

Select this media file? [y/n]: y <cr> {the next Name appears after pressing <Return>}

Name: Select this media file?


Networking Y
System_V Y
Sys Y
SunView_Users Y
SunView–Demo N
Text Y
Demo N
OpenWindows_Users Y
OpenWindows_Demo N
OpenWindows_Fonts Y
User_diag Y
Manual Y
TLI Y
RSF Y
Debugging Y
Sunview_Programmer N
Shlib_custom Y
Graphics Y
uucp Y
Games N
Versatec Y
Security Y
OpenWin_Programmers N

More files text, press <Return> to continue... {press <Return>}

16. Answer y for Yes, to confirm this configuration.

OK to use this architecture configuration? [y/n]: y <cr>


Are you finished with this form? [y/n]: y <cr>

4–39
GE Medical Systems ADVANTX DLX INSTALLATION
REV 0 sm 2198944-100

COMPLETE SOFTWARE LOAD FROM


CD ROM: O.S. AND APPLICATION (FOR SUN O.S.) Job Card LG005 10 of 14

17. Select Start the installation from the menu items listed.

Sun Microsystems System Installation Tool

+ Assign host information

+ Attached disk

+ Assign software information

x Start the installation


Exit Sun Install

The operating system installation procedure begins. This step lasts approximately 30 minutes.

If the Laptop Screen Saver is active, it will operate during that time and you will be unable to see the
messages: Clearing the Screen Saver by hitting the “enter” key could halt the Software Load.

During the installation a number of messages are printed on the screen telling the operator what is going
on. If an error occurs during the installation, the installation script stops, and the reason for the failure is
printed on the screen (correct the problem and repeat the procedure, starting at the beginning of this Job
Card).

18. The Solaris CD ROM is ejected at the end of the operating system installation procedure. Remove the
Solaris operating system CD ROM and insert the DLX application CD ROM.

19. Press <Return> when you are ready to continue.

Please insert the DLX CD ROM and press the <Enter> key to continue.

The workstation goes automatically to the ok prompt.

Note: Instead of going to ok prompt, one of the following error messages may be displayed at this point.
Follow the prescribed action

Message: Action:

DLX CD ROM not found. Insert the CD ROM and press [Return].

Cannot mount the CD ROM on the directory. Open the drive tray and check
that the CD is correctly placed in the
drive tray. Close the drive tray completely.

Downloading aborted. Return to the beginning of the Operating


System installation, and repeat procedure.

4–40
GE Medical Systems ADVANTX DLX INSTALLATION
REV 0 sm 2198944-100

COMPLETE SOFTWARE LOAD FROM


CD ROM: O.S. AND APPLICATION (FOR SUN O.S.) Job Card LG005 11 of 14

20. At the ok prompt, type the following commands to return the environment variables to their original
settings.

ok
ok setenv auto–boot? true <cr>
ok setenv ttya–mode 9600,8,n,1,– <cr>
ok

21. Power OFF the CD ROM drive.

22. Power OFF the Sun workstation, and turn OFF the laptop power.

23. Disconnect the laptop.

24. Reconnect disconnected Sun workstation cables (the keyboard, and port A).

25. Power ON the CD ROM drive.

26. Power ON the Sun workstation.

Please go on to Section 5.2 to reinstall the DLX application.

5.2 DLX Application Software Reinstallation

Note: Enter the following commands on the Sun keyboard.


1. Type install at the login prompt.

dlx login: install <Return>

2. An INSTALLATION message appears. Type 2, to select (Motif + Informix + DLX) and press [Return].

DLX only ................................. press 1


Motif + Informix + DLX ............... press 2
Quit....................................... press 3

Please enter your choice: 2 <cr>

Note: If the following error message is displayed at this point, follow the prescribed action.

Message: Action:

WARNING: Impossible to upgrade the DLX Press <Return> to continue and reboot.
software with an old version of Sun OS. Return to Section 5.1 and repeat the
WARNING: The workstation will reboot. System installation.
Downloading aborted.
Press <Return> to continue and reboot.

4–41
GE Medical Systems ADVANTX DLX INSTALLATION
REV 0 sm 2198944-100

COMPLETE SOFTWARE LOAD FROM


CD ROM: O.S. AND APPLICATION (FOR SUN O.S.) Job Card LG005 12 of 14

3. A confirmation message appears. Type y and press <Return> to continue with the installation.

Continue with installation (y or n)? y <cr>

The application installation procedure begins.

COMPLETE DLX INSTALLATION IN PROGRESS...

Wait approximately 20 minutes and you will see the following mesages :

Downloading VIGRA files ...


VIGRA files downloaded

Downloading X11 files ...


X11 files downloaded

Downloading patch for le0 ...


Patch for le0 downloaded

Downloading the DLX software ...


DLX software downloaded

Downloading /etc files ...


/etc files downloaded

Downloading INFORMIX ...


INFORMIX downloaded

DLX INFORMIX Database created

Creating SQL procedures ...


SQL procedures created

Downloading the new UNIX kernel ...


new UNIX kernel downloaded

When the installation process is finished, the ok prompt is displayed.

4. Once the ok prompt is displayed, remove the CD ROM from the CD drive.

5. Power OFF the Sun.

6. Power OFF the CD ROM drive.

7. Power OFF the UPS, if present.

4–42
GE Medical Systems ADVANTX DLX INSTALLATION
REV 0 sm 2198944-100

COMPLETE SOFTWARE LOAD FROM


CD ROM: O.S. AND APPLICATION (FOR SUN O.S.) Job Card LG005 13 of 14

8. Disconnect the CD ROM drive (both SCSI and power cables).

9. Power OFF the DLX cabinet bulkhead.

10. Reconnect the disconnected Central Data SCSI cable, if used, to the Sun.

11. Power ON the UPS option, if installed (position | ).

12. Power ON the Sun workstation.

13. Power ON the DLX cabinet bulkhead (the cabinet was powered OFF to reset).

14. Log as service and restore the configuration by using your configuration floppy disk.

15. If the DLX is equipped with Smart UPS 450 VA (part number 2195622),
IMPORTANT
install the UPS Software Upgrade.

Use Floppy Disk 2199684 delivered with the UPS.

Before starting software installation, new UPS hardware must be installed.

1. Exit DLX application and wait for the UNIX login prompt.
2. Log in as root on the DLX:
dlx login: root [Return] (Enter the GEMS proprietary password.
It is not displayed on the screen)
3. Insert the floppy disk in the floppy drive of DLX’s workstation.
4. Type in the following commands to create the directory /tmp/ups:
dlx# cd tmp [Return]
dlx# mkdir ups [Return]
dlx# cd ups [Return]
5. Type in the following command to get files from the floppy disk
dlx# tar xvf /dev/rfd0 [Return]
dlx# eject floppy [Return]
6. Type in the following commands to uncompress files:
dlx# uncompress *.Z [Return]
dlx# tar xvf *.tar [Return]
7. Type in the following command to execute the installation script:
dlx# ./ups_flopinst [Return]
To check installation use DLX Jobcard IST 12 O “Check UPS Connection” paragraph.

4–43
GE Medical Systems ADVANTX DLX INSTALLATION
REV 0 sm 2198944-100

COMPLETE SOFTWARE LOAD FROM


CD ROM: O.S. AND APPLICATION (FOR SUN O.S.) Job Card LG005 14 of 14

Note: A new mechanism to configure routers and netmasks is introduced in the C13.31 DLX release and more.
In C11, as no tools were available to configure its, you may manually configured routers or netmasks
in /etc/rc.local or in /etc/rc.dlx or in other rc files.
Upgrading C11 to C13 automatically configures the routers with the new mechanism but not the
netmasks. If you manually configured netmasks, please refer to the Job Card IST16 O section 6.4
”Particular Case” and:
––> Click on the ”See” button to check whether your netmask is configured or not.
––> Otherwise, enter your netmask and click on ”Apply”.
(Ask the Network Hospital Administrator for the netmask value).

4–44
GE Medical Systems ADVANTX DLX INSTALLATION
REV 0 sm 2198944-100

ADVANTX DLX INSTALLATION Job Card LG005Solaris 1 of 12

Subassembly (FRU): DLX SYSTEMS

Purpose: COMPLETE SOFTWARE LOAD FROM CD Version No.: 0


ROM: O.S. AND APPLICATION (FOR SOLARIS) Date: 02–98

Time: 4 hours Personnel: 1

WARNING ONLY FOR DLX SOFTWARE RELEASE C16.XX OR HIGHER.

SECTION 1
SUPPLIES

D Sun Solaris 2.5.1 O.S CDROM (rev date > 11/97).


D DLX CD ROM set (see Renewal Parts for the part number).
D A CD ROM drive usable with Sun Workstation (part number 
D Jumpstart Floppy Disk.
D The configuration floppy diskette from the DLX system installation (see IST1F JOBCARD)
or a blank diskette to back–up the configuration.
Note: If you do not have the configuration floppy disk from installation, the following files will be lost:
dlxconf.a, ethers, hosts, and hostname.le1. Default files are supplied on the application CD-ROM
to allow the application to be updated without the configuration diskette. Note that without the con-
figuration diskette you will have to re-enter all configuration and DLXINSTAL data.

SECTION 2
TOOLS REQUIRED

D Not applicable.

SECTION 3
SAFETY PRECAUTIONS

D Not applicable.

SECTION 4
PREREQUISITES

D CD ROM drive is connected to Sun workstation (see Job Card LG004, section 5.2 and section 5.4).

4–45
GE Medical Systems ADVANTX DLX INSTALLATION
REV 0 sm 2198944-100

COMPLETE SOFTWARE LOAD FROM CD ROM:


O.S. AND APPLICATION (FOR SOLARIS) Job Card LG005Solaris 2 of 12

SECTION 5
PROCEDURE

IMAGE DATABASE WILL BE LOST WHEN PERFORMING THIS


WARNING PROCEDURE.

Note: The operating system and application software have been factory loaded. The following procedure
is ONLY done when you need to reinstall all of the DLX software.

Note: Use the <Delete> key, and not the <Backspace> key, when erasing an item.

4–46
GE Medical Systems ADVANTX DLX INSTALLATION
REV 0 sm 2198944-100

COMPLETE SOFTWARE LOAD FROM CD ROM:


O.S. AND APPLICATION (FOR SOLARIS) Job Card LG005Solaris 3 of 12

5.1 Solaris reinstallation

1. Insert the Solaris 2.5.1 Installation CD, part number 2183594, in the CD ROM drive tray, and close the
drive completely. Insert the ”jumpstart” floppy disk in the floppy drive.
2. Type boot cdrom – install at the ok prompt, and press <return> to continue. The boot process will
take approximately 10 minutes.

CAUTION There must be is a space between the ’cdrom’, ’–’ and ’install’.

ok boot cdrom – install


Resetting ...

SPARCstation 4, Keyboard Present


ROM Rev. 2.24, 64 MB memory installed, Serial #xxxxxx.
Ethernet address xx:xx:xx:xx:xx, Host ID: xxxxxx.

Rebooting with command: cdrom – install


Boot device: /iommu/sbus/espdma@4,8400000/esp@4,8800000/sd@6,0:d File and args:
– install
SunOS Release 5.5.1 Version Generic_103640–12 [UNIX(R) System V Release 4.0]
Copyright (c) 1983–1996, Sun Microsystems, Inc.
Configuring the /devices directory
Configuring the /dev directory
Starting Openwindows...

3. The System Identification screen appears. Read the screen, and click on Continue when you are ready.

The Solaris Installation Program

You are now interacting with the Solaris installation program. The
program is divided into a series of short sections. At the end of each
section, you will see a summary of the choices you’ve made, and be given
the opportunity to make changes.

As you work with the program, you will complete one or more of the
following tasks:

1 – Identify peripheral devices


2 – Identify your system
3 – Install Solaris software

> To begin the installation process, choose Continue

Continue Help

4–47
GE Medical Systems ADVANTX DLX INSTALLATION
REV 0 sm 2198944-100

COMPLETE SOFTWARE LOAD FROM CD ROM:


O.S. AND APPLICATION (FOR SOLARIS) Job Card LG005Solaris 4 of 12

4. The Identify System screen appears. Choose Continue when you are ready.

Identify This System

On the next screens, you must identify this system as networked or


non–networked, and set the default time zone and date/time.

If this system is networked, the software will try to find the information
it needs to identify your system; you will be prompted to supply any
information it cannot find.

> To begin identifying this system, choose Continue.

Continue Help

5. The Host name screen appears. Type the hostname dlx, and choose Continue when you are ready.

Host Name

On this screen you must enter your host name, which identifies this system
on the network. The name must be unique within your domain; creating a
duplicate host name will cause problems on the network after you install
Solaris.

A host name must be at least two characters; it can contain letters,


digits, and minus signs (–).

Host name: dlx

Continue Help

4–48
GE Medical Systems ADVANTX DLX INSTALLATION
REV 0 sm 2198944-100

COMPLETE SOFTWARE LOAD FROM CD ROM:


O.S. AND APPLICATION (FOR SOLARIS) Job Card LG005Solaris 5 of 12

6. You are queried for the Network Connectivity. Select Yes and Continue.

Network Connectivity

On this screen you must specify whether this system is connected to a


network. If you specify Yes, the system should be connected to the network
by an Ethernet or similar network adapter.

Networked : o Yes

No

Continue Help

7. You are queried for the Primary Network Interface. Select le0 and Continue.

Primary Network Interface

On this screen you must specify which of the following network adapters is
the system’s primary network interface. Usually the correct choice is the
lowest number. However, do not guess; ask your system administrator if
you’re not sure.

Primary network interface


le1
le0

le1 is only displayed when a


second ethernet card is installed

Continue Help

4–49
GE Medical Systems ADVANTX DLX INSTALLATION
REV 0 sm 2198944-100

COMPLETE SOFTWARE LOAD FROM CD ROM:


O.S. AND APPLICATION (FOR SOLARIS) Job Card LG005Solaris 6 of 12

8. Enter the approprieate IP address, i.e. 3.87.252.4 in this example screen below and choose Continue.

IP Address

On this screen you must enter the Internet Protocol (IP) address for this
system. It must be unique and follow your site’s address conventions, or a
system/network failure could result.

IP addresses contain four sets of numbers separated by periods (for example


129.200.9.1).

IP address: 3.87.252.4

Continue Help

9. Confirm the following information and choose Continue.

Confirm Information

Confirm the following information. If it is correct, press F2;


to change any information, press F4.

Host name: dlx


Networked: Yes
Primary network interface: le0
IP address: 3.87.252.4

Continue Change Help

4–50
GE Medical Systems ADVANTX DLX INSTALLATION
REV 0 sm 2198944-100

COMPLETE SOFTWARE LOAD FROM CD ROM:


O.S. AND APPLICATION (FOR SOLARIS) Job Card LG005Solaris 7 of 12

10. Select Other as the Name Service and choose Continue.

Name service

On this screen you must provide name service information. Select NIS+ or
NIS if this system is known to the name server; select Other if your site
is using another name service (for example, DCE or DNS); select None if
your site is not using a name service, or if it is not yet established.

Name service : NIS+

NIS (formerly YP)

o Other

None

Continue Help

11. Confirm the following information and choose Continue.

Confirm Information

Confirm the following information. If it is correct,choose Continue;


to change any information choose Change.

Name service : Other

Continue Change Help

4–51
GE Medical Systems ADVANTX DLX INSTALLATION
REV 0 sm 2198944-100

COMPLETE SOFTWARE LOAD FROM CD ROM:


O.S. AND APPLICATION (FOR SOLARIS) Job Card LG005Solaris 8 of 12

12. In the System Subnet screen, select No and choose Continue.

Subnets

On this screen you must specify whether this system is part of a subnet.
If you specify incorrectly, the system will have problems communicating on
the network after you reboot.

System part of a subnet : Yes

o No

Continue Help

13. Select Geographic region and choose Set.

Time Zone

On this screen you must specify your default time zone. You can specify a
time zone in three ways: select one of the geographic regions from the
list, select other – offset from GMT, or other – specify time zone file.

> Select one of the three methods and choose Set.

Specify timezone by : o Geographic region

Offset from GMT

Time zone file

Set... Help

4–52
GE Medical Systems ADVANTX DLX INSTALLATION
REV 0 sm 2198944-100

COMPLETE SOFTWARE LOAD FROM CD ROM:


O.S. AND APPLICATION (FOR SOLARIS) Job Card LG005Solaris 9 of 12

14. Select a region from the list on the left and a time zone from the list on the right anf choose Continue.

Time Zone

On this screen you can specify your default time zone by geographic region.

> Select a region from the list on the left and time zone from the list on the right

Regions Time zone


Africa Eastern
Asia, Eastern Central
Asia, Western Mountain
Australia/New Zealand Pacific
Canada East–Indiana
Europe Arizona
Mexico Michigan
South America Samoa
United States Alaska
Aleutian
Hawaii

Continue Cancel Help

15. A time and date are displayed. Check the time/date information. If the time or date is not correct
re–enter the information and choose Continue.

Date and Time

>Accept the default date and time or enter


new values.

Date and time: 12/02/97 10:22

Year (4 digits) : 1997


Month (1–12) : 12
Day (1–31) : 02
Hour (0–23) : 10
Minute (0–59) : 10:22

Continue Help

4–53
GE Medical Systems ADVANTX DLX INSTALLATION
REV 0 sm 2198944-100

COMPLETE SOFTWARE LOAD FROM CD ROM:


O.S. AND APPLICATION (FOR SOLARIS) Job Card LG005Solaris 10 of 12

16. A time zone confirmation screen appears. If the information is correct choose Continue.

Confirm Information

> Confirm the following information. If it is correct, choose Continue;


to change any information, choose Change.

System port of a subnet: No


Time zone: US/Central Check these informations
Date and time: 12/02/97 10:24 to time zone, date and
time selected above

Continue Change Help

17. At this point, the Solaris installation parameters will be read from the floppy disk, and the Solaris 2.5.1
installation will proceed without further prompting.
Note: This procedure takes about 3 hours and 25 minutes.

System identification is completed.


Starting Solaris installation program...
Searching for JumpStart directory...pcfs: disk not in DOS format!
using floppy
Checking rules.ok file...
Using profile: dlx_machine
Using finish script: dlx_finish

Executing Jumpstart preinstall phase...


Searching for Solstart directory...

...........
...........
A lot of messages are displayed during the
...........
installation process until the workstation reboots
...........

4–54
GE Medical Systems ADVANTX DLX INSTALLATION
REV 0 sm 2198944-100

COMPLETE SOFTWARE LOAD FROM CD ROM:


O.S. AND APPLICATION (FOR SOLARIS) Job Card LG005Solaris 11 of 12

18. When Solaris installation is completed, the workstation automatically reboots and asks for Cdrom
DLX.
Insert DLX cdrom and press Enter key.
Note: The DLX package installation will take approximately 15 minutes.

Insert the cdrom labeled “dlx”


Press Enter when ready

Installing DLX package, please wait


Installing Informix package, please wait

Creating SQL Procedures...


Sun Microsystems Inc. SunOS 5.5.1 Generic May 1996
Sun Microsystems Inc. SunOS 5.5.1 Generic May 1996

SQL procedures created


System will be halted in 15 seconds.

19. Once the dlx login prompt is displayed, type halt and press <Return> until ok prompt is displayed.
20. Type eject cdrom <Return> then remove the CD ROM from the CD drive.
21. Power OFF the Sun.
22. Power OFF the CD ROM drive.
23. Power OFF the UPS, if present.
24. Disconnect the CD ROM drive (both SCSI and power cables).
25. Power OFF the DLX cabinet bulkhead.
26. Power ON the UPS option, if installed (position | ).
27. Power ON the Sun workstation.
28. Power ON the DLX cabinet bulkhead (the cabinet was powered OFF to reset).
29. Log as service and restore the configuration by using your configuration floppy disk.

4–55
GE Medical Systems ADVANTX DLX INSTALLATION
REV 0 sm 2198944-100

COMPLETE SOFTWARE LOAD FROM CD ROM:


O.S. AND APPLICATION (FOR SOLARIS) Job Card LG005Solaris 12 of 12

Blank page

4–56
GE Medical Systems ADVANTX DLX INSTALLATION
REV 0 sm 2198944-100

ADVANTX DLX INSTALLATION Job Card LG006 1 of 4

Purpose: RELOAD DLX APPLICATION SOFTWARE Version No.: 0


(SUN O.S. & SOLARIS) Date: 02–98

Time: 30 min Personnel: 1

Note: IMAGE DATABASE WILL NOT BE LOST DURING THIS PROCEDURE.

SECTION 1
SUPPLIES

D DLX CD ROM (DLX software C16.xx, part no. 2208279).


D SCSI 2 compatible, bootable CD ROM drive (with terminator), part no. 2113636.

SECTION 2
TOOLS REQUIRED

D Not applicable.

SECTION 3
SAFETY PRECAUTIONS

D Not applicable.

SECTION 4
PREREQUISITES

D The operating system should be installed and running on the workstation.


D Exit the Application, if you have not already done so. If you are logged in and DLX is running, click
on the EXIT icon. The Shutdown window appears, click on EXIT.
D CD ROM drive is connected to Sun workstation (see Job Card LG004, section 5.2 and section 5.4).

Note: The DLX application software is factory loaded. This procedure is only valid for reinstallation.

SECTION 5
PROCEDURE

1. Insert the DLX application CD in the drive tray, and close the drive completely.

2. Type install at the login prompt.

dlx login: install <Return>

4–57
GE Medical Systems ADVANTX DLX INSTALLATION
REV 0 sm 2198944-100

RELOAD DLX APPLICATION SOFTWARE (SUN O.S.


& SOLARIS) Job Card LG006 2 of 4

3. An INSTALLATION message appears. Select 1 from the following choices:

DLX only . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . press 1


DLX + Informix . . . . . . . . . . . . . . press 2
Quit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . press 3

Please enter your choice: 1 <cr>

The application installation procedure begins.

It will take approximately 15 minutes.

Checking for already installed packages...

Removing old DLX package, please wait...

Installing new DLX package.

This may take a long time, please wait...

...........
........... A lot of messages are displayed during the
........... installation process
...........

Installation of <GEMS dlx> was successful.

DLX package installation completed.

When the installation process is finished, the ok prompt is displayed.

4. Type eject cdrom <Return> and remove the CD ROM from the CD drive.

5. Power OFF the Sun.

6. Power OFF the CD ROM drive.

7. Power OFF the UPS, if present.

8. Disconnect the CD ROM drive (both SCSI and power cables).

9. Power OFF the DLX cabinet bulkhead.

10. Power ON the UPS option, if installed (position | ).

11. Power ON the Sun workstation.

12. Power ON the DLX cabinet bulkhead (the cabinet was powered OFF to reset).

4–58
GE Medical Systems ADVANTX DLX INSTALLATION
REV 0 sm 2198944-100

RELOAD DLX APPLICATION SOFTWARE (SUN O.S.


& SOLARIS) Job Card LG006 3 of 4

Note: If you’re upgrading the DLX system with a release C14.XX or higher, check in DLXINSTAL that the
options AUTO ARCHIVE DESTINATION DEFAULT VALUE
and NETWORK IS an ARCHIVE or a TRANSFER DESTINATION
are properly set according to your system.
For this, enter Command 5: OTHER OPTIONS,
then select parameter 5: NETWORK CONFIGURATION MENU
and check the above fields.
For detailed description of this command, please refer to Engineer’s Guide paragraph 32–7.

4–59
GE Medical Systems ADVANTX DLX INSTALLATION
REV 0 sm 2198944-100

RELOAD DLX APPLICATION SOFTWARE (SUN O.S.


& SOLARIS) Job Card LG006 4 of 4

Blank page

4–60
GE Medical Systems ADVANTX DLX INSTALLATION
REV 0 sm 2198944-100

ADVANTX DLX INSTALLATION Job Card LG008 1 of 4

Subassembly (FRU): DLX SYSTEMS

Purpose: FORMATTING THE SUN DISK Version No.: 2


(DOES’NT WORK FOR SOLARIS) Date: 03–98

Time: 30 min Personnel: 1

SECTION 1
SUPPLIES

D SUN CD ROM 2129450 (Solaris 1.1.2).


D A service laptop computer.
D A CD ROM drive usable with Sun Workstation (part number 2113636

SECTION 2
TOOLS REQUIRED

D Not applicable.

SECTION 3
SAFETY PRECAUTIONS

D Not applicable.

SECTION 4
PREREQUISITES

D CDROM drive is connected to Sun workstation (see Job Card LG004).


D Service laptop is connected to Sun workstation (Job Card LG004).

SECTION 5
PROCEDURE

Note: Formatting the Sun disk ERASES ALL INFORMATION ON THE DISK.

4–61
GE Medical Systems ADVANTX DLX INSTALLATION
REV 0 sm 2198944-100

FORMATTING THE SUN DISK


(DOES’NT WORK FOR SOLARIS) Job Card LG008 2 of 4

5.1 Format Procedure

You should only format the disk when you are relatively certain that there are problems with the disk.
Before formatting the disk, try to reload the operating system and application. If this fails, try formatting
the disk and then reloading the software. FORMATTING ERASES ALL INFORMATION ON THE
DISK.
1. The system should be set-up as described in Job Card LG 004.

2. Open the CD ROM drive tray and insert the Solaris 1.1.2 operating system CD.

3. At the ok prompt boot from the CD ROM.

ok boot cdrom <cr>

4. You will be asked a series of Installation questions. Enter the following responses, and press <Return>
after each.

________________________________________________________________

What would you like to do?


1 – Install Sun OS mini–root
2 – Exit to single user shell

Enter 1 or 2: 1 <cr>

________________________________________________________________

Do you want to format and/or label disk sd0?


1 – yes, run format
2 – no, continue with loading miniroot
3 – no, exit to single user shell

Enter 1, 2 or 3: 1 <cr>

________________________________________________________________

#format
searching for disks....done

AVAILABLE DISK SELECTIONS:


0. sd0 at xyc0 slave 0
sd0: <Sun 1.05 cyl 20336 alt 2hd 1Y see72>
Specify disk (enter its number): 0

________________________________________________________________

4–62
GE Medical Systems ADVANTX DLX INSTALLATION
REV 0 sm 2198944-100

FORMATTING THE SUN DISK


(DOES’NT WORK FOR SOLARIS) Job Card LG008 3 of 4

5. The Format Menu appears. At the format prompt, following the menu, type format and press <Return>.

________________________________________________________________

Format Menu:
disk – select a disk
type –select (define) a disk type
partition – select (define) a partition table
current – describe the current disk
format – format the disk
repair – repair a defective sector
show – show a disk address
label – label the disk
analyze – surface analysis
defect – defect list management
backup – search for backup labels
quit
format> format <Return>

Ready to format. Formatting cannot be interrupted and takes 24 minutes.


Continue? y <Return>
............

Formatting ........ done

Verifying Media

pass 0 .........

pass 1 .........

Total of 0 defective block repaired.

format > quit <Return>

________________________________________________________________

4–63
GE Medical Systems ADVANTX DLX INSTALLATION
REV 0 sm 2198944-100

FORMATTING THE SUN DISK


(DOES’NT WORK FOR SOLARIS) Job Card LG008 4 of 4

6. Formatting the disk takes approximately 45 minutes. The mini-root is installed during the above
procedure. If the format procedure is successful, type 1 and press <Return> to reboot using the just
installed mini-root. If the format procedure was not successful, repeat the format procedure (a repeated
inability to format the disk indicates a serious disk problem, if this is the case, you will need to change the
Sun disk).

________________________________________________________________

Mini–root installation complete.

What would you like to do?


1 – Reboot using the just installed mini–root
2 – Exit to single user shell

Enter 1 or 2: 1 <cr>

________________________________________________________________

7. Return to Section 5.1 of Job Card LG 005, and continue on from Step 3 to reload the operating system and
application.

Note: For information on replacing the Sun disk drive, see Job Card D/R 56 A.

4–64
GE Medical Systems ADVANTX DLX INSTALLATION
REV 0 sm 2198944-100

ADVANTX DLX INSTALLATION Job Card LG009 1 of 2

Subassembly (FRU): DLX SYSTEMS

Purpose: REGENERATE VCR PATIENT INFORMATION Version No.: 1


PROCEDURE Date: 04–97

Time: 30 min Personnel: 1

SECTION 1
PROCEDURE

The following procedure is used to regenerate the VCR patient information. An example use of this
procedure would be regenerating the VCR information after using the Clear Database command.

1. In the PATIENT BROWSER FROM DISK screen, click on the New Patient button.

4–65
GE Medical Systems ADVANTX DLX INSTALLATION
REV 0 sm 2198944-100

REGENERATE VCR PATIENT INFORMATION PRO-


CEDURE Job Card LG009 2 of 2

2. Create a new patient with the following characteristics:


Patient Name: VCR
Patient ID: HEADER

3. Click on New Exam and enter the requested information.

4. Click on Start Exam .

5. Perform a 1024 acquisition, with a gray background.


6. In the Sequence Viewer screen name the sequence VCR.
7. Cancel the shutter.

8. Zoom the image using the DLX keypad. (Use the zoom because the sequence is a 1024, and you
will need to add annotations.)
9. Using the DLX keypad, add the following annotations:
HOSPITAL NAME
PATIENT NAME

Note: The above annotations, HOSPITAL NAME and PATIENT NAME, will be replaced by the actual
hospital and patient names during the exam.

4–66

Vous aimerez peut-être aussi